JP2021053515A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preferably improving an attention degree to a game.SOLUTION: A game area 103 is provided on a front face of a game board 100, and the game area 103 comprises an operation port 115. When a game ball enters the operation port 115, the entry of the game ball is stored in a main control unit as reservation information. Then, based on the reservation information, a variable display of patterns on a display screen G of a pattern display device 161 and a variable display of patterns on a specific pattern display part 117 are started. At this time, a reservation notice for notifying a player of a content of the reservation information related to the operation port 115 may be performed by a combination of patterns stopped on the display screen G. A variable display area has a main display area and a sub display area, and a game board unit 90 has a movable accessory as block means for blocking patterns stopped on the sub display area. When the reservation notice is performed using patterns stopped on the sub display area, the movable accessory is moved from a block position to a non-block position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that displays a variable picture on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when the gaming ball passes through the operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a hit state. At the same time, the variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won, a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

In recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the game machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention
A pattern display means for variable display of a plurality of pattern columns on the display screen,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
Grant determination means for sequentially performing grant determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player.
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result, the privilege grant means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege grant means.
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is made. The stop result corresponding to the determination result of is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the above-mentioned of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means that controls the pattern display means so that a variable display of the pattern is performed, and
The information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination is before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. The destination identification means to be specified at the timing,
When the specific result by the prior identification means is a predetermined specific result, the prior identification is performed in the game rounds that are performed before the game rounds related to the special information that is the specific target of the prior specific means. It is characterized by being provided with a special notification means for performing a special notification corresponding to a specific result of the means.

It is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the game.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a front view of the game board unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the game board unit disassembled for each main structure. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is the schematic which shows the positional relationship of a game board and a production unit. It is the schematic which shows the positional relationship of a game board and a production unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery. It is the schematic which shows the distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for the operating port executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process which is executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure which concerns on a display effect. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the mode of the variation display of a symbol. It is the schematic for demonstrating the re-variation effect. It is the schematic for demonstrating the re-variation effect. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the hold notice production. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the hold notice production. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the fanning effect. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display control processing which is executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for a jackpot executed by the MPU of an effect control device. (A) is a schematic diagram for explaining the final stop line table, and (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining the revariation table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for the reach generation executed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is the schematic which shows the stop result table for the ineffective alignment effect. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for normal deviation executed by the MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process during change which is executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the end of fluctuation executed by the MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for hold notice executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the hold command executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the hold notice control process which is executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hold notice setting process which is executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the notice setting process for a big hit executed by the MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the notice setting process for coming off which is executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for hold notice executed by MPU of an effect control device. (A) is a schematic diagram for explaining a stop result table for a normal hold notice, and (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining a stop result table for a special hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the replacement process which is executed in MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result correction process executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st correction process executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is the schematic which shows the correction table. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd correction process executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd correction process executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the notice setting process for coming off which is executed by the MPU of the effect control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for hold notice executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is the schematic for demonstrating the stage production in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notice setting process for a big hit executed by the MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the notice setting process for coming off which is executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for hold notice executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for reach executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the replacement process which is executed in MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd correction process executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd correction process executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the overlap notice production. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the overlap notice production. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the overlap notice production. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the overlap notice production. It is a flowchart which shows the duplication notice setting process executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the correction process for duplication notice executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is the schematic which shows the correction table. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the relationship between the number of reserved information and stage production. It is the schematic for demonstrating each hold notice effect in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic for demonstrating the reach display. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the middle symbol column stop result information table. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the development point to super reach. It is a flowchart which shows the middle symbol string control process at the time of reach executed by MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for hold notice executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the notice type lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for reach executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination process for the 1st hold notice executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination process for the 2nd hold notice executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination process for the 3rd hold notice executed by the MPU of an effect control device. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the stop point of the reach symbol, the development point to the super reach, and the reservation notice. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the stop point of the reach symbol, the development point to the super reach, and the reservation notice. It is the schematic which shows various effect pattern tables in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the stop point of the reach symbol, the development point of the super reach, and the reservation notice. It is a front view which shows the game board in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during change which is executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for passing a ball executed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a front view which shows the structure of the movable accessory device in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of the movable accessory device. It is a front view which shows the structure of the 1st movable accessory. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the structure of a gear. It is a schematic diagram which shows the positional relationship of the upper and lower movable accessories. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the upper and lower movable accessories and the design of a display screen. It is the schematic which shows the stop mode of the symbol in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the stop mode of the symbol in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view showing the game board in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the game board. It is a rear view of (a) a game board, and (b) is a schematic view which shows the relationship between a game board and a movable accessory device. (A) is a schematic view showing the relationship between the game board and the movable accessory device in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 97 (a). It is the schematic which shows the operation mode of the movable accessory device.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an unfolded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 forming the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration in the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the amusement park.

The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the game machine. It has become. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 rotates on the left side when viewed from the front of the game machine and rotates on the right side. It can rotate backward as the moving tip side.

The game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the end on the rotation tip side thereof, and has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened. At the same time, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13. The front door frame 14 is formed with a window opening 56 so that almost the entire area of the game area, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front. The window opening 56 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a transparent window panel 57 is fitted therein. Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window opening 56. A light emitting unit 58 is provided above the window opening 56 as a part of various lamp units. Further, on both the left and right sides of the light emitting unit 58, speaker units 59 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided.

Below the window opening 56 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 61 and a lower bulging portion 62 bulging toward the front side are arranged vertically. An upper plate 61a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 61, and a lower plate 62a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 62. The upper plate 61a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 62a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 61a.

A firing handle 55 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 62 so as to project toward the front side. By operating the launch handle 55, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 51 (see FIG. 2) mounted on the lower part of the inner frame 13. The game ball launch mechanism 51 is provided with a launch solenoid 54 and a ball feed device 53 as drive units, and the launch solenoid 54 and the ball feed device 53 are driven into a drive state based on the operation of the launch handle 55. A game ball is fired every 6 seconds.

<Game board unit 90>
A game board unit 90 is detachably attached to the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 90 is provided on a substantially flat game board 100 facing the window panel 57 through a central opening formed in the inner frame 13 (resin base 21) and on the back surface of the game board 100. It has an attached back block 160 (see FIG. 3). Here, the game board unit 90 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board unit 90, and FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the game board unit 90.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back block 160 has a symbol display device 161 and a movable accessory device 162 that constitute the effect unit, and a base body 163 (see FIG. 3) on which the effect unit is mounted. By fixing the base body 163 to the game board 100, the game board 100 and the back block 160 are integrated. The game board 100 constituting the game board unit 90 is formed by using a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material (specifically, polycarbonate resin), and a part of the back block 160 (a production unit such as a symbol display device 161) is formed through the game board 100. ) Is visible (see the broken line in FIG. 4). Note that in FIG. 5, the illustration of the rear block 160 other than the effect unit is omitted.

<Game board 100>
Here, the game board 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the game board 100, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configurations of the game board 100 in an exploded manner.

As shown in FIG. 4, an inner rail member 101 and an outer rail member 102 that guide the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 51 to the upper part of the game board 100 are attached to the front surface of the game board 100. The rail members 101 and 102 have an arc shape, and the substantially circular region formed by the rail members 101 and 102 is the game region 103 described above. Almost the entire game area 103 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window opening 56 (through the window panel 57). Further, the symbol display device 161 is arranged so that the display screen G is located substantially in the center of the game area 103, and the visibility of the display screen G is guaranteed through the game board 100.

In the portion of the game board 100 where the game area 103 is formed, a plurality of large and small through holes penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed, and each through hole has a general winning opening 113, a variable winning device 114, and an operating opening 115. , Through gate 116 and center frame 130 are arranged.

To give a supplementary explanation of the arrangement of each member, the center frame 130 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 103 so as to surround the display screen G of the symbol display device 161 from above and below. An operating port 115 is arranged below the center frame 130, and a variable winning device 114 is arranged below the operating port 115. Further, through gates 116 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the center frame 130, and general winning openings 113 are arranged on both lower sides of the game area 103 (specifically, three are arranged on the left side and one is arranged on the right side). ing). When a game ball enters the general winning opening 113, the variable winning device 114, and the operating opening 115, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown), and based on the detection result, a predetermined number of balls are placed in the upper plate 61a (in some cases, the lower plate 62a). Prize balls will be paid out.

In addition, a special figure display unit 117 and a normal figure display unit 118 are provided on the upper right side of the game area 103, and an out port 119 is provided at the lower end of the game area 103. Game balls that do not enter the various winning openings and the like are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 119. Further, in the game area 103, a large number of nails 120, a windmill 121, and the like are arranged in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball. Since the polycarbonate resin forming the game board 100 has relatively high elasticity, the game is played when the game ball collides with the nail 120 or the like driven into the surface or the angle of the nail 120 is adjusted. The board 100 is configured so that cracks and the like are unlikely to occur. Further, the length dimension of the screw for fixing the variable winning device 114, the operating port 115, etc. to the game board 100 and the length dimension of the nail 120 driven into the game board 100 are based on the thickness dimension of the game board 100. Is also smaller, and the screws and nails 120 are prevented from protruding toward the back surface of the game board 100.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area 103 after passing through the opening, but also the game area 103 after passing through the opening. It also includes aspects that are not discharged from. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out port 119, the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 113, the variable winning device 114, the operating port 115 or the through gate 116 is performed. , Also expressed as a prize.

The game board 100 is provided with a special figure display unit 117 having a built-in three-color light emitting type LED of red, green, and blue. The special figure display unit 117 is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and the emission color is switched in a predetermined order by triggering a prize in the operating port 115. Specifically, the red light is turned on with the winning of the operating port 115 as a trigger, and the emission color is switched to the green light when a predetermined time elapses in that state. Then, when the predetermined time elapses while the green light is lit, the emission color is switched to the blue light. After that, the emission color is repeatedly switched in the order of red, green, and blue until the time to stop switching the emission color comes. As a result, red, green, and blue are repeatedly displayed on the special figure display unit 117 in this order. If the jackpot is won, the red or green color is finally stopped and displayed, and if the jackpot is not won, the blue color is finally stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage are set, and if a relatively advantageous jackpot is won, the jackpot is finally stopped and displayed in red, resulting in a relatively disadvantageous jackpot. If you win, it will finally be stopped and displayed in green.

The variable winning device 114 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can be won when the transition to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery. .. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big hit is won. It should be noted that, although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult to generate a prize than in the open state. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 114, the variable winning device 114 repeats a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round, and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. It is generally open. The display of the result of the internal lottery on the special figure display unit 117 is continued until the internal lottery is further performed thereafter. That is, during the open / close execution mode, the display of the result that triggered the open / close execution mode is continued.

Regarding the closed state of the variable winning device 114, it is not always necessary that the winning is impossible, and it is sufficient that the winning is more difficult than the open state. Considering such circumstances, the open state can be referred to as a "first state", and the closed state can be referred to as a "second state" in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state.

Further, the display mode on the special figure display unit 117 is not limited to the above mode, for example, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, and a plurality of types of characters are variable. A display configuration or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed may be adopted.

The game board 100 is provided with a general drawing display unit 118 having a built-in red and green two-color light emitting type LED lamp. The normal drawing display unit 118 is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and the emission color is switched in a predetermined order triggered by the winning (passing) of the game ball to the through gate 116. Specifically, when the game ball wins the through gate 116, the red light is turned on and the green light is turned on alternately. As a result, red and green are alternately displayed on the general map display unit 118. Then, when the red color is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory attached to the operating port 115 is configured to be open for a predetermined time.

The center frame 130 is composed of a roof frame 131 that constitutes the upper part of the center frame 130 and a stage frame 140 that forms the lower part of the center frame 130. The roof frame 131 and the stage frame 140 are made of a transparent material such as acrylic resin. The roof frame 131 is arranged above the display screen G, the stage frame 140 is arranged below the display screen G, and the display screen G is vertically sandwiched by the frames 131 and 140 when viewed from the front of the game machine.

The entire roof frame 131 has a groove shape that is open to the rear, and when it is fixed to the game board 100, the open portion to the rear is closed and the front side ball passage 134 is formed. The front side ball passage 134 is formed on the left and right sides with the opening 135 formed in the upper part of the roof frame 131 as an entrance. The roof frame 131 is open downward, and the game ball that has passed through the front ball passage 134 falls downward. Further, the upper surface of the roof frame 131 is formed so as to be inclined downward to both the left and right sides, and the game ball flowing down the game area 103 enters the front side ball passage 134 from the opening 135 of the roof frame 131, or the roof frame 131. Depending on the inclination of, the display screen G will be distributed to the left and right, or will flow down.

In the game board 100, below the roof frame 131, ball receiving portions 132 projecting forward are formed on the left and right. The ball receiving portion 132 plays a role of receiving a game ball that is distributed to the left and right by the upper surface of the roof frame 131 and flows down from below. A through hole is formed in the game board 100 in the front-rear direction so as to communicate with the ball receiving portion 132, and the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 132 is led out to the rear side of the game board 100 by the through hole.

As shown in FIG. 7, the stage frame 140 is composed of a front stage member 141 and a rear stage member 142, both of which are assembled via a through hole formed in the game board 100. The front stage member 141 is opened back and forth, while the rear stage member 142 has a groove shape in which the entire rear stage member 142 is opened forward. The open portions on the left and right sides of the rear stage member 142 are closed by the back surface of the game board 100, and the back side ball passage 143 is formed. The left and right upstream portions of the back ball passage 143 are communicated with the through holes from the ball receiving portion 132, respectively, and the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 132 is led out to the back ball passage 143. To. Further, the front side stage member 141 and the rear side stage member 142 form a stage 144 in which the game ball passing through the back side ball passage 143 rolls in the left-right direction.

Here, the ball receiving portion 132 is arranged outside the roof frame 131 when viewed from the center of the game board 100 (see FIG. 4). In other words, the game ball derived from the front side ball passage 134 of the roof frame 131 does not reach the ball receiving portion 132 even if it falls substantially vertically as it is. On the other hand, a large number of nails 120 are planted below the stage 144, and the game ball derived from the front ball passage 134 bounces off the nails 120 planted below the stage 144. It is also possible to jump on stage 144.

A rear guide portion 145 is formed in the center of the stage 144, and a front guide portion 146 is formed so as to sandwich the rear guide portion 145. The game ball that has been sufficiently decelerated and reaches the rear guide portion 145 is guided by the guide portion 147 formed on the rear stage member 142, and is discharged from the guide portion 147 into the game area 103. In this case, the outlet of the guide portion 147 is located vertically above the operating port 115, and no obstructive member such as a nail 120 is arranged between the two. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the guide portion 147 can easily enter the operating port 115. On the other hand, the game ball that has been sufficiently decelerated and has reached the forward guide portion 146 is discharged into the game area 103 as it is.

Briefly explaining the movement of the game ball in the center frame 130, a part of the game ball distributed to the left and right by the roof frame 131 is received by either the left or right ball receiving portion 132 and reaches the back side ball passage 143. .. The game ball that has reached the back-side ball passage 143 passes through the back-side ball passage 143 and reaches the stage 144. Further, the game ball that has entered the front side ball passage 134 from the opening 135 of the roof frame 131 passes through the front side ball passage 134, falls on the front surface of the display screen G, and collides with the nail 120 to cause the stage 144. To reach. The game ball that has reached the stage 144 rolls left and right on the stage 144. Then, as a result of the rolling, the game ball that has reached the rear guide portion 145 is guided toward the operating port 115 by passing through the guide portion 147. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the front guide portion 146 is discharged into the game area 103 without being guided toward the operating port 115.

In the above configuration, the game ball launched into the game area 103 and entering the general winning opening 113, the variable winning device 114, and the operating opening 115 passes through the through hole formed in the game board 100 and is on the back side of the game board 100. Is led to. The variable winning device 114, the operating port 115, and the stage frame 140 of the center frame 130 project rearward from the back surface of the game board 100 (see FIG. 6), but as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 8, the game board A predetermined space is secured between the 100 and the effect unit (design display device 161 and movable accessory device 162), and interference between the variable winning device 114 or the like protruding rearward and the effect unit is avoided. ..

Hereinafter, the effect unit (design display device 161 and movable accessory device 162) mounted on the back block 160 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 8.

<Back block 160>
As shown in FIG. 8, the symbol display device 161 and the movable accessory device 162 are arranged side by side so that the movable accessory device 162 is on the front side and the symbol display device 161 is on the rear side. That is, the game board 100, the movable accessory device 162, and the symbol display device 161 are arranged in this order from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The symbol display device 161 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content of the display screen G is controlled by a display control device described later. In the symbol display device 161, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the winning of the operating port 115. That is, when the special figure display unit 117 performs the variable display, the symbol display device 161 performs the variable display accordingly.

The symbol display device 161 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT, and may be a dot matrix display. It may be a vessel.

As shown in FIG. 5, the symbol display device 161 is a so-called wide liquid crystal, and its display screen G has a horizontally long shape. The movable accessory device 162 has four movable accessories 170 to 173 arranged at the four corners of the display screen G. That is, the movable accessory device 162 has a first movable accessory 170 arranged in the upper right part of the display screen G, a second movable accessory 171 arranged in the lower right part of the display screen G, and an upper left of the display screen G. It has a third movable accessory 172 arranged in the portion and a fourth movable accessory 173 arranged in the lower left portion of the display screen G.

As shown in FIG. 9, each movable accessory 170 to 173 has a shielded position (shielded state, first position) that overlaps the display screen G in the front-rear direction and a non-shielded position (non-shielded) that does not overlap the display screen G in the front-rear direction. The state and the second position) are individually movable. Since the movable accessories 170 to 173 are formed of a colored opaque synthetic resin material, the movable accessories 170 to 173 are arranged at a shielding position that overlaps with the display screen G, so that the display content of the display screen G behind the movable accessory 170 to 173 can be displayed. It becomes invisible or difficult.

The movable accessory device 162 is provided with drive units 170a to 173a so as to correspond to each movable accessory 170 to 173 on a one-to-one basis. The drive units 170a to 173a are electrically connected to the effect control device 82, which will be described later, and drive the movable accessories 170 to 173 based on the drive signal from the effect control device 82. The effect control device 82 drives and controls each of the drive units 170a to 173a according to the situation of the game state, and changes the visible range of the display content of the display screen G behind the effect to perform the effect.

Regarding the movable accessory device 162, it is sufficient if it is possible to change the visible range on the display screen G. That is, it suffices if the display screen G and the movable accessories 170 to 173 can be moved to the first position where the overlapping area is large in the front-rear direction and the second position where the overlapping area is smaller than that.

In this way, the movable accessory device 162 is arranged between the game board 100 and the symbol display device 161. The area sandwiched between the game board 100 and the symbol display device 161 is the operating area of the movable accessory 170 to 173. It has become. As described above, the game board 100 is formed of colorless and transparent members, and the visibility of the movable accessories 170 to 173 and the symbol display device 161 which are the members behind the colorless and transparent members is ensured. Therefore, in the area of the game board 100 that overlaps the movable accessories 170 to 173 in the front-rear direction, a through hole for ensuring the visibility of the movable accessories 170 to 173 is not formed (game to the back side ball passage 143). Only through holes that lead out the sphere are formed). In this case, a through hole for ensuring visibility is not formed, and the game board 100 is always interposed between the game area 103 and the movable accessories 170 to 173. As a result, while suppressing the deterioration of the visibility of the movable accessories 170 to 173, the game ball collides with the movable accessories 170 to 173 and the trajectory of the flow of the game ball changes, or the movable accessory 170 to 170 to It avoids the occurrence of inconveniences such as the movement of 173 being hindered by the game ball.

In particular, in a gaming machine such as the pachinko machine 10, in which a player can obtain a privilege by inserting a gaming ball flowing down a gaming area into a predetermined opening, the game is irregular depending on the game situation. If the trajectory of the flow changes due to the collision of the game ball with a character or the like that performs various movements, the player may feel distrust of the game. Therefore, in general, in the case of a configuration including an accessory that performs irregular movements, a configuration that operates outside the game area on the front portion of the game board, or a through hole is provided in front of the liquid crystal screen on the game board. , The center frame is built into the through hole to regulate the invasion of the game ball into the inner region of the center frame, and the above-mentioned accessory or the like is generally operated in the inner region. In this case, in the former case, since the size of the game machine is limited, the game area becomes narrower when trying to secure the operating area of the accessory, and conversely, the game area becomes wider when trying to secure the game area. There may be a problem that the operating area of an object or the like is narrowed. Further, in the latter case, with the increase in size of the liquid crystal screen in recent years, the center frame also tends to increase in size, and as a result, there may be a problem that the game area in which the game ball can flow down becomes narrow. On the other hand, by configuring the pachinko machine 10 like this, it is possible to avoid a collision between the game ball and the movable accessories 170 to 173 no matter how the movable accessories 170 to 173 move. Further, since the game ball can flow down in the area of the game area 103 that overlaps the operation area of the movable accessories 170 to 173 in the front-rear direction, the game area is not pressed. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10, the moving range of the game ball is sufficiently secured, and the effect function is improved by the movement of the accessory.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the base body 163 of the game board unit 90), a main control device 81 that controls the main control of the game, and a voice, a lamp display, and a symbol display device 161 are used. It is equipped with an effect control device 82 that controls the display control device.

The substrate box 71a of the main control device 81 is provided with various trace means for leaving a trace of its opening. As a trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 71a are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is formed, or an adhesive layer is used as an adhesion target at the time of peeling. A structure is adopted in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies.

The back pack unit 15 is arranged so as to cover the main control device 81 and the effect control device 82 from the back side of the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 73 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism portion 74 and a control device collecting unit 75 are attached to the back pack 73.

The payout mechanism unit 74 includes a tank 76 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 96 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 76. The game ball paid out from the payout device 96 is discharged to the upper plate 61a or the lower plate 62a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. The payout mechanism 74 is equipped with a back pack substrate having, for example, an AC 24 volt main power supply and a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device collective unit 75 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 97 having a function of controlling the payout device 96 and various control devices and the like, and at the same time, a game associated with the operation of the launch handle 55 by the player. It is equipped with a power supply / launch control device 98 that controls the launch of the ball. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 202, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. It is an element having a built-in RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. It should be noted that a configuration may be configured in which a part of the functions of the MPU 202, for example, the function of the ROM 203 and the function of the RAM 204 are provided as another element.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211d, etc. provided in the main control device 81 are connected to the input side of the MPU 202. In this case, the power supply / emission control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. Further, as a part of various detection sensors 211a to 211d, a plurality of prize-winning ball-entry units (payout-compatible ball-entry units) such as a general winning opening 113, a variable winning device 114, an operating port 115, and a through gate 116 are provided. A detection sensor is connected, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 202, the jackpot generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the operating port 115, and the support generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the through gate 116.

A power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an effect control device 82 are connected to the output side of the MPU 202. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the result of the prize winning determination to the prize-winning ball winning unit. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when the prize ball command is output. Then, when a prize is specified for the general prize opening 113, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a prize for the variable prize device 114 is specified, 15 prize balls are output. The prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the game ball is output, and when the winning of the operating port 115 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output.

Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the effect control device 82. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 114a for opening and closing the opening / closing door of the variable winning device 114, an electric accessory driving unit 115a for opening / closing the electric accessory of the operating port 115, and a special figure display unit 117. The normal drawing display unit 118 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 201, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 114a is executed in the MPU 202 so that the variable winning device 114 is opened and closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the open state of the electric accessory of the operating port 115 is won, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 115a is executed in the MPU 202 so that the electric accessory is opened and closed. Further, the MPU 202 executes the display control of the special figure display unit 117 and the normal figure display unit 118 described above.

The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply / emission control device 98, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 98. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply / launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 201, the payout control device 97, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. Further, the power supply / launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 51, and the game ball launch mechanism 51 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The effect control device 82 drives and controls the light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 81, and also controls the display control device 212. ..

The display control device 212 executes the display control of the symbol display device 161 based on the command input from the effect control device 82. In this case, the effect control device 82 determines the type of combination of the symbol variation display pattern in the symbol display device 161 and the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands input from the main control device 81. Execute a lottery for the presence or absence of reach and the content of the reach effect.

Here, the contents related to the variable display of the symbols of each game will be described with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 11 and 12.

The display control device 212 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, data of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" (see FIGS. 11A to 11) and data of sub-symbols without numbers are added. (See FIG. 11 (j)) is stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 12A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 161. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

In the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

Almost the entire display screen G shown in the present embodiment is a variable display area of Z1 to Z3 having the above-mentioned design, and the variable display area is a target to be shielded by the movable accessory device 162 as shown in FIG. It is roughly divided into an area (hereinafter referred to as a sub-display area Rs) and an area not to be shielded (main display area Rm). The left and right sides of the main display area Rm in the variable display direction (left-right direction) are the sub-display areas Rs. Specifically, the central 3/5 of the display screen G is the main display area Rm, and the others (right). 1/5 and 1/5 on the left) are set as sub-display areas Rs.

To supplement the relationship between the display screen G and each movable accessory 170 to 173, in a situation where each movable accessory 170 to 173 is arranged at a shielded position, the main display area Rm is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 and is secondary. The display area Rs is difficult or impossible to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, in the situation where the movable accessories 170 to 173 are arranged in the non-shielding position, both the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine.

Since the shielded position and the non-shielded position are individually moved for each of the movable accessories 170 to 173, the left and right sub-display areas Rs can be individually switched between the shielded state and the non-shielded state. Hereinafter, for convenience of description, the right sub-display area Rs is referred to as the right sub-display area Rs1, and the left sub-display area Rs is referred to as the left sub-display area Rs2.

As shown in FIG. 12B, on the display screen G, 5 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 15 symbols of 3 × 5 are stopped and displayed. It has become like. Of these, in the main display area Rm, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. Further, in each of the left and right sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2, a total of 6 symbols of 1 × 3 × 2 are stopped and displayed. In the pachinko machine 10, five valid lines and six non-valid lines are set according to the 15 symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display screen G.

Specifically, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set in the main display area Rm. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on one of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the probability variation jackpot result.

The ineffective lines include ineffective lines L6 and L9 set in the sub-display area Rs and ineffective lines L7, L8, L10 and L11 set so as to straddle the sub-display area Rs and the main display area Rm. It is composed of. Specifically, a right ineffective line L6 is set in the right sub-display area Rs1, and a right-right descending line L7 and a right-right rising line L8 span the right sub-display area Rs1 and the main display area Rm. It is set. Further, a left ineffective line L9 is set in the left side sub-display area Rs2, and a left-side right-down line L10 and a left-side right-up line L11 are set over the left side sub-display area Rs2 and the main display area Rm. Has been done. These ineffective lines L6 to L11 are lines used in the production of the pachinko machine 10, and the game result is notified only by the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the effective lines L1 to L5 (main display area Rm). To.

Explaining the positional relationship with each movable accessory 170 to 173, under the situation where the first movable accessory 170 on the upper right is arranged in the shielded position, the symbol displayed as a stop on the upper stage of the right ineffective line L6 and A part of the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle row is covered with the first movable accessory 170, which hinders the visual confirmation of those symbols. Further, in the situation where the second movable accessory 171 at the lower left is arranged in the shielded position, the symbol displayed as a stop in the lower row of the right ineffective line L6 and a part of the symbol displayed as a stop in the middle row are the first. 2 It is covered with the movable accessory 171 and the visual confirmation of those symbols is hindered.

That is, the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the upper row in the right sub-display area Rs1 becomes visible when the first movable accessory 170 moves from the shielded position to the non-shielded position, and the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the lower row is the second movable. The accessory 171 can be visually recognized by moving from the shielded position to the non-shielded position. Further, the entire symbol that is stopped and displayed in the middle stage can be visually recognized by moving the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 from the shielded position to the non-shielded position.

Also in the left sub-display area Rs2, the positional relationship between the symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 and each movable accessory 172 and 173 is the same, and the symbol displayed stopped in the upper part of the left ineffective line L9 is The third movable accessory 172 on the upper left moves from the shielded position to the non-shielded position so that it can be visually recognized, and the symbol displayed as a stop in the lower row moves the fourth movable accessory 173 on the lower left from the shielded position to the non-shielded position. This makes it visible. Further, the entire symbol that is stopped and displayed in the middle stage can be visually recognized by moving the third movable accessory 172 and the fourth movable accessory 173 from the shielded position to the non-shielded position.

Explaining the relationship between the ineffective lines L6 to L11 and the movable accessories 170 to 173, in the right ineffective line L6, the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 move from the shielded position to the non-shielded position. It becomes visible at. The right-right falling line L7 becomes visible when the second movable accessory 171 moves from the shielded position to the non-shielded position, and the right-right rising line L8 causes the first movable accessory 170 to move from the shielded position to the non-shielded position. It becomes visible by moving. The left non-effective line L9 becomes visible when the third movable accessory 172 and the fourth movable accessory 173 move from the shielded position to the non-shielded position. The left-side right-down line L10 becomes visible when the third movable accessory 172 moves from the shielded position to the non-shielded position, and the left-side right-up line L11 causes the fourth movable accessory 173 to move from the shielded position to the unshielded position. It becomes visible by moving.

In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). (2 pattern rows), the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or a third symbol row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol The combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. To.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 161 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged side by side, and the direction of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row may be set to the vertical direction. In this case, the arrangement of the movable accessories 170 to 173 may be changed according to the number of symbol rows and the direction of fluctuation of the symbols.

<About various counters>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 202 uses various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot generation lottery, setting the display of the special figure display unit 117, setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 161, setting the display of the normal figure display unit 118, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating jackpots, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 161 are displaced and fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variation type for determining the display duration in the special figure display unit 117 and the symbol display device 161. The counter CS is used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory of the operating port 115 is set to the electric accessory open state (support state) is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. Among them, in the lottery counter buffer 231, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the RAM 204 as an acquisition information storage means when a prize is generated in the operating port 115. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232.

The hold ball storage area 232 includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is used as a lottery counter buffer according to the winning history of the operating port 115. The stored numerical information combinations of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the operation port 115 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE2 → the third holding area Each numerical information is stored in the order of RE3 → 4th holding area RE4 in chronological order. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game ball to the operating port 115 can be held and stored. Further, the hold area RE includes a hold number storage area NA, and the hold number storage area NA stores information for identifying the number of the winning history stored in the operation port 115 on hold. ..

The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to 4, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 117, and is the start of one game. At that time, a hit / fail judgment is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 116. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory of the operating port 115 to the electric accessory open state (support state) according to the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric accessory of the operating port 115 are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, the electric accessory of the operating port 115 is in an open state per unit time when compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched with respect to the game area 103 in the same manner. A low-frequency support mode (or a low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (or a high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of occurrence is relatively high or low.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory of the operating port 115 is opened when the electric service open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and one opening time is set. It has been set for a long time. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric accessory open state is won and the electric accessory of the operating port 115 is opened a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time up to is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (that is, that is secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed) is secured as compared with the low-frequency support mode. The duration of one display on the normal map display unit 118) is set short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the operating port 115 is won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. Then, when a prize is won in the operating port 115, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while suppressing the consumption (investment) of the balls held. be able to.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. In addition, the secured time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (for example, on the general map display unit 118 based on the winning of the through gate 116). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times to be executed) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is more easily selected or the average reservation time is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. You may be. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened. Even if the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode is increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions of shortening the average securing time and increasing the winning probability. Good.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the operating port 115.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (win / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 221 as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, as the pass / fail tables, the pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) in FIG. 14 (a) and the pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high) in FIG. 14 (b). Probability pass / fail information group) is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 14A, the value of the random number that wins the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that wins the big hit is 21. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value (that is, 29), and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the operating port 115.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 222 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. In the distribution table, as shown in FIG. 14B, a normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result) and a probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding special game result) are set as distribution destinations of the game results. ing.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (low probability corresponding special gaming state).

The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state. In other words, the probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the probability variation jackpot state (high probability corresponding special gaming state).

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state means a state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the operating port 115. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area RE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the operating port 115. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203. However, in the game round that shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the reach display (reach state) is a game time in which a symbol display device 161 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture) is provided, and the open / close execution mode of the variable winning device 114 is set. In a gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variation display is a special display result, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variation display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 161. This is a display state for the player to think that the display state is a variable display state in which the special display result is likely to occur before the display is performed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 161, a combination of jackpot symbols may be established. It is a display state in which a combination is displayed and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, a reach symbol that may have a combination of jackpot symbols is established on a preset effective line in the display screen G of the symbol display device 161. A reach line is formed by displaying the combination as a stop, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

The display mode at the time of the reach display will be illustrated with reference to FIG. In the case of reach display, the fluctuation display of the symbol is first terminated (stopped display) in the upper symbol row Z1, and then the fluctuation display of the symbol is terminated (stopped display) in the lower symbol row Z3. In the state, the reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Then, in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach display is obtained by performing the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2 in the middle row. Then, when shifting to the open / close execution mode, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. The fluctuation display of is finished.

In the present embodiment, the reach display is not performed on the non-effective lines L6 to L11. However, the reach display may also be performed on the ineffective lines L6 to L11.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol strings are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in substantially the entire display screen G or substantially the entire main display area Rm after reducing or hiding the combination of the reach symbols and the one to be produced. Includes those that do. In addition, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to perform the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. You may.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time on the special symbol display unit 117 and the variation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 161. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 161.

When determining the variation display time in the symbol display device 161, the buffer values of the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS, and the variation display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 are referred to. Further, in the MPU 202, the stop result in the special figure display unit 117 is determined by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. The stop result table storage area 224 is used.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 81>
Next, the timer interrupt process and the normal process executed in advancing the game in each game time by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 will be described. In the MPU 202, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. However, description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically activated by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, the reading process of various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 81 is read, and the state of the winning detection sensor is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In the following step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

After that, in step S104, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating port 115 is executed, and then in step S105, the winning process for the thru accompanying the winning of the through gate 116 is executed, and then this timer Terminate interrupt processing. In the through winning process, when the through gate 116 has been won, the number of winnings held in the electric service holding area 233 is less than the upper limit (for example, "4"). On condition that, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric accessory holding area 233.

Here, the winning process for the operating port in step S104 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the winning process for the operating port, first, in step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the operating port 115. If the game ball has not won a prize in the operating port 115, the main winning process is terminated as it is. When the game ball has won the operating port 115, in step S202, the value stored in the hold number storage area NA of the hold ball storage area 232 is read, and the start is held and stored in the hold area RE. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls N is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment).

If the number of balls N on hold for starting is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the winning process is terminated as it is. If the number of start-holding balls N is less than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S203, and the start-holding number of balls N is incremented (added) by 1. In the following step S204, each value (each numerical information) of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS updated in the previous step S103 is set to the empty hold area of the hold area RE. It is stored in the first hold area of RE1 to RE4, that is, the hold area corresponding to the hold storage number incremented by 1 in step S203.

In the following step S205, a confirmation process for holding notice for executing an effect based on the winning of the game ball in the operating port 115 is executed. Then, in step S206, after executing the setting process of the hold command for causing the effect control device 82, which is the control device on the sub side, to recognize that the game ball has won the prize in the operating port 115, the winning for the main operating port End the process.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of steps S301 to S306 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps S308 and S309 is executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, in step S301, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. Further, when an effect command such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, and various hold commands is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

Next, in step S302, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S303, various signals from the payout control device 97 connected to the MPU 202 are read. After that, in step S304, a game time control process for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In this game time control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 161, display control of the special symbol display unit 117, and the like are performed. The details of the game time control process will be described later.

After that, in step S305, the game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. The details will be described later, but by this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like.

In step S306, the electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory provided in the operating port 115 is executed. In this electric service support process, whether or not to open the electric accessory of the operating port 115 by using the numerical information acquired from the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 233 of the RAM 204. The electric service opening lottery is performed, and when the electric service open state is won, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory of the operating port 115 is executed. In addition, the display control of the general drawing display unit 118 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric service opening lottery.

As described above, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the mode of support by the electric accessory of the operating port 115, and the game state transition process in step S305 switches to either support mode. The migration takes place. In this case, if the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204, the high frequency support mode is set, and if the flag is not stored, the low frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process in step S306, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204. Then, in the case of the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory of the operating port 115 is opened is set more than in the case of the low frequency support mode when the electric service open state is won. Set a long opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric accessory open state is won and the electric accessory of the operating port 115 is opened multiple times, the next open state is changed after one open state is completed. The closing time until the start is set to be shorter than the one opening time.

By the way, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204.

In the following step S307, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated (steps S308 and S309). That is, in step S308, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. Further, in step S309, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S301 to S306 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 18 and 19.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, in the game rotation control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the main game is performed without executing any of the processes after step S402, that is, the game round start process of steps S403 to S405 and the game round progress process of steps S406 to S409. End the control process.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the special figure display unit 117 is in the variable display. If the special figure display unit 117 is not displaying the fluctuation, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S403 to S405. In the game round start process, first, in step S403, it is determined whether or not the start reserved ball number N is "0". When the starting reserved ball number N is "0", it means that the reserved ball storage area 232 does not store the reserved information. Therefore, the main game times control process is terminated as it is.

If the number of starting reserved balls N is not "0", the data setting process for setting the data stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 232 for variable display is executed in step S404.

In the data setting process, first, the number of start-holding balls N is subtracted by 1. Further, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE in the holding ball storage area 232 is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in each of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed.

This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 to the lower area side. As a result, the data of the first holding area RE1 is cleared, and the second holding area RE2 → the first holding area RE1, the third holding area RE3 → the second holding area RE2, the fourth holding area RE4 → the third holding area RE3, etc. The data in each area is shifted accordingly.

Further, in the data setting process, a shift command (shift generation information), which is information for causing the effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted is set. The shift command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process (step S301) of the normal process. The effect control device 82 executes a process corresponding to the decrease in the number of held items based on the received shift command.

After executing the data setting process, in step S405, the variation display in the special figure display unit 117 and the variation start process for starting the variation display in the symbol display device 161 are executed, and then the game round control process is terminated. ..

Here, the fluctuation start processing will be described. In the fluctuation start processing, as shown in FIG. 19, first, in step S501, a hit / fail determination process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the current fluctuation start processing corresponds to the jackpot winning is executed. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for determining the jackpot, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the winning / losing table for the low-probability mode in ROM 203 is referred to to specify whether or not the above-mentioned grasped information is included in the information corresponding to the jackpot winning, and the winning / failing is achieved. When the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high-probability mode in the ROM 203 is referred to, and it is specified whether or not the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to the jackpot winning.

In the following step S502, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S501 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If the result corresponds to the jackpot winning, the type determination process is executed in step S503.

In the type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for type determination, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the distribution table in the ROM 203, it is specified whether or not the above-identified information for type determination is included in the information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether or not the type of the current jackpot winning is the probability variation jackpot result based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S503. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is executed in step S505, and if it is not the probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the normal jackpot is executed in step S506. If it is determined in step S502 that the jackpot is not won, the stop result setting process for the time of loss is executed in step S507.

In each stop result setting process of steps S505 to S507, information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 117 is specified from the information stored in advance in the ROM 203, and the specified information is specified in the RAM 204. Remember in. Further, in step S505 and step S506, information for identifying in the MPU 202 that the hit / fail determination result of the current game round is a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 ( Store the information of "1" in the corresponding area). Specifically, in step S505, the probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and in step S506, the normal jackpot flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes of steps S505 to S507, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S508.

In the variation display time setting process, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer 231 of the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204 is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 161 in this game round. Specifically, if the game times related to the start of this fluctuation are any of the jackpot results, it is determined that the reach display will occur. Further, regardless of which jackpot result is not obtained, if the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, it is determined that the reach display occurs. ..

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the variation display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the variation display time table for the reach generation stored in the ROM 203, and the variation is obtained. The display time information is stored in the variable display time counter provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the variation display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the variation display time table for non-reach stored in the ROM 203. Then, the fluctuation display time information is stored in the fluctuation display time counter. Incidentally, the variable display time that can be acquired by referring to the variable display time table for non-reach generation is different from the variable display time that can be acquired by referring to the variable display time table for reach generation.

Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display and a super reach display having different variable display modes. In the variation display time table for reach generation, variation display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set, and by referring to the table, the variation display time information corresponding to each reach display can be obtained. To be acquired. Regarding the determination of the reach display type, a table corresponding to the reach display type and the value of the variable type counter CS is provided, and by referring to the table, the value of the variable type counter CS this time can be used. The corresponding reach display is determined.

The fluctuation display time information when the reach does not occur is set so that the larger the number of start-holding balls N, the shorter the fluctuation display time. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach is not selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable display time table for occurrence is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display time may not fluctuate according to the number of start-holding balls N and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. Further, in the case of each jackpot result, the variable display time table may be set individually for each of the case of the out-of-reach case and the case of the out-of-reach non-occurrence case. In this case, the variable display time is distributed according to each game result.

The variable display time information when the reach does not occur is set so that the variable display time is shorter than the variable display time when the reach occurs. Further, the variable display time is set so that the variable display time information in the normal reach display is shorter than the variable display time in the super reach display. That is, each of the above fluctuation display time information is set so that the fluctuation display time becomes longer in the order of non-reach occurrence <normal reach display <super reach display.

As described above, the variation display time of each game is determined by using the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the type of reach display, the number of reserved information, and the value of the variation type counter CS as parameters. However, the variable display time of each game is set with the contents of other reserved information, specifically, the information for jackpot determination, the information for type determination, and the information for reach determination included in the other reserved information as parameters. Determined without doing.

After executing the variation display time setting process in step S508, the variation command and the type command are set in step S509. The fluctuation command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time acquired by referring to the non-reach variable display time table is different from the display duration acquired by referring to the reach generated variable display time table, and therefore varies. Even if the command for the command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, the effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, can specify the presence or absence of reach occurrence from the information on the fluctuation display time. Note that the variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes information on the normal jackpot result, information on the probability variation jackpot result, or information on the deviation result as the information on the game result.

The variation command and the type command set in step S509 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 17). After executing the process of step S509, the special figure display unit 117 starts the variable display of the pattern in step S510, and then the variable start process ends.

Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 18), when the special figure display unit 117 is in the variable display, the game times progress processing of steps S406 to S409 is executed. In the game round progress process, first, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation display time information stored in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 204 is "0". As described above, the value of the fluctuation display time information is stored in the fluctuation display time setting process (step S508). Further, the value of the stored fluctuation display time information is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) is activated.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S407. In the variable display process, the display mode on the special figure display unit 117 is changed. After that, the game times control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S408. In the variation end processing, the information stored in the RAM 204 is specified in any of the processes of steps S505 to S507, and the aspect of the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the special figure display unit 117. The figure display unit 117 is displayed and controlled.

In the following step S409, a variable end command is set. After that, the game times control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step S409 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 17). By receiving the received variation end command, the effect control device 82 makes a final stop display (final stop display) of the combination of the final stop symbols corresponding to the result of the game times in the variation display by the symbol display device 161.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game state transition process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S602, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 117 of one game is completed. If it is not the timing when the fluctuation display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

When the variation display is finished, in step S603, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game times corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the normal jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

When any of the above flags is stored, "15" is stored in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S604. The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the variable winning device 114 is opened. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the open / close execution mode is not in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed. In the large winning opening opening / closing process, when the variable winning device 114 is closed, the variable winning drive unit 114a is set to the driving state on condition that the round counter area RC is "1" or more, thereby performing variable winning. The device 114 is opened. Further, when the variable winning device 114 is open, the variable winning drive is performed on condition that a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening of the variable winning device 114 or a predetermined number of game balls have been won. The driving state of the unit 114a is stopped, and the variable winning device 114 is closed.

In the following step S606, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter area RC is "0", the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S607.

In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, when the probability change jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. In addition, these high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes are maintained at least until the next big hit. When the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode ends when the game times continue 100 times, and then shifts to the normal game state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

Then, in step S608, after executing the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the main game state transition process is ended. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the stored flag is deleted from the normal jackpot flag and the probability variation jackpot flag.

<About the electrical configuration of the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212>
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 21, the electrical configuration of the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be supplementarily described.

The MPU 242 is mounted on the effect control board 241 provided on the effect control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 242, and a RAM 244 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 243. It is an element with a built-in interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, and so on. It is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. The main control device 81 receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as various hold commands and shift commands. It also receives game turn control commands (game turn control information) such as variable command, type command, and variable end command. It also receives open / close execution mode commands (open / close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As described above, the light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242, and the display control device 212 is connected to the output side. Further, drive units 170a to 173a for each movable accessory 170 to 173 of the movable accessory device 162 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242, respectively. In the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82, the variation display pattern (effect pattern) of each game time and the stop result of the symbol are determined based on various commands received from the main control device 81, and the light emitting unit 58, the speaker unit 59, and the drive are determined. Drive control of units 170a to 173a is performed, and the determined content is transmitted to the display control device 212 as a command.

The display control device 212 is a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252, which is an element in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257, respectively, are mounted. It has. It is not essential that the program ROM 253 and the work RAM 254 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 252, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 displays the symbol display device 161 by executing drawing processing on the video RAM 257 in the VDP 255 based on receiving a command from the main control device 81 via the effect control device 82. Various images are displayed on the screen G.

The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 161. Since the VDP 255 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 161.

The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 161. The character ROM 256 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and share them with each character ROM 256 to store image data and the like. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 161. By rewriting the contents of the video RAM 257, the display contents of the symbol display device 161 are changed.

<Explanation of the production of each game>
Here, the outline of the game effect (interlocking effect) using each movable accessory 170 to 173 and the display screen G will be described.

First, the variation display of the game times will be described with reference to FIG.

When the game round is started, the high-speed fluctuation display is first started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol is displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 22A, the variation display mode of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can recognize the symbol displayed in the variation. Then, as shown in FIG. 22B, the variation display of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is completed, and the variation display mode of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (c), the variation display of the lower symbol sequence Z3 ends.

After the end of the fluctuation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a waiting time (waiting period) for maintaining the stop display for a predetermined period and waiting is provided (for example, 2 sec), and this game is performed in the waiting time. A definite display is performed to clearly indicate the result of the game to the player. Then, when the waiting time elapses while the combination of the symbols (specific symbol or non-specific symbol) corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, the jackpot result is generated and the opening / closing is executed thereafter. Move to mode.

In this case, for example, even if the waiting period elapses while the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot results is stopped and displayed on the ineffective lines L6 to L11, the jackpot result does not occur. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, during this standby period, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot results stopped and displayed on the above-mentioned ineffective lines L6 to L11 moves to the effective lines L1 to L5 and finally. A re-variation effect is set that leads to the occurrence of a jackpot result. Hereinafter, the flow of the revariation effect will be illustrated with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 23 and 24. In addition, in FIGS. 23 and 24, for convenience of explanation, a portion that is actually shielded by the movable accessories 170 to 173 so as to be invisible is also shown in a pseudo-transparent state.

As shown in FIG. 23 (a), as a line formed only by the symbols stopped in the sub-display area Rs, for example, each symbol column Z1 to 1 in a state where the combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the right non-valid line L6. It is assumed that the fluctuation display of Z3 is completed. In this case, in the above standby time, as shown in FIG. 23B, first the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 that shield the right non-effective line L6 move from the shielded position to the non-shielded position. As described above, the drive units 170a and 171a are driven and controlled so that all the combinations of the specific symbols on the shielded right non-effective line L6 can be visually recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), the combination of the specific symbols moves on the effective line (middle line L2 in the figure), and the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 are in the non-shielding position. Displace from to the shield position. After that, it is clearly indicated that the jackpot result has been obtained by the elapse of the above waiting time, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Further, even when the combination of the specific symbols is stopped on the ineffective line straddling both the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs, the revariation effect may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), it is assumed that the combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the left-side right-down line L10 as the second ineffective line, and the variation display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is completed. In this case, in the above standby time, as shown in FIG. 24B, first, the third movable accessory 172 that shields the sub-display area Rs (left sub-display area Rs2) of the left-side right-down line L10 is not from the shielding position. The drive unit 172a is driven and controlled so as to move to the shielded position, and all the combinations of the specific symbols on the shielded left-side right-down line L10 become visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), the combination of the specific symbols moves on the effective line (downward right line L4 in the figure), and the third movable accessory 172 moves from the non-shielded position to the shielded position. .. After that, it is clearly indicated that the jackpot result has been obtained by the elapse of the above waiting time, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In this pachinko machine 10, in a part of the case where a jackpot result occurs, it is set so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is temporarily stopped on the ineffective line, and then the re-variation effect is performed. There is. In other words, the above-mentioned re-variation effect occurs with a predetermined probability when the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result stops on the ineffective line. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, a part of the symbol stopped in the sub-display area Rs protrudes from the movable accessory 170 to 173, and the protruding portion is allowed to be visually recognized from the front of the game machine. .. Therefore, the player can recognize when the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the ineffective line by gazing at the protruding portion.

The player expects that the above-mentioned re-variation effect is performed from the time when the stop display is displayed to the time when the waiting time elapses (after the variation display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is completed). By performing such a display effect, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result does not stop on the effective line, until the game round is finally completed (until the waiting time elapses). It is possible to maintain the expectation that the jackpot may be won, and it is possible to appropriately secure the degree of attention to the game.

In the pachinko machine 10, a hold notice suggesting the content of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 is given with a predetermined probability at a timing before the game round related to the hold information is started. It is composed. Therefore, the flow of the hold notice will be illustrated below with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 25 and 26. In FIG. 26, for convenience of explanation, a portion that is actually shielded by the movable accessories 170 to 173 so as to be invisible is also shown in a pseudo-transparent state.

The hold notice is given by using the stop result (combination of stop symbols) in the game round before the start of the game round of the hold information that is the target of the hold notice. Specifically, as a result of stopping the game times before the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is not formed on the effective line, and By stopping and displaying the same symbol in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the content of the hold information that is the target of the hold notice is suggested.

For example, if the hold information that is the target of the hold notice is the probability change jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the game times before the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice. The display effect for the hold notice is executed at. Specifically, the combination of specific symbols is not stopped on the effective line, and the same specific symbol is stopped and displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm). To end. After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the probability variation jackpot result was obtained by stopping and displaying the combination of specific symbols on the effective line in the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice. Is specified.

If the hold information subject to the hold notice is a normal jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), the game before the game times related to the hold information subject to the hold notice. At the times, the display effect for the hold notice is executed. Specifically, the combination of non-specific symbols is not stopped on the effective line, and the same non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (stop-displayed in the main display area Rm). ) End the game round. After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), the normal jackpot result was obtained by stopping and displaying the combination of non-specific symbols on the valid line in the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice. It is clearly stated.

The hold notice may be given using not only the main display area Rm but also both the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs. That is, as shown in FIG. 26A, for example, in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the main display region Rm, and the sub display region Rs (FIG. Then, the symbol corresponding to the left sub-display area Rs2 (upper) is stopped and displayed. Then, in the above standby time, as shown in FIG. 26B, by moving the third movable accessory 172 from the shielded position to the non-shielded position, the same symbols can be visually recognized, and then the third movable accessory is made visible. The object 172 is moved to the shielded position to end the game round. After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice, the combination of the specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line, so that the probability change jackpot result is obtained. Be specified.

In the hold notice shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the case where only one of the left and right sub-display areas Rs (sub-display area Rs2) is used is illustrated, but in addition to this, both the left and right sub-display areas Rs are used. In some cases, the display areas Rs1 and Rs2 are used to give a hold notice, and the hold notice is diverse. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 26 (d) to 26 (f), a hold notice using the sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2 on both the left and right sides will be illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 26 (d), the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the right sub-display area Rs1, the left sub-display area Rs2, and the main display area Rm (in the figure, the left sub-display area Rs2 in the upper symbol sequence Z1 and the left sub-display area Rs2 are displayed. The same symbol is stopped and displayed in the right sub-display area Rs1 in the middle symbol string Z2 and the main display area Rm in the lower symbol string Z3). Then, in the above standby time, as shown in FIG. 26E, by moving the first movable accessory 170, the second movable accessory 171 and the third movable accessory 172 from the shielded position to the non-shielded position, they are the same. After making each of the symbols visible, the third movable accessory 172 is moved to the shielding position to end the game round. After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), in the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice, the combination of the specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line, so that the probability change jackpot result is obtained. Be specified.

In this way, in the hold notice, not only the main display area Rm in which the effective lines L1 to L5 are set, but also the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the sub display area Rs that is shielded by the movable accessories 170 to 173 is used. And the production is done. On the other hand, even when the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs, if the corresponding movable accessory moves and the symbol cannot be visually recognized, the effect is as follows. The hold notice is not valid (it is just a miss). That is, regarding the hold notice using the sub-display area Rs, the corresponding movable accessory moves from the shielded position to the non-shielded position, and the entire symbol to be shielded becomes visible. It is set as an execution condition.

Similarly, in the above-mentioned re-variation effect described above, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the non-effective line, the corresponding movable accessory must move from the shielded position to the non-shielded position. If this is the case, only a mere missed eye will be displayed, and it will not be a big hit. Therefore, even in the re-variation effect, it is set as an execution condition of the re-variation effect that the corresponding movable accessory moves from the shielded position to the non-shielded position.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as described above, the display content on the display screen G and the movements of the movable accessories 170 to 173 are linked to perform the re-variation effect and the hold notice effect. Therefore, when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen G, the subsequent development is greatly affected by whether or not the corresponding movable accessory 170 to 173 moves from the shielded position to the non-shielded position. Become. In view of such circumstances, in the present embodiment, the movable accessories 170 to 173 corresponding to the above-mentioned effects are produced as an effect of expecting the player to move the movable accessories 170 to 173 to the non-shielded position. A fanning effect that vibrates (moves up and down) is set. Hereinafter, the flow of the fanning effect will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 27. In addition, since the fanning effect is roughly divided into the fanning effect related to the re-variation effect and the fanning effect related to the hold notice effect, the fanning effect related to the re-variation effect is first explained, and then the hold notice effect is described. This fanning effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 27, FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (d) correspond to the hold notice effect, and FIGS. 27 (e) to 27 (h) correspond to the revariation effect.

<Fan production>
As shown in FIG. 27 (a), for example, assuming that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the left-side right-down line L10 as an ineffective line, the corresponding movable accessory is displayed as shown in FIG. 27 (b). As a result, the third movable accessory 172 vibrates up and down to move from the shielded position to the non-shielded position. Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), if the third movable accessory 172 moves to the non-shielding position, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result moves on the effective line as a re-variation effect, and then the jackpot result. Occurs. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 (d), if the third movable accessory 172 does not move to the non-shielded position and the waiting time elapses while the third movable accessory 172 remains in the shielded position, the re-variation effect does not occur, and the third movable accessory 172 does not become a mere deviation. Become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), when a predetermined number of the same symbols are stopped and displayed over the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs (in the figure, the middle and lower rows of the left line L1 of the main display area Rm). , The same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper part of the left sub-display area Rs2), as shown in FIG. 27 (f), the third movable accessory 172 vibrates as the corresponding movable accessory in the same manner as described above. The production is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (g), if the third movable accessory 172 moves to the non-shielding position, the hold notice is established, and as shown in FIG. 27 (h), the third movable accessory 172 moves. If the above-mentioned waiting time elapses while the shielded position is left without moving to the non-shielded position, the hold notice is not given and the result is simply a miss. Hereinafter, the processes performed by various control devices for performing these effects will be described.

<Processing related to various productions>
The processing related to various effects will be described first, focusing on the processing related to the re-variation effect, and then the processing related to the hold notice will be described.

<Variation display control processing performed by the effect control device 82>
First, the variation display control process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described below. The variation display control process is activated every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). Then, in the variation display control process, when the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the symbol display device 161 starts the variation display of the symbol for one game, and the main control device 81 starts the variation display. When the transmitted fluctuation end command is received, the process of displaying the final stop display of the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed. Further, in the variable display control process, a process of appropriately modifying the variable display pattern is executed in accordance with the setting for performing the hold notice.

In the variation display control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, whether or not the game is being played in step S701, that is, whether or not the symbol display device 161 is executing the variation display of the symbol for one game. To judge. When the variation display of the symbol for one game is not performed, it is determined in step S702 whether or not the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received. If the fluctuation command has not been received, the fluctuation display control process is terminated as it is. If a variation command has been received, the variation start process is executed in step S703, and then the variation display control process ends.

On the other hand, when the variation display of the symbol for one game is performed, it is determined in step S704 whether or not the variation end command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received. If the variation end command has not been received, the variation display control process is terminated after the variable intermediate process is executed in step S705. If the variation end command is received, the variation end processing is executed in step S706, and then the variation display control process is terminated.

Hereinafter, the fluctuation start processing in step S703, the fluctuation intermediate processing in step S705, and the fluctuation end processing in step S706 will be described in detail.

<Process for starting fluctuation>
First, the fluctuation start processing in step S703 will be described. The variation start process is a process for starting the effect for game rounds based on the reception of the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81. In the fluctuation start processing, in addition to the presence / absence of the reach display as the effect for the game round, the re-variation effect and the hold notice effect are set. Here, first, the process related to the setting of the reach display and the setting of the re-variation effect will be described, and then the process related to the setting of the hold notice effect will be described.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, in step S801, the variation command received this time is read, and the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the information on the variation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the main control device 81 transmits a variation command, it also transmits a type command. Therefore, in step S801, the type command received together with the variable command received this time is read, and the game result information such as the probability variation jackpot result information, the normal jackpot result information, or the deviation result information is specified from the command. .. Then, in step S801, from the above-specified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot has been won, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if the jackpot has not been won, and variable display time. Information is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of MPU252.

In the following step S802, based on the information grasped in step S801, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times started this time is the game result corresponding to the jackpot result. In the case of a jackpot result, that is, a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, the effect setting process for the jackpot is executed in the following step S803.

In the jackpot effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, first, the jackpot stop result determination process is executed in step S901. In this stop result determination process, in the case of a probability variation jackpot result, the stop result in which the same combination of specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is the stop result of this time. Determine as a result. Further, in the case of a normal jackpot result, a stop result in which the same combination of non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. .. The type of main symbol and the effective lines L1 to L5 that are stopped and displayed when a big hit result is obtained are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

As shown in FIG. 31A, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 stores the effective lines L1 to L5 and the address information, and the final stop determined in step S901. The line is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area 244c provided in the RAM 244. Further, in step S901, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area 244d is executed. In the following description as well, since the address information of the stop result determined by the various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area 244d of the RAM 244, the description is incorporated.

As described above, the reach display is executed in the game times when the jackpot result occurs, and the variable display time is set longer in the super reach display than in the normal reach display. Therefore, in the following step S902, the variation display time of the game times executed this time is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the variation display time is the variation display time corresponding to the normal reach display.

If it is determined in step S902 that the variable display time corresponds to the super reach display instead of the normal reach display, the effect pattern determination process for super reach is executed in step S903, and then the effect setting process for this jackpot is executed. To finish.

In the effect pattern determination process for super reach, the effect table for super reach stored in various table areas 243a of ROM 243 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation command received this time and the game result in the type command are used. Determine the corresponding super reach display production pattern. Further, in step S903, a process of storing the address information of the determined effect pattern in the pattern address storage area 244e of the RAM 244 is executed. In the following description, in the various effect pattern determination processes, the corresponding effect table is acquired from the ROM 243 to determine the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result, and the address of the effect pattern determined in the various effect pattern determination processes. Since the information is stored in the pattern address storage area 244e of the RAM 244, the description is incorporated.

If the variable display time corresponds to the normal reach display in step S902, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, a revariation effect lottery process is executed in which a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the revariation effect. In such a process, whether to acquire the re-variation effect lottery table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 and the re-variation effect counter provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 to execute the re-variation effect. A lottery will be held to see if or not. Then, in the following step S905, it is determined whether or not the revariation effect lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S904. By the way, in this embodiment, the probability of winning in the re-variation effect lottery process is 70%, and more than half of the game times in which the normal reach display that results in a big hit is selected is changed to the re-variation effect. Will be done.

If the re-variation effect lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S906 to execute the effect pattern determination process for normal reach. After executing the process of step S906, the effect setting process for this jackpot ends. On the other hand, if the re-variation effect lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S907. In step S907, a process is executed in which the information stored in the register in step S801 is rewritten as information which is a game time in which the re-variation effect is performed from the game time in which the reach occurs.

In the following step S908, the effect pattern determination process for the revariation effect is executed, and in step S909, the temporary stop line determination process in the revariation effect is executed. In such a process, it is determined which of the ineffective lines L6 to L11 temporarily stops the symbol combination corresponding to the stop result determined in step S901. In other words, it is determined which of the ineffective lines L6 to L11 is used to execute the revariation effect. In this case, the effective line as the final stop line determined in step S901 and the ineffective line as the temporary stop line determined in step S909 are determined to be parallel to each other.

As shown in FIG. 31B, the revariation table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 contains the address information of the ineffective lines L6 to 11 parallel to the effective lines L1 to L5. It is remembered. In step S909, the temporary stop line is determined with reference to the address information of the final stop line stored in step S901, and the address information of the temporary stop line is stored in the temporary stop line storage area 244f of the RAM 244. In this way, by translating the symbol combination stopped at the temporary stop line into the re-variation effect, a smooth effect can be achieved without changing the positional relationship between the symbols constituting the symbol combination. can do.

The relationship between the temporary stop line and the final stop line does not necessarily have to be parallel, and it is possible to include those that are not parallel. In this case, in the re-variation effect between the non-parallel lines, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 do not move in parallel, and each symbol is again combined so that the symbol combination corresponds to the jackpot result at the final stop line. It is necessary to display columns Z1 to Z3 in a variable manner. Therefore, by using a configuration in which each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is variablely displayed, for example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the normal jackpot result is temporarily stopped on the ineffective line and then re-variated to the final stop line, the probability variable jackpot result is obtained. As a symbol combination corresponding to the above, a display effect (so-called promotion effect) for finally stopping on the effective line may be performed.

After executing the process of step S909, the process of storing the fanning effect flag in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244 is executed in step S910, and the release flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244 in step S911. Execute the process. The fanning effect flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the fanning effect should be executed in this game round. Further, the open flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that any one of the movable accessories 170 to 173 should be open / closed controlled in this game round.

Then, in step S912, based on the processing result of step S909, a process of storing the movable accessory to be driven and controlled in the accessory storage area 244g provided in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the effect setting for this jackpot is performed. End the process. As shown in FIG. 31B, the re-variation table stores information on the movable accessory to be driven and controlled corresponding to the temporary stop line, and in step S912, the temporary stop line stored in step S909 is stored. The information of the movable accessory to be driven is stored by referring to the address information of.

In this way, by storing the final stop line, the temporary stop line, and the movable accessory to be driven and controlled in association with each other in the re-variation effect, the effect on the display screen G and the movable accessory 170 to 173 can be stored. Even when the production is performed at the same time, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the processing configuration and the increase in the required storage capacity.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29), if it is determined in step S802 that the result is not a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S803. In step S803, it is grasped whether or not reach occurs in this game round. When reach occurs, the process proceeds to step S805, and the effect setting process for generating reach is executed.

In the effect setting process for generating reach, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the reach display generated in this game round is the normal reach display. When the super reach display is displayed instead of the normal reach display, the process proceeds to step S1002, and the stop result determination process for super reach is executed. The process of step S1002 is substantially the same as the process of step S901. However, in the case of the process performed in step S1002, since it corresponds to the out-of-reach, the stop symbol is determined so as not to be the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result. That is, the stop result in which the combination of the off-reach symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this time. In this case, the type of combination of the out-of-reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in this determination, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the same as the symbol forming the reach line, is set with respect to the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is made at the stop position shifted by one front line or one rear line. Further, in step S1002, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area 244d is executed.

In the following step S1003, the effect pattern determination process for super reach is executed. In this case, by referring to the super reach effect table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 as in step S903, the effect of the super reach display corresponding to the variable command and the type command received this time is produced. Determine the content of. After executing the process of step S1003, the effect setting process for generating the reach is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1001, if it is determined in step S1001 that the normal reach display is displayed, the process proceeds to step S1004. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored. The notice condition establishment flag is a flag stored in various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244 when the notice condition is satisfied in the process for holding notice described later. When the notice condition establishment flag is stored, the process for holding notice in steps S1005 to S1011 is executed, and then the effect setting process for generating this reach ends. The process for the hold notice will be described in detail later, but in this process, the stop result and the effect pattern of the hold notice in the game times of the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach display are determined.

If it is determined in step S1004 that the advance notice condition establishment flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1012. In step S1012, although the re-variation effect is not performed, it is ineffective whether or not to generate an ineffective alignment effect that stops the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result on the ineffective lines L6 to L11 (although it does not result in a jackpot result). Execute the matching production lottery process. In this ineffective alignment effect lottery process, the ineffective alignment effect table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 and the values acquired from the ineffective alignment effect counters in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 are referred to and are ineffective. Decide whether or not to generate a matching effect.

In the following step S1013, it is determined whether or not to generate the ineffective alignment effect based on the processing result of step S1012. When generating an ineffective alignment effect, the process proceeds to step S1014, and a process of rewriting the information stored in the register in step S801 from the game time in which the reach occurs to the game time in which the ineffective alignment effect is performed is executed. ..

After executing the rewriting process in step S1014, the process proceeds to step S1015 to execute the stop result determination process for ineffective alignment. In such a process, it is determined whether or not to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in any of the ineffective lines L6 to L11. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result to be stopped on the ineffective lines L6 to L11 and the ineffective lines L6 to L11 to be stopped are randomly determined by lottery or the like. As shown in FIG. 33, in the stop result table for the ineffective alignment effect stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, the stop information in the ineffective alignment effect is used as a reference for the stop symbol of the middle line L2 which is an effective line. Address information is stored.

In the schematic diagram of FIG. 33, the sub-symbols arranged between the main symbols and the main symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are conveniently used by using numbers in the middle of the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols. Shown. In step S1015, the information of the symbol combination and the ineffective line determined in the above process is compared with the ineffective alignment effect table, and the stop symbol on the effective line is stored.

After executing the process of step S1015, the effect pattern determination process for ineffective alignment is executed in step S1016. Then, in step S1017, a process of storing the fanning effect flag is executed, and in step S1018, a process of storing a movable accessory to be driven and controlled in the accessory storage area 244 g is executed, and then this reach generation is performed. The effect setting process ends. As shown in FIG. 33, the ineffective alignment effect table stores the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be driven and controlled corresponding to the ineffective lines L6 to L11 for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result. In step S1018, the information of the movable accessory to be driven is stored with reference to the address information stored in step S1015.

If the ineffective alignment effect is not generated in step S1013, the process proceeds to step S1019. In step S1019, although the same main symbol is stopped in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs, the special hold notice is not executed (movable accessories 170 to 173 are changed from the shielded state to the non-shielded state). A lottery will be drawn to determine whether or not to generate an ineffective notice effect (not displaced). In this ineffective notice effect lottery process, the ineffective notice effect table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 and the values obtained from the ineffective notice effect counters in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 are referred to and non-valid. Determine whether or not to generate a valid notice effect.

In the following step S1020, it is determined whether or not to generate the ineffective notice effect based on the processing result of step S1019. If the ineffective notice effect is not generated, the process proceeds to step S1021 to execute the stop result determination process for normal reach. The process of step S1021 is substantially the same as the process of step S1002. However, in the super reach, the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the same as the symbol forming the reach line, is finally stopped at the stop position shifted to the left or right by one line with respect to the reach line, whereas in the normal reach display, this shift is achieved. Is not limited to one line, and the stop result of the middle symbol sequence Z2 is determined in correspondence with the fluctuation display time determined by the main control device 81. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in this determination, a stop result in which the same combination of symbols is not established is determined on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. After executing the process of step S1021, in step S1022, the effect pattern determination process for normal reach is executed, and then the effect setting process for generating this reach ends. The stop result of the middle symbol string Z2 may be randomly determined by lottery as long as the symbol combination does not correspond to the jackpot result.

If it is determined in step S1020 that the ineffective notice effect is to be generated, the process for ineffective notice effect is executed in steps S1023 to S1028, and then the effect setting process for generating the reach is terminated. The process for the ineffective notice effect will be described in detail later, but in this process, the stop result and the effect pattern of the ineffective notice effect in the game times of the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach display are determined.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 29), if no reach has occurred in step S804, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, it is determined whether or not the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored. If the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored, the effect setting process for holding advance notice is executed in step S807, and if the advance notice condition establishment flag is not stored, the effect setting process for normal deviation is executed in step S808. To execute. Here, the effect setting process for normal deviation will be described, and the effect setting process for hold notice will be described in detail later. In the effect setting process for the hold notice in step S807, the stop result and the effect pattern for the hold notice in the game times of the variable display time when the reach is not generated are determined.

In the effect setting process for normal deviation, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34, first, the ineffective matching effect lottery process is executed in step S1101. Such processing is substantially the same as the processing in step S1011. However, the winning probability differs between the ineffective matching effect lottery in the game times of the variable display time when the reach occurs in step S1011 and the ineffective matching effect lottery in the game times of the variable display time when the reach does not occur in step S1101. Step S1011 has a higher probability of winning the ineffective alignment effect than step S1101. More specifically, in step S1011, an ineffective alignment effect is generated with a probability of 10%, and in step S1101, an ineffective alignment effect is generated with a probability of 1%.

In the following step S1102, it is determined whether or not to generate the ineffective alignment effect based on the processing result of step S1101. When generating the ineffective alignment effect, the process proceeds to step S1103, and the stop result determination process for the ineffective alignment is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S1015. After executing the process of step S1103, in step S1105, the effect pattern determination process for ineffective alignment is executed, and then the effect setting process for this normal deviation is terminated. That is, since the fluctuation display time is shorter than that when the reach occurs, the effect setting process for normal deviation does not store the fan effect flag even when the ineffective alignment effect is performed (the fan effect is displayed). Not set).

If it is determined in step S1102 that the ineffective alignment effect is not generated, the process proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, the invalid notice effect lottery process is executed. Such processing is substantially the same as the processing in step S1019. However, the winning probability differs between the ineffective notice effect lottery in the game times of the variable display time when the reach occurs in step S1019 and the ineffective notice effect lottery in the game times of the variable display time when the reach does not occur in step S1105. , Step S1019 has a higher probability of winning the ineffective notice effect than step S1105. More specifically, in step S1019, the ineffective notice effect is generated with a probability of 15%, and in step S1105, the ineffective notice effect is generated with a probability of 3%.

In the following step S1106, it is determined whether or not to generate the invalid notice effect based on the processing result of step S1105. If the non-valid notice effect is not generated, the process proceeds to step S1107, and the stop result determination process for non-reach generation is executed. In such a process, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not stopped on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, the combination of the off-reach symbols is not stopped, and further, on any of the ineffective lines L6 to L11. Do not stop the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, and do not stop the same main symbol in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs (so that the stop result does not correspond to the possession notice). ), Determine the result of this stop. After that, in step S1108, the effect pattern determination process for non-reach generation is executed, and then the effect setting process for this normal deviation is completed.

If it is determined in step S1106 that the ineffective notice effect is to be generated, the process for ineffective notice effect is executed in steps S1109 to S1111, and then the effect setting process for this normal deviation is completed. To do. The process for the ineffective notice effect will be described in detail later, but in this process, the stop result and the effect pattern of the ineffective notice effect in the game times of the variable display time when the reach is not generated are determined.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 29), after executing any of the processes of step S803, step S805, step S807 and step S808, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, a process of outputting a command including information on the stop result and the effect pattern determined in step S803, step S805, step S807 or step S808 to the display control device 212 as a stop result command and a pattern command is executed. .. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the symbol display device 161 to execute the effect in the current game round, based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process of step S809, in the following step S810, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game round, the process for starting the variation is ended. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 59 and the light emitting unit 58 is started based on the effect pattern determined in step S803, step S805, step S807 or step S808, and the effect for game rounds is started.

<Processing during fluctuation>
Next, the process during fluctuation in step S705 in the variation display control process (FIG. 28) will be described. The variable mid-use process is a process of executing or changing various effects in the game times started by the variable start process.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 35, in the variable processing process, first, in step S1201, it is determined in step S1201 whether or not the fanning effect flag is stored in 244b in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. When the fanning effect flag is stored, it is determined in the following step S1202 whether or not it is the timing to start the fanning effect.

Here, the MPU 242 measures the time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 161 using the progress counters provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244. Specifically, when the fluctuation display is started, the progress counter update (addition) process is executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). Further, in the progress table provided in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, the information of each counter value corresponding to the timing at which the fanning effect should be started is one-to-one with the information of the effect pattern that can be set at the start of the game round. It is stored in the state associated with. Then, in step S1202, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is the counter value corresponding to the timing at which the fanning effect in the progress table of the current game round should be started.

Regarding the process of grasping whether or not it is the execution timing of another effect in the game round (step S1205, step S1209, step S1212, etc., which will be described later), the execution timing can be determined by referring to these progress tables and progress counters. Grasp.

If it is determined in step S1202 that it is the start timing of the fanning effect, the fanning effect is started in step S1203. In this process, the drive units 170a to 173a of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are driven and controlled based on the information of the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be driven stored in the accessory storage area 244g of the RAM 244. A process of vibrating (moving up and down) the movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed. Further, in step S1204, the fanning effect start command is output to the display control device 212. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes display control for causing the symbol display device 161 to display the fanning effect based on the received fanning effect start command. As the fanning effect on the display screen G, for example, an effect or the like is set on the display screen G around the vibrating movable accessory.

If it is not the timing to execute the fanning effect in step S1202, or after executing the process of step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the fanning effect. When it is the timing to end the fanning effect in step S1205, the fanning effect is ended in the following step S1206. In this process, a process of stopping the moving accessory during vibration is executed. Further, in step S1207, the fanning effect end command is output to the display control device 212. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes control for the symbol display device 161 to end the fanning effect being executed on the display screen G based on the received fanning effect end command.

If the fanning effect flag is not stored in step S1201, it is not the end timing of the fanning effect in step S1205, or after the process of step S1207 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1208. In step S1208, it is determined whether or not the release flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244. As described above, the open flag is a flag stored in various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244 in step S911 when the revariation effect is executed.

When the release flag is stored, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not it is the release timing of the movable accessories 170 to 173. When it is determined that the opening timing of the movable accessories 170 to 173 is reached, the opening processing of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed in step S1210. In this process, the drive units 170a to 173a of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are driven and controlled based on the information of the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be driven stored in the accessory storage area 244g of the RAM 244. , The process of moving the movable accessory 170 to 173 to the non-shielded position is executed. Further, in step S1211, the release command is output to the display control device 212. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes display control of the open effect (revariation effect and special hold notice effect) on the symbol display device 161 based on the received release command. In the display control device 212, if the opening effect this time is a re-variation effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result stopped at the temporary stop line as described above is moved to the final stop line. Controls the display device 161.

If it is not the opening timing of the movable accessories 170 to 173 in step S1209, or after the process of step S1211 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S1212, it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the movable accessories 170 to 173. When the closing timing is reached, the closing processing of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed in step S1213. In this process, the drive units 170a to 173a of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are driven and controlled based on the information of the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be driven stored in the accessory storage area 244g of the RAM 244. , The process of moving the movable accessory 170 to 173 to the shielded position is executed. Further, in step S1214, the closing command is output to the display control device 212. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes a process of terminating the open effect (revariation effect and special hold notice effect) on the symbol display device 161 based on the received closing command.

If the release flag is not stored in step S1208, it is not the closing timing of the shutter member in step S1208, or after the process of step S1214 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1215. Since steps S1215 and S1216 are processes for holding notice, they will be described in detail later.

<Process for end of fluctuation>
Next, the variation end process of step S706 in the variation display control process (FIG. 28) will be described. The variation end process is a process of ending a predetermined effect in the game times started by the variation start process.

In the variable end processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 36, in step S1301, a fixed stop process for making the effect of the game times a fixed stop corresponding to the current game result is executed. In such a process, the speaker unit 59 and the light emitting unit 58 are driven and controlled to perform an effect corresponding to the fixed stop. Then, in step S1302, the confirmation command is output to the display control device 212, and then the variable end processing is terminated. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 161 to confirm and stop the symbol based on the received confirmation command.

As described above, the variation display in each game is implemented so as to be a final display corresponding to the game result based on the variation command output from the main control device 81 to the effect control device 82. To. Then, the re-variation effect occurs with a predetermined probability when the game result is one of the big hit results. Further, even if the game result is out of alignment, an effect as if a re-variation effect occurs with a predetermined probability, that is, an ineffective alignment effect occurs. In this case, not only the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped on the ineffective line on the display screen G, but also the effect of the ineffective alignment effect is enhanced by interlocking with the movable accessory that shields the ineffective line. ing.

Specifically, when an ineffective alignment effect occurs, the movable accessory that shields the ineffective line in which the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result has stopped is almost in an unshielded state and re-changes. A fanning effect can occur as an effect as if the effect occurs. Therefore, the player expects that the re-variation effect is generated, that is, the game result is the jackpot result by the occurrence of this fanning effect. Further, one of the conditions for the re-variation effect is that the corresponding movable accessory moves from the shielded position to the non-shielded position. Therefore, as a player, when the above-mentioned ineffective alignment effect occurs, it is expected that the corresponding movable accessory will finally move from the shielded position to the non-shielded position.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, attention is paid to the game by organically linking the production by the design of the display screen G and the production by the movements of the movable accessories 170 to 173 to perform a more dynamic production. The degree has been improved.

<Explanation of processing related to hold notice>
Next, the process related to the hold notice will be described.

<Processing performed by the main controller 81>
As the process related to the hold notice, a process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and a process executed by the effect control device 82 are set. Therefore, first, the processing on the main control device 81 side will be described, and then the processing on the effect control device 82 side will be described.

<Confirmation process for hold notice>
First, the confirmation process for the hold notice executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. As described above, the confirmation process for the hold notice is a process executed in step S205 of the winning process (FIG. 16) for the operation port of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15).

In the confirmation process for the hold notice, in step S1401, the information on the number of holds stored in the hold number storage area NA in the hold area RE is read, and the information on the number of holds is stored in the register of the MPU 202. In the following step S1402, among the pending information acquired in step S204 of the winning process for the operating port (FIG. 16) based on the current winning of the operating port 115, the information for determining the jackpot, that is, the jackpot random number counter C1 latches. Grasp the information.

In the following step S1403, it is determined whether or not the current winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the RAM 204. In the case of the low probability mode, in step S1404, the information for jackpot determination grasped in step S1402 is set as the jackpot winning by referring to the winning / failing table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 14 (a). Identify if it is included in the information. Further, in the case of the high probability mode, in step S1405, the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1402 is regarded as the jackpot winning by referring to the winning / failing table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 14 (a). Identify whether it is included in the set information.

After step S1404 or step S1405, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the information for jackpot determination grasped in step S1402 corresponds to the jackpot winning. When it is determined that the jackpot winning is supported, the type determination information, that is, the jackpot type counter C2, among the pending information acquired in step S1404 based on the current winning of the operating port 115 in step S1407. Grasp the information latched from.

In the following step S1408, with reference to the distribution table shown in FIG. 14B, the information for determining the jackpot type grasped in step S1407 is set as the normal jackpot result or the information set as the probability variation jackpot result. Identify which of the above is included. After that, in step S1409, it is determined whether or not the information for the jackpot type grasped in step S1407 corresponds to the normal jackpot result. If the normal jackpot result is supported, the normal jackpot information is stored in the MPU202 register in step S1410, and if the probability change jackpot result is supported, the probability is changed to the MPU202 register in step S1411. Memorize jackpot information.

If a negative determination is made in step S1406, the process of step S1410 is executed, or the process of step S1411 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1412. In step S1412, out of the pending information acquired in step S1404 based on the current winning of the operating port 115, the information for determining the out-of-reach, that is, the information latched from the reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the following step S1413, the reach grasped in step S1412 is referred to by referring to the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 203. It is specified whether the information for judgment is included in the information set as the reach winning. After that, in step S1414, it is determined whether or not the reach determination information grasped in step S1412 corresponds to the reach generation. When the reach generation is supported, in step S1415, the reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, and then the confirmation process is terminated. If it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, this confirmation process is terminated as it is.

Next, the setting process of the hold command in step S206 in the winning process for the operating port (FIG. 16) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

In the hold command setting process, in step S1501, it is determined in step S1501 whether or not either the normal jackpot information or the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, so that the confirmation process for the immediately preceding hold notice (FIG. 37). ), It is determined whether or not the information for determining the jackpot is specified to correspond to the jackpot winning. When either the normal jackpot information or the probability variation jackpot information is stored, in step S1502, it is determined whether or not it is the probability variation jackpot information, so that the confirmation process for the immediately preceding hold notice (FIG. In 37), it is determined whether or not the information for type determination is specified to correspond to the probability variation jackpot result.

If it is the probability change jackpot information, the probability variation correspondence hold command is set in step S1503, and if it is the normal jackpot information, the normal correspondence hold command is set in step S1504. It should be noted that the setting of the above command and the setting of various commands described later are performed by storing the command information in the command setting area provided in the RAM 204.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1501 that both the normal jackpot information and the probability variation jackpot information are not stored, the process proceeds to step S1505 to determine whether or not the reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination is specified to correspond to the occurrence of reach in the confirmation process (FIG. 37) for the immediately preceding hold notice. If the reach occurrence information is stored, the release response hold command is set in step S1506, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, the complete disconnection response hold command is set in step S1507. To do.

After executing any of the processes of step S1503, step S1504, step S1506 or step S1507, in step S1508, the process of setting the information on the number of pending numbers for the pending command is executed. Specifically, the information of the hold command set above is configured as a plurality of bytes of information, and for some of the bits, information indicating that the hold command itself is a hold command or a hold command Information on the number of types to be held is included, and information on the number of pending items can be set. In this case, in step S1508, first, the information on the number of holds stored in the register of the MPU 202 is read in step S1501 in the confirmation process (FIG. 37) for the immediately preceding hold notice, and then the hold command already set is read. The read information on the number of holds is stored in the bit for the information on the number of holds in the above by arithmetic processing such as logical sum. Thereby, with respect to the hold command set in any of the processes of step S1503, step S1504, step S1506 or step S1507, the number of hold information corresponding to the hold command is specified. Contains information for.

After executing the process of step S1508, the present setting process is terminated. The hold command including the information on the number of holds in step S1508 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 by the external output process in step S301 in the next normal process (FIG. 17). By receiving such a hold command, the effect control device 82 identifies that the hold information has increased.

The method of setting the hold command is to specify by the hold command in the effect control device 82 whether or not the jackpot is won, the jackpot type at that time when the jackpot is won, and whether or not the reach is generated when the jackpot is not won. It is optional if it can be done. For example, a combination of a probability change support hold command, a normal support hold command, a disengagement reach support hold command, and a complete disengagement support hold command is individually set corresponding to each hold quantity, and in the hold command setting process, a hold notice is given. One hold command may be selected according to the confirmation result in the confirmation process (FIG. 37).

<About the hold notice control process executed by the effect control device 82>
Next, the hold notice control process executed by the MPU 202 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. The hold notice control process is a part of a plurality of types of processes repeatedly executed in the MPU 252, and is started in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not any of the hold commands has been received from the main control unit 81. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the hold notice setting process is executed as a process corresponding to the received hold command in step S1602.

In the following step S1603, the effect side reserved storage number SN stored in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 is added by 1. Further, in step S1603, a process corresponding to an increase in the number of reserved storages (for example, a process of changing the display when displaying the hold information on the display screen G) is executed. Further, in step S1603, a process of storing the hold information of the received hold command in the RAM 244 is executed. The RAM 244 is provided with a hold area 244h as an area for storing hold information, and the hold area 244h corresponds to the hold ball storage area 232 on the main controller 81 side and is associated with the first unit area to the fourth unit. There is an area. In step S1603, a process of storing the hold information in the corresponding area is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1601 or after the execution of step S1603, the process proceeds to step S1604 to determine whether or not a shift command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, the production side reserved storage number SN is subtracted by 1 in step S1605. Further, in step S1605, a process corresponding to the decrease in the number of reserved storages (for example, a process of changing the display when displaying the hold information on the display screen G) is executed. Further, in step S1605, the shift process is executed. In this shift process, the hold information set in the unit area of the hold area 244h is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the hold information of the 1st unit area, the 2nd unit area → the 1st unit area, the 3rd unit area → the 2nd unit area, the 4th unit area → the 3rd unit area, and so on. The hold display information in the unit area is shifted.

When a negative determination is made in step S1604 or after the process of step S1605 is executed, the hold notice control process ends. Here, the hold notice setting process in step S1602 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40.

In the hold notice setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the production side hold storage number SN is "1" or more. When the number of reserved memory SNs on the production side is "0", it is determined in the following step S1702 whether or not the game is currently being executed. When the number of stored memory SNs on the production side is "1" or more in step S1701 and there is hold information for which the game round has not started when the current hold command is received, or in step S1702, the production side If the number of reserved memories SN is "0" but the game is currently being executed, the process proceeds to step S1703.

In step S1703, it is determined whether or not the winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244. The winning flag is a flag stored in step S1706 described later when a probability change correspondence hold command or a normal correspondence hold command is received, and is executed before the game times corresponding to the hold command received this time. This is a flag for the MPU 202 to specify that one of the jackpot results will occur in the game round.

If it is determined that the winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1704, and it is determined whether or not the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244. The notice condition establishment flag is a flag stored when the notice condition is satisfied as described above, and more specifically, in the jackpot notice setting process (step S1707) or the miss notice setting process (step S1708) described later. The flag to be stored.

If it is determined that the advance notice condition establishment flag is not stored, in step S1705, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time is a probability change correspondence hold command or a normal correspondence hold command. In the case of a hold command corresponding to these jackpot results, the process of storing the winning flag is executed in the following step S1706, and then the jackpot notice setting process is executed in step S1707. Further, in step S1705, if the received hold command is not a hold command corresponding to the jackpot result, that is, if it is a hold command for loss reach or a hold command for complete loss, a notice for loss is given in step S1708. Execute the setting process.

If it is determined in step S1702 that the game round is not being executed, if it is determined in step S1703 that the winning flag is stored, or if it is determined in step S1704 that the notice condition establishment flag is stored. Alternatively, after executing any of the processes of step S1707 and step S1708, the hold notice setting process ends.

Here, the jackpot advance notice setting process in step S1707 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41.

In the jackpot notice setting process, first, in step S1801, the jackpot notice hold notice lottery process is executed. In such a process, a lottery for whether or not to execute the hold notice is executed in the hold information corresponding to the hold command received this time. Specifically, whether or not to execute the hold notice by referring to the value of the hold notice lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and the hold notice lottery table for the jackpot stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243. The lottery will be held. In the hold notice lottery table for the jackpot of this embodiment, the probability of winning the hold notice lottery is set to 75%, and more than half of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result wins the hold notice lottery. It is set.

In the following step S1802, it is determined whether or not the hold notice lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S1801. If you have not won the hold notice lottery, the notice setting process for this jackpot will end as it is. If the hold notice lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time is a normally supported hold command. In the case of the normal correspondence hold command, the process of grasping the advance notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result is executed in step S1804. The notice symbol indicates a common symbol that is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position when all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the hold notice. In such processing, a non-specific symbol (even number symbol) is grasped as a notice symbol as a notice symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot result. On the other hand, in step S1803, when the command is not the normal correspondence hold command but the probability change correspondence hold command, the process of grasping the advance notice symbol corresponding to the probability change jackpot result is executed in step S1805. In such processing, a specific symbol (main symbol with an odd number) is grasped as a preview symbol as a preview symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result.

After executing the process of step S1804 or step S1805, the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1806, a process of storing the advance notice symbol grasped in step S1804 or step S1805 in the advance notice symbol storage area 244i of the RAM 244 is executed. Then, in step S1807, the process of storing the advance notice condition establishment flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the advance notice setting process for this jackpot is terminated.

Next, the release notice setting process in step S1708 of the hold notice setting process (FIG. 40) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42.

In the disconnection notice setting process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time is the disconnection reach correspondence hold command. If the command received this time is not a hold command for loss reach but a hold command for complete loss, the notice setting process for this loss is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S1901 that the command is a hold command corresponding to the loss reach, the hold notice lottery process for the loss is executed in step S1902. In such a process, a lottery for whether or not to execute the hold notice is executed in the hold information corresponding to the hold command received this time. Specifically, whether or not to execute the hold notice by referring to the value of the hold notice lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and the hold notice lottery table for deviation from the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243. Make a lottery. In the hold notice lottery table for out of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the hold notice lottery is set to 10%, which is set lower than the notice lottery process for big hits.

In the following step S1903, it is determined whether or not the hold notice lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S1902. If it is determined that the player has not won the hold notice lottery, the notice setting process for the main loss is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the hold notice lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1904.

In step S1904, the process of determining the advance notice symbol corresponding to the out-of-reach is executed. In such a process, based on the received out-of-reach correspondence hold command, a symbol forming a reach line when the reach display is executed in the game times of the hold information that triggered the hold command is specified. Then, if the symbol forming the reach line is a specific symbol, the advance notice symbol corresponding to the off-reach is determined as the specific symbol, and if the symbol forming the reach line is a non-specific symbol, the advance notice corresponding to the off-reach is determined. The symbol is determined as a non-specific symbol.

Then, in step S1905, a process of storing the advance notice symbol based on the processing result of step S1904 in the corresponding unit area of the hold area 244h is executed, and in step S1906, the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored in the RAM 244, and then the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored. Ends the notice setting process for this off.

That is, in the jackpot notice setting process (step S1707) or the disconnection notice setting process (step S1708) of the hold notice setting process, it is determined whether or not to give the hold notice based on the received hold command, and the hold notice is given. In this case, the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored in the RAM 244. Then, by storing this notice condition establishment flag, the effect of the hold notice is set in the variable display control process (FIG. 28) in the game times executed before the game times that are the targets of the hold notice. The flag.

As already explained, as the effect for the hold notice, the normal hold notice as a hold notice using only the main display area Rm and the special hold notice as a hold notice using both the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are used. Is set. The special hold notice is set as a special hold notice with a fanning effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a first special hold notice) and a special hold notice without a fanning effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a second special hold notice). There is. The first and second special hold notices are set by the difference in the variable display time of the game times. Specifically, when the variable display time for non-reach is set as the variable display time for the game times, the first special hold notice without the fanning effect is executed, and the first special hold notice is executed. If a variable display time is set when a long reach occurs (when a normal reach occurs), the second special hold notice with a fanning effect is executed. In the first special hold notice, the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 move to the non-shielding position during the waiting time after the variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is completed. In the second special hold notice, after the variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is completed, the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 move to the non-shielding position after the fanning effect is performed.

In this way, in order to determine which special hold notice is to be executed based on the difference in the fluctuation display time, in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29) of the fluctuation display control process, the first special hold notice without the fanning effect reaches. The second special hold notice, which is set in the effect setting process (step S807) for the hold notice at the time of non-occurrence (step S804: NO) and accompanied by the fanning effect, is the effect setting process for reach generation (step S805, FIG. 29, FIG. 29, It is set in FIG. 32). Here, the setting of the first special hold notice will be described first, and then the setting of the second special hold notice will be described.

In the effect setting process for the hold notice, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, the special hold notice effect lottery process is executed in step S2001. In such processing, the value of the lottery counter for the special hold notice acquired from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and the lottery table for the special hold notice stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 are referred to, and the special hold notice is given. Decide whether to execute. The lottery table for the special hold notice is set as a lottery table for the jackpot result and a lottery table for the miss result, and the corresponding lottery table is acquired according to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice. Then, using these lottery tables and the lottery counter, it is determined whether to execute the special hold notice (first special hold notice) or the normal hold notice.

In addition, the lottery table for the jackpot result is set to have a higher probability of being a special hold notice than the lottery table for the missed result, and in this embodiment, 70% of the lottery table for the jackpot result is specially held. It will be a notice, and 10% of the lottery table for the result of the loss will be a special hold notice.

In the following step S2002, it is determined whether or not to execute the special hold notice effect based on the processing result of step S2001. When the normal hold notice effect is executed instead of the special hold notice effect, the stop result determination process for the normal hold notice is executed in the following step S2003. In this stop result setting process, it is grasped whether the information of the notice symbol stored in step S1806 or step S1905 is a non-specific symbol or a specific symbol, and which symbol is selected based on the grasped information. It is determined whether to stop at all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, the stop result table for the normal hold notice corresponding to the determined symbol is read from the ROM 243, and the symbol combination to be stopped at the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined in the normal hold notice.

Here, the stop result table for the normal hold notice will be described with reference to FIG. 44 (a). Note that FIG. 44A illustrates a stop result table on the middle line L2 when the number attached to the notice-corresponding symbol is “7”. Further, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the sub-symbols arranged between the main symbols and the main symbols are conveniently shown by using numbers in the middle of the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols, and are displayed on the display screen G. As a specific example of the stop result, the stop result of the address information D (1) is shown in a simplified manner.

In the stop result table for the normal hold notice, a plurality of stop results for stopping the same main symbol are set in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Rm by the symbol combination to be stopped in the effective lines L1 to L5. , The information of the stop result is stored as the address information. In this case, the same main symbols are not aligned and stopped in any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the same main symbol is used in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 in any of the effective lines L1 to L5. It is set so that the reach line is not formed by. For example, when the address information D (1) is selected and the advance notice corresponding symbol (7) is stopped at the upper row of the middle line L2 and the middle row and the lower row of the right line L3, "7" is displayed on the middle line L2 from above. The main symbol with "", the sub symbol between "6" and "7", and the sub symbol between "6" and "7" are set to be stopped in this order.

As the types of stop results of the normal hold notice, from all types (3 × 3 × 3 = 27) in which the same main symbol is stopped in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Rm, in the effective lines L1 to L5. The number is the number excluding the symbol combination (5) corresponding to the jackpot result where the same main symbols are aligned and stopped, and the symbol combination (5 lines x 2 types) that is out of reach. Specifically, 27 -5-10 = 12 types.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process for the hold notice (FIG. 43), in the stop result determination process in step S2003, the stop result of 1 is determined from the stop result table for the normal hold notice, and the address information is stopped in the RAM 244. The result is stored in the address storage area 244d. Then, in the following step S2004, the effect pattern determination process for the normal hold notice is executed. The stop result determined in step S2003 and the effect pattern determined in step S2004 are output to the display control device 212 as a stop result command and a pattern command in step S809 of the variation start process (FIG. 29). .. Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 161 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the normal hold notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position in the display screen G.

When executing the special hold notice in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, the stop result setting process for the special hold notice is executed. In this stop result setting process, it is grasped whether the information of the notice symbol stored in step S1806 or step S1905 is a non-specific symbol or a specific symbol, and which symbol is selected based on the grasped information. Decide whether to use the design for advance notice. Then, the stop result table for the special hold notice corresponding to the determined notice correspondence symbol is read from ROM 243, and the symbol combination to be stopped at the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined in the special hold notice.

Here, the stop result table for the special hold notice will be described with reference to FIG. 44 (b). Note that FIG. 44 (b) illustrates a stop result table on the middle line L2 when the number attached to the notice-corresponding symbol is "7". Further, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the sub-symbols arranged between the main symbols and the main symbols are conveniently shown by using numbers in the middle of the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols, and are displayed on the display screen G. As a specific example of the stop symbol, the stop result of the address information E (3) is shown in a simplified manner.

In the stop result table for the special hold notice, the stop result of stopping the same main symbol in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs by the symbol combination to be stopped in the effective lines L1 to L5. Are set in plurality, and the information of the stop result is stored as address information for each. In this case, the same main symbols are not aligned and stopped in any of the effective lines L1 to L5 and the ineffective lines L6 to 11, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row are not stopped in any of the effective lines L1 to L5. It is set so that the reach line is not formed by the same main symbol in Z3. For example, when the address information E (3) is selected and the advance notice corresponding symbol (7) is stopped at the upper row of the middle line L2, the middle row of the right invalid line L6, and the lower row of the left line L1, the symbol (7) corresponding to the notice is stopped on the middle line L2. From the top, a combination of symbols to be stopped is set in the order of the main symbol with "7", the main symbol with "6", and the sub symbol between "7" and "8".

Then, as the type of the stop result of the special hold notice, from all types (5 × 5 × 5 = 125) in which the same main symbol is stopped in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs. A symbol combination (5) corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same main symbols are aligned and stopped on the effective lines L1 to L5, and a non-effective aligned symbol combination (5) in which the same main symbols are aligned and stopped on the ineffective lines L6 to L11 ( The number is the number excluding 6), the symbol combination (5 lines x 4 types) that is out of reach, and the symbol combination (12) of the above-mentioned normal hold notice. Specifically, 125-5-6. -20-12 = 82 types.

In the special hold notice, the hold notice is given by using the symbol that stops in the sub display area Rs in addition to the symbol that stops in the main display area Rm, so that the types of stop results are increased as compared with the normal hold notice. There is. Therefore, the outcomes in the hold notice are diverse, and the production is diversified.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process for the hold notice (FIG. 43), in the stop result determination process in step S2005, one stop result is determined from the stop result table for the special hold notice, and the address information is stopped in the RAM 244. The result is stored in the address storage area 244d. Then, in the following step S2006, the effect pattern determination process for the special hold notice is executed.

The stop result determined in step S2005 and the effect pattern determined in step S2006 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S809 of the variation start process (FIG. 29). Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 161 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the special hold notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols are stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position in the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After executing the process of step S2006, the process of storing the release flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2007. Then, in step S2008, based on the processing result of step S2005, a process of storing the movable accessory to be driven and controlled in the accessory storage area 244g is executed. The information of the movable accessory to be driven and controlled is stored in the stop result table for the special hold notice. For example, when the stop result of the address information E (3) is selected in step S2005, it is stored that the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 should be driven and controlled. As a result, in the variable processing process (FIG. 35), an affirmative determination is made in step S1208, and opening / closing control (steps S1209 to S1214) of the corresponding movable accessory and display effect on the symbol display device 161 are performed.

After executing the process of step S2004 or step S2008, the process of storing the advance notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2009, and then the effect setting process for the present hold advance notice is terminated. The notice execution flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the notice condition is satisfied and it is a game time to execute one of the hold notices.

Next, a process relating to the setting of the second special hold notice accompanied by the fanning effect will be described. Such processing is performed in the effect setting process (FIG. 32) for generating reach in the variation start process.

Explaining again with reference to FIG. 32, when the game times to be started from now on are game times corresponding to the occurrence of reach and the reach mode is the normal reach display (step S1001: YES), the notice condition establishment flag Is stored (step S1004: YES), the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, a process of rewriting the information stored in the register in step S801 in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29) from the game time in which the reach occurs to the game time in which the special hold notice is given is executed.

In the following step S1006, the stop result determination process for the special notice is executed, and in step S1007, the effect pattern determination process for the special hold notice is executed. These processes are the same as the processes of steps S2005 and S2006. Then, the stop result determined in step S1006 and the effect pattern determined in step S1007 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S809 of the variation start process (FIG. 29). To. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 161 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the special hold notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols are stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

In the following step S1008, the process of storing the release flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and in the step S1009, the process of storing the fanning effect flag in the RAM 244 is executed. In step S1010, a process of storing the movable accessory to be driven and controlled in the accessory storage area 244g is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S2008. As a result, in the variable processing process (FIG. 35), a positive determination is made in step S1201 and a fanning effect process (steps S1202 to S1207) and a display effect on the symbol display device 161 are performed, and step S1208 is performed. The processing of opening / closing control of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 (steps S1209 to S1214) and the display effect on the symbol display device 161 are performed. Then, in step S1011, the process of storing the advance notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the effect setting process for generating the reach is terminated.

That is, when the first special hold notice without the fanning effect is set, the fanning effect flag is not stored, and when the second special hold notice with the fanning effect is set, the fanning effect flag is stored, and other than that. The processing configuration is the same for the stop result determination processing, the effect pattern determination processing, and the processing for opening / closing control of the movable accessories 170 to 173.

Further, in the effect setting process for generating reach, although the stop result is the same as in the case of the special hold notice, the process related to the ineffective notice effect in which the movable accessories 170 to 173 do not move to the non-shielding position is also performed. Such processing is performed in steps S1023 to S1028 when the ineffective notice effect is won in the ineffective notice lottery process in step S1019 (step S1020: YES).

That is, in step S1023, a process of rewriting the information stored in the register in step S801 in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29) from the game time in which the reach occurs to the game time in which the special hold notice effect is performed is executed. By the way, as described above, in the game round, the ineffective notice effect is performed instead of the special hold notice effect, but the stop result and the effect pattern of the symbol are the same in the special hold notice and the ineffective notice, and the movable accessory 170 The only difference is whether or not ~ 173 moves to the unshielded position. Therefore, in step S1023, first, as the production of the current game time, it is stored as the game time in which the special hold notice effect is performed. By doing so, the number of types of effect modes of the game times to be stored is reduced, and the storage capacity is reduced.

In the following step S1024, the stop result setting process for the special hold notice is executed, and in step S1025, the effect pattern determination process for the special hold notice is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing of step S1006 and step S2006, step S1007 and step S2007. Then, the stop result determined in step S1024 and the effect pattern determined in step S1025 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S809 of the variation start process (FIG. 29). To. Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 161 so as to execute the variable display corresponding to the special hold notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols are stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. However, since the release flag is not stored in the above processing, the effect executed as described above is not a special hold notice effect but an ineffective notice effect.

Then, in step S2026, a process of storing the invalid notice flag in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244 is executed. The non-valid notice flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that it is a game time for performing the non-valid notice effect.

In the following step S2027, a process of storing the fanning effect flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and in step S2028, a process of storing the movable accessory to be driven and controlled in the accessory storage area 244g is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S2008. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 in the variable processing process (FIG. 35), and the process for fanning effect (steps S1202 to S1207) and the display effect on the symbol display device 161 are performed. After executing the process of step S2028, the effect setting process for generating the reach is terminated.

Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned ineffective notice effects are not accompanied by a fanning effect. This is set in the effect setting process (step S808) for normal deviation in the variation start process (FIG. 29). Such processing will be described again with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

If the invalid notice effect is won in the invalid notice lottery process performed in step S1105 (step S1106: YES), the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, a process of storing the invalid notice effect in the register is executed as the effect of the game times this time. In the following step S1109, the stop result setting process for the special hold notice is executed, and in step S1110, the effect pattern determination process for the special hold notice is executed. These processes are the same as the processes of step S1006, step S1024 and step S2005, step S1007, step S1025 and step S2006. Then, the stop result determined in step S1109 and the effect pattern determined in step S1110 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S809 of the variation start process (FIG. 29).

The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the display so that the symbol display device 161 executes a variable display corresponding to the special hold notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols are stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. However, since the release flag is not stored in the above processing, the effect is not a special hold notice effect but an ineffective notice effect.

That is, in the ineffective notice effect, the stop result is the same as in the special hold notice effect, and since the ineffective notice effect and the special hold notice effect differ only in the presence or absence of opening / closing control of the movable accessories 170 to 173, the effect pattern is also the same. There is. In this way, while standardizing the contents of the variable display on the display screen G, the effect (whether the special hold notice effect or the ineffective notice effect) is different by the opening / closing control of the movable accessories 170 to 173. , We are trying to achieve both diversification of production and simplification of processing for variable display.

After executing the process of step S1110, in step S1111, the process of storing the invalid notice flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the effect setting process for this normal deviation is terminated.

As described above, at the start of each game round, the stop result and the fluctuation pattern on the display screen G are determined, and the production of each game round is performed. Here, a prize may be generated in the operating port 115 at the timing when the production of the game times is performed, and the hold information based on the prize may be subject to the hold notice. In this case, in the present embodiment, a process for giving a hold notice is performed in the game times being executed. This process will be described below.

This process is performed in steps S1215 and S1216 of the variable processing process (FIG. 35). Explaining again with reference to FIG. 35, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not the advance notice execution flag is not stored in the RAM 244 even though the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored in the RAM 244. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the notice execution flag is stored by executing the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29) in the situation where the notice condition establishment flag is stored. Therefore, the situation in which the advance notice execution flag is not stored even though the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored means that the change display of the symbol in one game is started after the change start process is executed. Later, a new prize is generated for the operating port 115, which means that the condition for executing the hold notice for the hold information acquired based on the prize is satisfied.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1215, the replacement process is executed in step S1216, and then the variable intermediate process is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1215, the current variable processing is terminated as it is. Here, the replacement process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45.

In the replacement process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the invalid notice flag is stored. If it is determined that the invalid notice flag is stored, the invalid notice flag is deleted in the following step S2102. Then, in step S2103, the release flag is stored in the RAM 244, and in step S2103, the notice execution flag is stored in the RAM 244, and then the replacement process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the special hold notice and the stop result are the same at the start of the game round, but the ineffective notice effect that the movable characters 170 to 173 do not move to the non-shielding position is set. The ineffective notice effect is changed to a special hold notice in which the movable characters 170 to 173 move to the non-shielded position. In this case, it is possible to suppress a local increase in the processing load without the need to modify the stop symbol.

On the other hand, if the invalid notice flag is not stored in step S2101, the stop result correction process is executed in step S2105, and then the replacement process is terminated. Here, the stop result correction process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the stop result correction process, first, it is determined whether or not the game times being executed in step S2201 are game times corresponding to the super reach display. If it is determined that the game times correspond to the super reach display, the main stop symbol correction process is terminated as it is. That is, in the case of the super reach display, even if the notice condition is satisfied, the super reach display is performed as it is without giving a hold notice.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game times do not correspond to the super reach display, the information of the notice symbol is read from the notice symbol storage area 244i in step S2202. Then, in step S2203, it is determined whether or not all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are undergoing high-speed fluctuation.

The variation display of the symbols in the pachinko machine 10 will be described again with reference to FIG. 22. When the variation display of the symbols is performed by the symbol display device 161, the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 are first described. The high-speed fluctuation display (or the first speed display) is performed so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in all the symbol rows of the above is impossible or difficult in appearance. After that, as the period of T1 elapses from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 22A, first, regarding the upper symbol row Z1, the identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the upper symbol row Z1 is made. Is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display (or the second speed display slower than the first speed display) so that the appearance is easy, and when the period of T2 elapses from the start of the fluctuation, the upper symbol sequence Z1 The fluctuation display in is stopped. Further, when the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation in this way, as shown in FIG. 22B, each of the lower symbol rows Z3 is displayed in the display screen G in the lower symbol row Z3. The high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the symbols can be easily identified in appearance, and the fluctuation display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped when the period of T3 elapses from the start of the fluctuation. Further, when the period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation in this way, as shown in FIG. 22 (c), in the middle symbol row Z2, each displayed in the display screen G in the middle symbol row Z2. The high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the design can be easily identified in appearance. Then, when the period of T4 elapses from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display in the middle symbol sequence Z2 is stopped.

In the above configuration, the periods of T1, T2, T3, and T4 are determined in a one-to-one correspondence with various effect patterns according to the various effect tables stored in the ROM 243. Then, the reach effect and the like are performed after the elapse of the T3 period and until the T4 period elapses.

It is not essential that the timing at which the fluctuation display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and the timing at which the fluctuation display speed of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched at the same time are the same, and even if the timings of the two are different. Good. Similarly, it is not essential that the timing at which the fluctuation display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and the timing at which the fluctuation display speed of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is switched are simultaneous, and the timings of the two are different. May be good. Further, the T1, T2, and T3 correspond one-to-one with the number of reserved information stored at the start of the game, according to the number of reserved information stored at the start of the game. The configuration may be defined as described above. Further, when the number of reserved information stored at the start of the game round is the maximum number of reserved information, any one of T1, T2, and T3 may be set to "0".

As described above, the MPU 242 uses a progress counter provided in the RAM 244 to measure the time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 161. Further, in the progress table provided in the ROM 243, the information of each counter value corresponding to the above T1, T2, and T3 is associated with the information of the effect pattern that can be set at the start of the game on a one-to-one basis. It is remembered in. Then, in step S2203, all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 fluctuate at high speed by determining whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to the above T1 in the progress table. Determine if it is inside.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46, when it is determined in step S2203 that all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are undergoing high-speed fluctuation, the first correction process is executed in step S2204, and then the stop result correction is performed. End the process. Further, if all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not undergoing high-speed fluctuation in step S2203, that is, after the period of T1 has elapsed, whether or not the lower symbol row Z3 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation in step S2205. Is determined. In such processing, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to T2 in the progress table. When the lower symbol sequence Z3 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, that is, before the elapse of the period of T2, the second correction process is executed in step S2206, and then the stop result correction process is terminated. Further, if the lower symbol string Z3 is not undergoing high-speed fluctuation in step S2205, that is, after the period of T2 has elapsed, whether or not the middle symbol sequence Z2 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation is determined in step S2207. judge. In such processing, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to T3 in the progress table. When the middle symbol sequence Z2 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, that is, before the elapse of the period of T3, the third correction process is executed in step S2208, and then the stop result correction process is terminated. If the middle symbol sequence Z2 is not undergoing high-speed fluctuation in step S2207, that is, after the period of T3 has elapsed, the stop result is not corrected and the main stop result correction process is terminated as it is.

Hereinafter, the first correction process of step S2204, the second correction process of step S2206, and the third correction process of step S2208 will be described.

In the first correction process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47, the special hold notice lottery process is executed in step S2301, and it is determined in step S2302 whether or not the lottery has been won. The processes of steps S2301 and S2302 are the same as the processes of steps S2001 and S2002 in the effect setting process (FIG. 43) for the hold notice. When the special hold notice effect is won in step S2205, the process of storing the release flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2303, and in the subsequent step S2304, the target movable accessory 170 to 173 is stored in the accessory storage area 244g. Execute the process to be stored in. Such processing is the same as in step S2008 and the like. As a result, a positive determination is made in step S1208 in the process for changing during the next and subsequent times, and the process for controlling the opening / closing of the movable accessory is performed.

In the following step S2305, it is determined whether or not the game times being executed are game times corresponding to the normal reach display. In the case of the normal reach display, the process of storing the fan flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2306. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 in the variable intermediate processing after the next time.

If the special hold notice has not been won in step S2302, the normal reach is not displayed (reach does not occur) in step S2304, or the process of step S2306 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, the first-stage correction table as the first-stage correction information group is referred to from ROM 243. As shown in FIG. 48A, the first-stage correction table is paired with respect to any combination of the information of the initial effect pattern and the information of the notice symbol except when the super reach display occurs. The information of the effect pattern for the first correction is set in correspondence with 1, and the address information is set corresponding to the information of the effect pattern for each first correction. In this case, all the information of the effect pattern for the first correction is set as the information of the effect pattern after the period of T1 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. However, the information of the effect pattern for each first correction is set so as not to change the variable display time in the initially set effect pattern.

By the way, in the first stage correction table, the information of each effect pattern of the special hold notice effect and the normal hold notice effect is set in correspondence with the information of the notice symbol. Therefore, the effect pattern to be referred to is different depending on whether the special hold notice effect is won in step S2302 or not.

In the following step S2308, the address information for the first correction corresponding to the combination of the type information of the notice symbol specified in step S2202 and the information of the effect pattern being executed stored in the pattern address storage area 244e. (First correction information) is specified from the first stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction address storage area 244j provided in the RAM 244.

Since the address information for the first correction is stored in the correction address storage area 244j, the MPU 242 is set this time after determining that the period of T1 has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the information of the progress counter. The light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 are driven and controlled so as to perform an effect corresponding to the information of the effect pattern for the first correction.

Then, in step S2309, a correction command including the address information for the first correction stored in step S2308 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 stores the address information for the first correction in the display side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254 based on the reception of the correction command. Further, the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a table similar to the first-stage correction table shown in FIG. 48 (a). Then, the fluctuation display pattern for the first correction is specified from the address information for the first correction, and the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed with the fluctuation display pattern. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols are stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After executing the process of step S2309, the process of storing the advance notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2310, and then the first correction process is terminated.

Next, the second correction process of step S2206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49.

In the second correction process, first, in step S2401, the information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol sequence Z1 in the main display area Rm is grasped based on the information stored in the stop result address storage area 244d. In this case, there are cases where there is one main symbol and cases where there are two main symbols as the type information of the stop symbol. In the case of one, it is specified as the symbol to be judged, and in the case of two, it is specified. Both of them are specified as the symbols to be judged.

In the following step S2402, it is determined whether or not the first correction condition is satisfied for the symbol to be determined specified in step S2401. The first amendment condition is that when the information of the advance notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, the main symbol with an odd number, the first amendment condition is satisfied if the symbol to be determined is the specific symbol. When the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, the main symbol with an even number, the first symbol is when the symbol to be determined is a non-specific symbol. It is set so that it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

If it is determined that the first correction condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2403, and the information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol sequence Z1 in the sub-display area Rs is grasped based on the information stored in the stop result address storage area 244d. To do. In this case, there are cases where the number of main symbols is 0 and cases where there are 2 main symbols as the type information of the stopped symbols, but in the case of 0, it is assumed that the judgment target does not exist and the symbols are not specified and 2 are used. In the case of, both of them are specified as the symbols to be judged.

In the following step S2404, it is determined whether or not the second correction condition is satisfied for the symbol to be determined specified in step S2403. Similar to the first amendment condition, the second amendment condition is the same as the first amendment condition. If the information of the advance notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, the main symbol with an odd number, if the symbol to be determined is the specific symbol, the second amendment condition 2 If it is set so that it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied and the type information of the advance notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, the symbol to be determined is the symbol to be determined. It is set so that it is determined that the second modification condition is satisfied when the symbol is a non-specific symbol.

That is, the symbol to be determined differs between the first modification condition and the second modification condition, the first modification condition targets the symbol that stops in the main display area Rm, and the second modification condition determines the sub-display area Rs. The symbol to be stopped is the judgment target. As described above, by setting the stop symbol of the sub display area Rs as the determination target in addition to the stop symbol of the main display area Rm, the possibility that the correction condition is satisfied is improved. Specifically, in step S2401, when the stop symbol of the main display area Rm is a combination of the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol, the first correction condition is satisfied regardless of the notice symbol, but the main display area. When the stop symbol of Rm is one of the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol and the notice symbol is the other, the first modification condition is not satisfied. On the other hand, in step S2404, even if the stop symbol of the main display area Rm for which the first correction condition is not satisfied is one of the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol and the notice symbol is the other. , Since the other symbol is a stop symbol in the sub-display area Rs, the second correction condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in step S2404 that the second correction condition is not satisfied, the stop symbol correction process is terminated as it is. That is, when the second modification condition is not satisfied, the effect of the game times is continued according to the effect pattern set in the variation start process without executing the hold notice. By the way, the case of making a negative judgment in step S2404 is a case where two main symbols are stopped in the main display area Rm, and the stopped symbols are specific symbols (main symbols with 1 and 9). Furthermore, it is only when the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol.

If it is determined in step S2404 that the second correction condition is satisfied, the process of storing the release flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2405, and the target movable accessory 170 to 173 is executed in the subsequent step S2406. Is executed in the accessory storage area 244g. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208 of the variable intermediate processing (FIG. 35) from the next time onward, and the opening / closing control processing of the movable accessory is performed.

In the following step S2407, it is determined whether or not the game times being executed are game times corresponding to the normal reach display. If it is determined that the game times correspond to the normal reach display, the process of storing the fan flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2408. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 in the variable intermediate processing after the next time.

If the first correction condition is satisfied in step S2402, the normal reach is not displayed (reach does not occur) in step S2406, or the process of step S2408 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2409. In step S2409, the second-stage correction table as the second-stage correction information group stored in the ROM 243 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 48 (b), the second-stage correction table is for any combination of the information of the initial variation display pattern and the information of the type of the symbol to be determined except when the super reach display occurs. The information of the variation display pattern for the second correction is set in a one-to-one correspondence, and the address information is set in correspondence with the information of the variation display pattern for each second correction. In this case, all the information of the variation display pattern for the second correction is set as the information of the variation display pattern after the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of the variation display pattern for each second correction is set so as not to change the variation display time in the initially set variation display pattern.

Incidentally, in the second stage correction table, the information of each effect pattern of the special hold notice effect and the normal hold notice effect is set in correspondence with the information of the notice symbol. Therefore, it is referred to in the case where the first correction condition is satisfied in step S2402 and the correction is made to the normal hold notice effect, and the case where the second correction condition is satisfied in step S2404 and the change is made to the special hold notice effect. The production pattern is different.

In the following step S2410, the type information of the symbol to be determined that the correction condition is satisfied in step S2402 or step S2404, and the effect pattern of the running game times stored in the pattern address storage area 244e are displayed. The address information for the second correction (information for the second correction) corresponding to the combination of the information is specified from the table for the second stage correction, and the specified address information is stored in the correction address storage area 244j.

In addition, when a plurality of symbols are the judgment targets and the correction conditions are satisfied for all the symbols, the symbols to be judged that the above correction conditions are satisfied are determined by lottery or the like. It is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol on the side with the smaller number or the symbol on the side with the larger number is configured to be the symbol to be determined that the above-mentioned correction condition is satisfied. May be good.

Since the address information for the second correction is stored in the correction address storage area 244j, the MPU 242 determines that the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation based on the information of the progress counter, and then the second setting is set this time. The light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 are driven and controlled so as to produce an effect corresponding to the information of the modified variable display pattern.

Then, in step S2411, a correction command including the address information for the second correction stored in step S2410 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 stores the address information for the second correction in the display side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254 based on the reception of the correction command. The program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a table similar to the second-stage correction table shown in FIG. 48 (b). Then, the fluctuation display pattern for the second correction is specified from the address information for the second correction, and the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed with the fluctuation display pattern. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols are stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After executing the process of step S2411, the process of storing the advance notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2412, and then the second correction process ends.

Next, the third correction process of step S2208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the third correction process, first, in step S2501, the information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol sequence Z1 and the stop symbol of the lower symbol sequence Z3 in the main display area Rm based on the information stored in the stop result address storage area 244d. Grasp the information. In this case, there are a case where the main symbol is one and a case where the main symbol is two as the information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol string Z1, but in the case of one, it is specified as the symbol to be determined in the upper symbol string Z1. However, in the case of two, both of them are specified as the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol sequence Z1. Further, there are a case where the main symbol is one and a case where the main symbol is two as the information of the stop symbol of the lower symbol string Z3, and in the case of one, it is specified as the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol string Z3. In the case of two or two, both of them are specified as the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol sequence Z3.

In the following step S2502, it is determined whether or not the third correction condition is satisfied for the symbol to be determined specified in step S2501. The third modification condition is satisfied when the symbol to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3 have a common symbol of the same type. It is set so that it is not judged as. Further, even if a common symbol of the same type exists, if the information of the advance notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an odd number, the common symbol of the same type is used. If it is set so that it is determined that the third correction condition is satisfied when it is a specific symbol, and the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, the above It is set so that it is determined that the third modification condition is satisfied when the common symbol of the same type is a non-specific symbol. Further, in the third modification condition, even if the common symbol of the same type exists, the stop result corresponding to the reach display, that is, the reach line is formed by the common symbol of the same type. Is set so that the third modification condition is not satisfied.

If it is determined that the third correction condition is not satisfied, in step S2503, based on the information stored in the stop result address storage area 244d, the stop symbol of the upper symbol sequence Z1 in the sub-display area Rs The information and the information of the lower symbol string Z3 are grasped. In this case, there are a case where the main symbol is one and a case where the main symbol is two as the information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol string Z1, but in the case of one, it is specified as the symbol to be determined in the upper symbol string Z1. However, in the case of two, both of them are specified as the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol sequence Z1. Further, there are a case where the main symbol is one and a case where the main symbol is two as the information of the stop symbol of the lower symbol string Z3, and in the case of one, it is specified as the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol string Z3. In the case of two or two, both of them are specified as the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol sequence Z3.

In the following step S2504, it is determined whether or not the fourth correction condition is satisfied for the symbol to be determined specified in step S2501 and step S2503. The fourth modification condition is that a common symbol of the same type exists in the symbol to be determined in the upper symbol string Z1 and the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol string Z3 in the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs. In this case, it is set so that it is not determined that the correction condition is satisfied. Further, even if a common symbol of the same type exists, if the information of the advance notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an odd number, the common symbol of the same type is used. If it is set so that it is determined that the fourth amendment condition is satisfied when it is a specific symbol, and the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, the above It is set so that it is determined that the fourth amendment condition is satisfied when the common symbol of the same type is a non-specific symbol.

Here, in the fourth modification condition, unlike the third modification condition, when a common symbol of the same type exists, the symbol that stops in the main display area Rm and the symbol that stops in the sub display area Rs When a reach line is formed, or when a reach line is formed between symbols stopped in the sub-display area Rs, the fourth amendment condition is satisfied on condition that the above other conditions are satisfied. Is set to. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game times in which the out-of-reach effect is executed are not subject to the hold notice. That is, in the third correction condition for determining the symbol stopped in the main display area Rm, when the reach line is formed, the third correction condition is set so as not to be satisfied.

On the other hand, under the above-mentioned fourth amendment condition, the game times in which the stop result is out of reach as a result of the fluctuation display, that is, the fluctuation display is completed, and the stop result is all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 as in the hold notice. When a symbol of the same type is stopped, the game is set to be treated as a hold notice. Further, when a reach line is formed including a symbol that stops in the sub-display area Rs, the symbol that stops in the sub-display area Rs is not visible, that is, the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are not shielded. The reach display is not performed without moving to the position. That is, under the fourth amendment condition, when a reach line is formed including a symbol that stops in the sub-display area Rs, the game is a game in which the reach is not displayed as described above, but as a result, the stop result is out of reach. Assuming that it is a time, the fourth amendment condition is set to be satisfied.

As described above, by setting the stop symbol of the sub display area Rs as the determination target in addition to the stop symbol of the main display area Rm, the possibility that the correction condition is satisfied is improved. Specifically, the pattern in which the symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 have a common symbol of the same type excludes the pattern that becomes reach when only the main display area Rm is the determination target. While there are 4 patterns for one type of symbol, there are 12 patterns when the sub-display area Rs is included, which is tripled.

If the fourth correction condition is not satisfied in step S2504, the third correction process is terminated as it is. That is, in this case, the effect of the game times is continued according to the effect pattern set in the variation start process without executing the hold notice.

When the fourth correction condition is satisfied in step S2504, the process of storing the release flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2505, and in the subsequent step S2506, the target movable accessories 170 to 173 are used. The process of storing in the physical storage area 244g is executed. As a result, a positive determination is made in step S1208 of the process for changing during fluctuation (FIG. 35) from the next time onward, and the process for controlling the opening / closing of the movable accessory is performed. In the third correction process, unlike the first and second correction processes, the determination process of whether or not the normal reach display is displayed before the correction is not set. This is because, in the third correction process, if the normal reach display is displayed before the correction, neither the third correction condition nor the fourth correction condition is satisfied.

If the third modification condition is satisfied in step S2502, or after executing the process of step S2506, the process proceeds to step S2507. In step S2507, the third-stage correction table as the third-stage correction information group stored in the ROM 243 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 48 (c), the third-stage correction table is for any combination of the information of the initial variation display pattern and the information of the type of the symbol to be determined except when super reach occurs. The information of the variation display pattern for the third correction is set in a one-to-one correspondence, and the address information is set in correspondence with the information of the variation display pattern for each third correction. In this case, all the information of the variation display pattern for the third correction is set as the information of the variation display pattern after the period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of the variation display pattern for each third correction is set so as not to change the variation display time in the initially set variation display pattern.

Incidentally, in the third stage correction table, the information of each effect pattern of the special hold notice effect and the normal hold notice effect is set in correspondence with the information of the notice symbol. Therefore, it is referred to in the case where the third correction condition is satisfied in step S2502 and the correction is made to the normal hold notice effect, and the case where the fourth correction condition is satisfied in step S2504 and the change is made to the special hold notice effect. The production pattern is different.

In the following step S2508, the type information of the symbol to be determined that the correction condition is satisfied in step S2502 or step S2504, and the effect pattern of the running game times stored in the pattern address storage area 244e are displayed. The address information for the third correction (information for the third correction) corresponding to the combination of the information is specified from the table for the third stage correction, and the specified address information is stored in the correction address storage area 244j.

In addition, when a plurality of symbols are the judgment targets and the correction conditions are satisfied for all the symbols, the symbols to be judged that the above correction conditions are satisfied are determined by lottery or the like. It is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol on the side with the smaller number or the symbol on the side with the larger number is configured to be the symbol to be determined that the above-mentioned correction condition is satisfied. May be good.

Since the address information for the third correction is stored in the correction address storage area 244j, the MPU 242 determines that the period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation based on the information of the progress counter, and then the second set this time is set. 3 The light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 are driven and controlled so as to produce an effect corresponding to the information of the variable display pattern for correction.

Then, in step S2509, a correction command including the address information for the third correction stored in step S2508 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 stores the address information for the third correction in the display side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254 based on the reception of the correction command. Further, the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a table similar to the third-stage correction table shown in FIG. 48 (c). Then, the fluctuation display pattern for the third correction is specified from the address information for the third correction, and the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed with the fluctuation display pattern. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols are stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After executing the process of step S2509, the process of storing the advance notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2510, and then the third correction process ends.

As a result, if the notice condition is satisfied while the variable display of the game times is being performed, the hold notice can be executed in the game times in which the variable display is being performed. In this case, not only the main display area Rm but also the sub display area Rs is set as the judgment target for the correction in the symbol correction process, so that the possibility of correction is dramatically improved and the opportunity to execute the hold notice is executed. Can be increased.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A hold notice corresponding to the hold information that is stored in the hold area RE of the hold ball storage area 232 and is not subject to the pass / fail judgment is executed in the game times before the game times related to the hold information. Sometimes. As a result, for the player, only the game of generating the winning of the game ball to the operating port 115 and the game of confirming the result of the hit / fail judgment of the holding information acquired based on the winning in the game times related to the holding information. If a plurality of hold information is stored in the hold area RE, the result of the hold information when the order of the hit / fail judgment is later is determined according to the content of the hold notice. The game of predicting is added, and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

The hold notice is given according to the display mode on the display screen G of the symbol display device 161. As a result, the player can naturally confirm the hold notice if he / she is paying attention to the display screen G in order to grasp the result of the hit / fail judgment of each game, and the hold notice is overlooked even though the hold notice has been given. It is suppressed that it is lost. Further, by making the hold notice based on the stop result of the symbol of each game on the display screen G, the effect of not overlooking the hold notice is enhanced. In particular, by giving a hold notice according to the mode of the stop result in the variable display of the symbol of each game time, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to understand the timing of the hold notice and to miss the hold notice. The sex is further reduced.

In the configuration in which the hold notice is given according to the mode of the stop result as described above, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are set as the area where the symbol on the display screen G is stopped and displayed, and the sub display area Rs is set. The stopped symbol can be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-visible state by the movable accessories 170 to 173. Then, the hold notice is set to be given according to the stop result including the symbol to be stopped in the sub-display area Rs. Even when the hold notice is given, if it is done by the stop result including the symbol stopped in the sub-display area Rs in this way, the symbol stopped in the sub-display area Rs is difficult to see as described above. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to notice that the hold notice is given until the symbol is switched from the hard-to-see state to the visible state. Therefore, it is possible to produce an unexpected effect when the hold notice is given. Further, when the symbol is switched from the hard-to-see state to the visible state in this way, the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are involved, so that it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it. it can. As a result, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the hold notice.

Further, when the hold notice is given by using the symbol stopped in the sub-display area Rs, not only the effect on the display screen G but also the operation of the movable accessories 170 to 173 is involved, so that the effect becomes flashy. As a result, the degree of attention to the pending notice is further improved.

When the notice condition is satisfied during the variable display of the symbol in each game time (when the notice condition establishment flag is stored), the symbol stopped or stopped in the main display area Rm in the game time is used. It is determined whether or not the hold notice can be executed, and if it can be executed, the stop symbol of the changing symbol sequence is changed, and further, in the sub-display area Rs to determine whether or not it can be executed. The configuration is such that a symbol to be stopped or stopped is added. That is, the number of symbols that can be used to determine whether or not the hold notice can be executed and the type of hold notice (normal hold notice or special hold notice) are both increased compared to the configuration in which only the normal hold notice is given. Therefore, if the notice condition is satisfied during the variable display, the possibility of executing the hold notice in the game round can be dramatically improved.

In order to exert such a function, it is first determined whether or not the normal hold notice can be executed, and when the normal hold notice cannot be executed, it is determined whether or not the special hold notice can be executed. In the case of the normal hold notice, the hold notice is valid only for the stop symbol in the main display area Rm regardless of the presence or absence of the movement of the movable accessories 170 to 173. Therefore, as a player, the normal hold notice is the special hold notice. It is considered that there is a sense of security that the hold notice will be effective. Therefore, by giving priority to the normal hold notice, the player can enjoy the subsequent production (subsequent game times) with peace of mind.

On the other hand, in the situation where the notice condition is satisfied at the start of the game round, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result triggers the establishment of the hold condition, the special hold notice is prioritized over the normal hold notice. It was configured. That is, if the notice condition is satisfied during the game round, the normal hold notice is given priority regardless of the opportunity for the notice condition to be met, and if the notice condition is met at the start of the game round, the special hold notice is given. Is prioritized. For this reason, for example, in a situation where one of the hold notices has been given in the previous game round, if a special hold notice is given in the game round, there is a high possibility that a big hit result will be obtained in the subsequent game rounds. If the notice condition is satisfied and the normal hold notice is given in the game in the situation where the hold notice has not been given in the previous game round, the big hit result will be obtained after that even if it is not a special hold notice. Expectations swell. In other words, although the special hold notice is basically expected to result in a big hit after that, a prize was awarded to the operating port 115 during the game round, and the normal hold notice was given in that game round. In some cases, the degree of expectation that will result in a big hit after that is comparable to the special hold notice. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even if it is a normal hold notice without raising the attention of the special hold notice too much.

As described above, when the notice condition is satisfied during the game round and the hold notice is executed in the game round, the stop symbol of the symbol row during the high-speed fluctuation display is changed. When the high-speed fluctuation display is displayed, it is difficult for the player to identify the changing symbol, and by changing the changing symbol, the discomfort that the change gives to the player is reduced. can do.

Even if the notice condition is not satisfied at the start of the game round, a lottery for the ineffective notice effect that has the same stop result as the stop result in the special hold notice is drawn, and if the lottery is won, the stop in the special hold notice The configuration is such that the variable display is started so as to result. As a result, when the notice condition is satisfied in the game round, the special hold notice is given only by putting the movable accessories 170 to 173 in the unshielded state without changing the changing symbol or the stopped symbol. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, when the notice condition is satisfied during the game round, it is not necessary to change the symbol as described above, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load due to the execution of the hold notice.

In particular, in this configuration, even during the period from when each symbol column Z1 to Z3 is stopped until when it is confirmed and displayed, it is possible to execute a special hold notice because the stopped symbol is not changed. it can. This can further increase the chances of a hold notice being given.

Further, when the ineffective notice effect is won, the stop result of the game is set to the same stop result as in the case where the special hold notice is given as described above, and the ineffective notice flag is stored in the RAM 244. By doing so, when the notice condition is satisfied in the game times, the hold notice is executed only by determining whether or not the above-mentioned invalid notice flag is stored, instead of grasping the stop result. Whether or not it is possible can be determined, and an extreme increase in processing load can be preferably avoided.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the notice condition is satisfied with a predetermined probability when the hold information corresponding to the game times for which the reach is displayed is acquired, that is, when the hold notice is given. Finally, the reach display is executed at any of the game times. The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the case where the reach display is not finally performed even if the hold notice is given is set. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described.

First, the disconnection notice setting process in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the disconnection notice setting process in the present embodiment, and shows the process performed in place of the disconnection notice setting process shown in FIG. 42. As described above, the disconnection notice setting process is a process executed by the MPU 202 of the effect control device 82 in step S1708 of the hold notice setting process (FIG. 40).

First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time is a hold command corresponding to the missed reach. If it is determined that the command is a hold command corresponding to the out-of-reach, the processes of steps S260 to S2606 are executed. Since the processing of steps S2602 to S2606 is the same as the processing of steps S1902 to S1906 in the first embodiment, the description is incorporated.

If it is determined in step S2601 that the command is not a hold command for loss reach but a hold command for normal loss, the process proceeds to step S2607. In step S2607, it is determined whether or not the production side reserved memory number SN is “2” or more. If the number of stored memories SN on the production side is less than "2", the notice setting process for the main disconnection is terminated as it is. When the number of stored memories SN on the production side is "2" or more, the discontinuous notice lottery process is executed in step S2608. In this lottery process, the above-mentioned final reach display is not performed with reference to the values acquired from the discontinuous notice counters from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and the discontinuous notice tables from the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243. A lottery will be drawn as to whether or not to execute a discontinuous notice as a hold notice. In the following step S2609, it is determined whether or not to execute the discontinuous notice based on the process of step S2608. If it is determined that the discontinuous notice is not executed, the notice setting process for this offset is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S2609 that the discontinuous notice is to be executed, the same processes as those in steps S2604 to S2606 are executed in steps S261 to S2612. That is, in step S2610, the advance notice symbol determination process corresponding to the deviation is executed, in step S2611, the advance notice symbol storage process is executed, and in step S2612, the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored in the RAM 244.

In the following step S2613, a process of storing the discontinuous flag in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244 is executed. The discontinuous flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that it is in a state of performing a discontinuous notice. In the following step S2614, a process of inputting "2" to the discontinuous counters provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 is executed. The discontinuous counter is a counter for the MPU 242 to grasp the game times corresponding to the hold information that triggered the discontinuous notice. After executing the process of step S2614, the notice setting process for disconnection is terminated.

Next, the effect setting process for the hold notice in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process for the hold notice in the present embodiment, and shows the process executed in place of the effect setting process for the reservation notice shown in FIG. 43. The effect setting process for the hold notice is a process executed in step S807 of the variation start process (FIG. 29) as described above.

In the effect setting process for the hold notice in the present embodiment, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the discontinuous flag is stored in the RAM 244. If it is determined that the discontinuous flag is stored, the process of subtracting 1 from the discontinuous counter is executed in step S2702. Then, in step S2703, it is determined whether or not the discontinuous counter is "0" based on the processing result of step S2702.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the discontinuous flag is not stored, or if it is determined in step S2703 that the discontinuous counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2704. In step S2704, the special hold notice effect lottery process is executed as in step S2001, and in the following step S2705, it is determined whether or not to execute the special hold notice effect based on the processing result of step S2704 as in step S2002. .. If it is determined in step S2705 that the special hold notice effect is not executed, the normal hold notice process is executed in steps S2706 and S2707 in the same manner as the processes in steps S2003 and S2004.

If it is determined in step S2703 that the discontinuous counter is "0", or if it is determined in step S2705 that the special hold notice is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2708. In step S2708, the stop result determination process for the special hold notice is executed, and in the subsequent step S2709, the effect pattern determination process for the special hold notice is executed. Since these processes are the same as the processes of steps S2005 and S2006, the description is incorporated.

In the following step S2710, it is determined whether or not the discontinuous flag is stored in the RAM 244. If it is determined that the discontinuous flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2711, and it is determined whether or not the discontinuous counter is "0". If it is determined in step S2710 that the discontinuous flag is not stored, or if it is determined in step S2711 that the discontinuous counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2712. The processes of steps S2712 and S2713 are the same as the processes of steps S2007 and S2008. In step S2712, a process of storing the release flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and in step S2713, the target movable accessories 170 to 173 are pressed. Execute the process to memorize.

After executing the process of step S2707 or step S2713, in step S2714, the process of storing the advance notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the effect setting process for the present hold advance notice is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2711 that the discontinuous counter is "0", that is, if the game times correspond to the hold information that triggered the discontinuous notice, the process proceeds to step S2715. In step S2715, the discontinuous flag is cleared. Then, in step S2716, a process is executed in which the production of this game is not a special hold notice production but an invalid notice production. Specifically, in step S2716, a process of storing the invalid notice flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and a process of erasing the notice condition fulfillment flag of the RAM 244 is executed. After executing the process of step S2716, the effect setting process for the present hold notice is terminated.

Although detailed description by drawing is omitted, as described in the first embodiment, the hold notice is not only the effect setting process for the hold notice in the variation start process, but also the effect setting process for reaching. It is also set in (FIG. 32) (when normal reach is selected, it is set as a special hold notice effect with a fanning effect). Therefore, in the effect setting process for generating reach in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S1004 that the notice condition establishment flag is stored, first, the discontinuous flag is first described in the same manner as in steps S2701 to S2703. Is stored, and if it is stored, 1 is subtracted from the discontinuous counter before proceeding to step S1005. If not, the process proceeds to step S1005 as it is. Since the hold information that triggers the discontinuous notice is the hold information based on the completely off-correspondence hold command, the game times when the discontinuity counter becomes "0" do not correspond to the normal reach display.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the discontinuous notice, in the game times corresponding to the hold information that triggered the discontinuous notice, the special hold notice effect and the stop result are the same, but the corresponding movable accessory 170 to An ineffective notice effect is performed in which the 173 is not in the non-shielded state. In this case, since the notice condition establishment flag is deleted as described above, the hold notice is not given in the subsequent game times.

On the other hand, since the advance notice condition establishment flag is deleted, the advance notice condition may be established based on the hold information acquired during the execution of the game. That is, if the notice condition is satisfied during the execution of the game times corresponding to the hold information that triggered the discontinuous notice, the hold notice is given in the game times. In this case, since the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored and the advance notice execution flag is not stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1215 of the changing process (FIG. 35) and the replacement process (step S1216). ) Is performed. In the replacement process (FIG. 45), since the invalid notice flag is stored as described above, an affirmative judgment is made in step S2101, and in steps S2102 to S2105, the invalid notice effect is replaced with the special hold notice effect. Is processed. As a result, when the notice condition is satisfied in the game times corresponding to the hold information that triggered the discontinuous notice, the hold notice can be executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

As a type of embodiment of the hold notice, a discontinuous notice is provided in which the hold notice is given over a plurality of game times, but the hold notice is not finally given without developing into a reach display, and the discontinuous notice is triggered. In the game times corresponding to the pending information, that is, in the game times in which the hold notice is not given and the reach is not displayed, the invalid notice effect is performed. Then, if the notice condition is satisfied during the execution of this game, the ineffective notice effect is replaced with the special hold notice effect. As a result, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation when a hold notice is given in a plurality of game times and a reach display is made in the next game time even though the continuous hold notice is interrupted. ..

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the ineffective notice effect is performed in the final round of the discontinuous notice, even if the notice condition is satisfied in the final round of the game, even if the notice condition is satisfied. Since it is only necessary to replace the ineffective notice effect with the special hold notice effect, it is possible to suppress an extreme increase in the processing load.

It should be noted that the configuration in which the ineffective notice effect is performed in the final game round can be applied as a configuration in which the ineffective notice effect is performed in the game round in which some inconvenience may occur if the hold notice is not executed. This some inconvenience is when the advance notice condition is satisfied in the final game round of the discontinuous notice effect as described above, or when the reserved memory number is 0 and the game round is being executed, for example. It may be a situation in which the hold notice is not given over a plurality of game times (a situation in which the execution frequency of the hold notice is low).

If the hold condition is satisfied when the number of reserved memories is 0 and the game is being executed, the hold information is more than the game times of the hold information that triggered the establishment of the hold condition unless the hold notice is executed in the game time. No notice of hold will be given in the previous game. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories is 0 and the game round is started, by setting the ineffective notice effect to be performed in the game round, even if the notice condition is satisfied in the game round. However, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the hold notice cannot be executed in the game times and the hold notice is not given in the game times before the game times of the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition.

Further, the situation in which the execution frequency of the hold notice is low means that the notice condition has not been satisfied for a while (for example, over 100 consecutive game times). In such a situation, if the hold notice cannot be executed even though the notice condition is satisfied, it is not possible to provide the player with a special opportunity. Therefore, for example, it is preferable to provide a frequency grasping means for grasping the frequency at which the hold notice is given in the RAM 244, and perform an ineffective notice effect when the frequency grasping means finds that the frequency is lower than the predetermined frequency. .. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the hold notice without missing the opportunity.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the mode of the reservation notice is different from that of the first and second embodiments. That is, when the hold notice is continuously given over a plurality of game times, the hold notice is given with an effect different from the hold notice executed in the previous game times in each of the continuous game times. .. More specifically, as the mode of the hold notice, the same notice-corresponding symbols are stopped in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the first and second embodiments. Then, a so-called step-up effect as a step-up effect such as an effect is performed on the notice-corresponding symbol in accordance with the hold notice by the above symbol. First, the flow of the hold notice of the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 53.

When the notice condition is satisfied, the same main symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so as not to correspond to the reach display and the jackpot result, as in the first and second embodiments. In this case, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), in the game round two times before the game round related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition, bubbles are generated in the background of the display screen G as the first effect of the stage effect. The display effect is such that the air bubbles spring up from the bottom to the top.

When the hold notice is further given in the subsequent game times, that is, the game times one time before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition, FIG. 53 (b) shows as the second effect of the stage effect. As described above, the display effect is performed so that the main symbol, which is the symbol corresponding to the notice, is surrounded by an effect such as an aura. Then, as the subsequent game times are the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition, the variable display ends in the stop mode that results in a big hit as shown in FIG. 54 (c).

Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (d) → FIG. 53 (c), in the next game round in which the hold notice accompanied by the first effect is given, a big hit result may be obtained without the second effect. In addition, there are cases where the off-reach is performed in the game rounds that follow the first and second effects, and there are cases where the out-of-reach is performed in the next game round of the first effect without going through the second effect.

Next, the jackpot notice setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. As described above, the jackpot advance notice setting process is the process executed in step S1707 of the hold advance notice setting process (FIG. 40), and FIG. 54 is executed in place of the jackpot advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 41. Indicates processing.

In the jackpot notice setting process in the present embodiment, the processes of steps S2801 to S2807 are executed in the same manner as the processes of steps S1801 to S1807. In step S2808, a numerical value obtained by subtracting 1 from the production side reserved storage number SN is input to the stage counters provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244. The stage counter is a counter for the MPU 242 to grasp the number of hold information to be played in the game before the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition. That is, in step S2808, a process of inputting the number of hold information to be the target of the game round to the stage counter is executed before the hold information of this time.

In the following step S2809, the step effect selection process is executed. In the above-mentioned stage effect, the stage effect selection process is a second stage notice in which the first effect and the hold notice accompanied by the second effect are given before the game of the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition. , It is a process of selecting either one of the first stage notice, in which only the hold notice accompanied by the first effect is given without giving the hold notice accompanied by the second effect. Such a selection rate is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, a two-step notice is selected with a probability of 70%. In step S2809, the selection counters are acquired from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244, and the selection tables are acquired from the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, and the above selection process is performed.

In the following step S2810, it is determined whether or not the first stage notice is selected based on the processing result of the above step S2809. When the second stage notice is selected instead of the first stage notice, the process of storing the second stage flag in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244 is executed in step S2811, and then the notice setting for this jackpot is set. End the process. The second stage flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the second stage notice is selected.

If it is determined in step S2802 that the lottery for generating the hold notice has not been won and the notice condition has not been satisfied, or if it is determined in step S2810 that the first stage notice has been selected, the notice setting for this jackpot is set as it is. End the process.

Next, the disconnection notice setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55. As described above, the disconnection notice setting process is the process executed in step S1708 of the hold advance notice setting process (FIG. 40), and FIG. 55 is executed in place of the disconnection notice setting process shown in FIG. 42. Indicates the processing to be performed.

In the disconnection notice setting process in the present embodiment, the processes of steps S291 to S2906 are executed in the same manner as the processes of steps S1901 to S1906. Then, in step S2907, as in step S2808, a process of inputting a numerical value obtained by subtracting 1 from the production side reserved storage number SN is executed in the stage counter. In the following step S2908, the step effect selection process is executed in the same manner as in step S2809. The selection rate in such processing is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the selection processing in step S2908 is set so that the first stage notice is selected with a probability of 70%. That is, in the stage effect selection process in the jackpot notice setting process, the second stage notice is selected with a probability of 70%, and in the stage effect selection process in the miss notice setting process, the second stage notice is selected with a probability of 30%. Therefore, the expectation that the jackpot result will be obtained after the first stage effect is selected is set higher than the expectation that the jackpot result will be obtained after the second stage effect is selected.

In the following step S2909, similarly to step S2810, it is determined whether or not the first stage effect is selected based on the processing result of step S2908, and it is determined that the second stage effect is selected instead of the first stage effect. If this is the case, the process of storing the second stage flag is executed in step S2910, and then the process of setting the notice for disconnection is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2901 that the command is not a hold command for loss reach but a hold command for complete loss, if it is determined in step S2903 that the hold notice is not generated and the notice condition is not satisfied, or in step S2909. If the first stage effect is selected, the notice setting process for the main disconnection is terminated as it is.

Next, the effect setting process for the hold notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56. As described above, the effect setting process for the hold notice is the process executed in step S807 in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29), and FIG. 56 shows the effect setting process for the hold notice shown in FIG. 43. Indicates the process to be executed instead.

In the effect setting process for the hold notice in the present embodiment, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the duplicate flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244, and it is determined that the duplicate flag is stored. In that case, the duplicate notice setting process is executed in step S3002 to end the effect setting process for the hold notice. The duplicate flag and the duplicate notice setting process will be described in detail later.

If it is determined in step S3001 that the duplicate flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3003, and it is determined whether or not the step counter is "3" or more. Incidentally, when the stage counter is "0", that is, when the game time this time is the game time corresponding to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition, the hold notice is given in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29). The effect setting process for jackpots (step S803) or the effect setting process for generating reach (step S805) is performed instead of the effect setting process for Therefore, when the step counter is determined to be less than "3" instead of "3" or more in step S3003, the case where the step counter is "0" is not included and is limited to "2" or "1". ..

If the step counter is less than "3" in step S3003, that is, "2" or "1", it is determined in step S3004 whether or not the step counter is "2". If it is "2", it is determined in step S3005 whether or not the second stage flag is stored. When the stage counter is "2" in step S3004 and the second stage flag is stored in step S3005, it means that the game is executed before the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition. This is a case where there are two such hold information including the hold information related to the current game round, and the second stage notice is selected in the stage effect selection process (step S2809 or step S2908). That is, it means that the game times this time should execute the hold notice accompanied by the first effect, and in this case, in step S3006, as the stage effect of the hold notice this time, the process of storing in the register so that the first effect is performed. To execute.

If it is determined in step S3005 that the second stage flag is not stored, the hold information related to the game times executed before the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition is the hold related to the current game times. There are two including information, and the first stage notice is selected in the stage effect selection process. In this case, neither hold notice is executed in this game round.

When it is determined in step S3004 that the stage counter is not "2", it means that the stage counter is "1". In this case, the process proceeds to step S3007, and it is determined whether or not the second stage flag is stored. When the stage counter is "1" in step S3004 and the second stage flag is not stored in step S3007, the game times executed before the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition. There may be one hold information related to the above as the hold information related to the current game round, and the first stage notice may be selected in the stage effect selection process. That is, it means that the game times this time should execute the hold notice accompanied by the first effect. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3006, and the register is set to perform the first effect as the stage effect of the hold notice this time. Execute the process to memorize.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3007 that the second stage flag is stored, the hold information related to the game times executed before the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition is the current game time. There is one piece of pending information related to the above, and the second stage notice is selected in the stage effect selection process. In this case, it means that the current game round should execute the hold notice accompanied by the second effect. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S3008, and a process of storing in the register so as to perform the second effect is executed as the stage effect of the hold notice this time.

After performing the process of step S3006 or step S3008, the same process as the process of steps S2001 to S2009 is executed in steps S3009 to S3015.

If the stage counter is "3" or more in step S3003, the second stage flag is not stored in step S3005, or after the process of step S3015 is executed, 1 is displayed from the stage counter in step S3016. After executing the subtraction process, the effect setting process for this hold notice is terminated.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the hold notice can be set not only in the effect setting process for the hold notice but also in the effect setting process for reaching (FIG. 32) at the start of the game round. .. Therefore, the process when the hold notice is set in the effect setting process for the reach generation in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57.

That is, when it is determined in step S1001 that the reach display of the current game times is not the super reach display but the normal reach display, it is determined in step S3101 whether or not the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored. If it is determined that the advance notice condition establishment flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1012. On the other hand, if it is determined that the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3102 to determine whether or not the duplicate flag is stored. If the duplicate flag is stored, the duplicate notice setting process is performed in step S3103, and then the effect setting process for generating this reach is terminated. These duplicate flags and duplicate notice setting processing will be described in detail later.

If the duplicate flag is not stored in step S3102, it is determined in step S3104 whether or not the stage counter is "3" or more or "0". If it is determined that the stage counter is "3" or more or "0", the process proceeds to step S1012, and the hold notice is not given. In this case, the step counter is decremented by 1 before proceeding to step S1012.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3104 that the step counter is "2" or "1", the process proceeds to step S3105. In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the stage counter is "2", and if it is "2", it is determined in step S3106 whether or not the second stage flag is stored. If the second stage flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1012, and the hold notice is not given this time. In this case, the step counter is decremented by 1 before proceeding to step S1012. When the second stage flag is stored in step S3106, in step S3107, a process of storing in the register so as to perform the first effect as the stage effect of the current hold notice is executed.

When it is determined in step S3105 that the stage counter is "1" instead of "2", it is determined in step S3108 whether or not the second stage flag is stored. If the second stage flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3107 and the first effect is stored in the register. When the second stage flag is stored in step S3108, in step S3109, a process of storing in the register so as to perform the second effect as the stage effect of the current hold notice is executed.

After executing the process of step S3107 or step S3109, the process of subtracting 1 from the step counter is executed in step S3110, and the same process as in step S1005 to step S1011 is executed in steps S3111 to S3117. , Ends the effect setting process for generating this reach.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold notice is executed one or two times before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition. The effect selected by the effect selection process is executed as a stage effect of the hold notice in the game times one or two times before. Further, as described above, in the stage production of the hold notice, the expectation that the second stage notice is selected will result in a big hit after that is set higher than that of the first stage notice. Therefore, it is assumed that the player expects that the hold notice accompanied by the second effect will be executed instead of developing into the reach display in the next game round in which the hold notice accompanied by the first effect is executed. Will be done. As described above, in the configuration in which the hold notice is accompanied by a stepwise effect as in the present embodiment, the player expects the effect to be further advanced.

However, depending on the situation in which the hold condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned stepwise effect may be produced depending on the number of hold information related to the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the hold condition. It can be difficult to do. That is, when the number of the reserved information is small, there may be a disadvantage that the stepwise effect for each game cannot be suitably executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a characteristic configuration is provided in order to eliminate such inconvenience. The characteristic configuration will be described below.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a replacement process according to the present embodiment. As described above, the replacement process is a process executed in step S1216 in the variable intermediate process (FIG. 35), and is a process performed when the advance notice condition is satisfied during the execution of the game round. Then, FIG. 58 shows a process executed in place of the replacement process shown in FIG. 45.

In the replacement process according to the present embodiment, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the stage counter is "2" or more. When the stage counter is "2" or more, that is, the hold related to the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition without including the game times currently being executed. If two or more pieces of information are included, the replacement process is terminated as it is. In such a case, since there are two or more game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition, which stage notice is selected by the stage effect selection process. However, the selected stage notice can be executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition. Therefore, it is not necessary to give a hold notice in the currently executing game times.

If the stage counter is less than "2" in step S3201, the stage counter becomes "1" or "0". Incidentally, unlike the case of step S3003 in the above-mentioned effect setting process for holding notice (FIG. 56), when a negative determination is made in step S3201, the case where the stage counter is "0" is also included. This is because the replacement process is executed in the variable process (FIG. 35), the effect setting process for the hold notice is executed in the variable start process (FIG. 29), and the timings that can be executed are different. .. That is, this replacement process is a process performed after the stage counter is decremented by 1, and the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition are currently being executed. The case where only the game times (the stage counter is "0") is included.

If the stage counter is "1" or "0" in step S3201, the process proceeds to step S3202, and it is determined whether or not the stage counter is "1" and the second stage flag is not stored. When the stage counter is "1" and the second stage flag is not stored, it is more than the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition without including the game times currently being executed. It means that there is one hold information related to the previously executed game times, and the first stage notice is selected by the stage effect selection process. In this case, since it is sufficient to execute the hold notice accompanied by the first effect in the next game time instead of the game time currently being executed, the main replacement process is terminated as it is.

The case where a negative determination is made in step S3202 means a case where the stage counter is "1" and the second stage flag is stored, or a case where the stage counter is "0", and these conditions are set. When the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3203. In step S3203, it is determined whether or not the stage counter is "0" and the second stage flag is stored. When the negative determination is made in step S3203, the stage counter is "1" and the second stage flag is stored, or the stage counter is "0" and the second stage flag is stored. Means if not. In the former case, a hold notice with the first effect should be given in the currently executing game round, and a hold notice with the second effect should be given in the next game round, and in the latter case, the hold notice with the second effect should be given, and in the latter case, the currently being executed. This means that a hold notice with the first effect should be given in the game round. That is, in any case, it is necessary to give a hold notice accompanied by the first effect in the currently executing game times. Therefore, if a negative determination is made in step S3203, it is determined in step S3204 whether or not the invalid notice flag is stored, and if it is determined that the invalid notice flag is stored, the invalid notice flag is set in step S3205. It is erased, the release flag is stored in step S3206, the target movable accessories 170 to 173 are stored in step S3207, and the notice execution flag is stored in step S3208. The processes of steps S3204 to S3208 are the same as the processes of steps S2101 to S2105, and the special hold notice is executed in the game times currently being executed by these processes.

If it is determined in step S3204 that the invalid notice flag is not stored, the stop result correction process is executed in step S3209. The process of step S3209 is substantially the same as the process of step S2106 (FIG. 45). However, in the present embodiment, in the second modification process (FIG. 49) or the third modification process (FIG. 50), the process when it is determined that the hold notice cannot be executed in the currently executing game times is different. There is. Therefore, the second correction process and the third correction process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 59 and 60. Note that FIG. 59 shows a process executed in place of FIG. 49, and FIG. 60 shows a process executed in place of FIG. 50. Further, since the changes in the second correction process and the third correction process are the same, the second correction process and the third correction process will be collectively described in the following description.

That is, in the second correction process (FIG. 59), the second correction condition is not satisfied in step S2404, and in the third correction process (FIG. 60), the fourth correction condition is not satisfied in step S2504, and the sub-display area Rs. If it is determined that the hold notice cannot be executed in the game times currently being executed even if the symbol of is included, step S3301 is performed in the second correction process (FIG. 59), and step S3401 is performed in the third correction process (FIG. 60). At, it is determined whether or not the stage counter is "1" and the second stage flag is stored. When affirmative judgment is made in step S3301 or step S3401, it means that the hold notice cannot be executed in the currently executing game round, but the stage production must be developed to the second stage in the next game round. To do. In this case, in the second correction process (FIG. 59), in step S3302, in the third correction process (FIG. 60), in step S3402, a process of storing the duplicate flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then these correction processes are terminated. .. The duplicate flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that both the hold notice accompanied by the first effect and the hold notice accompanied by the second effect should be executed in one game round. If a negative determination is made in step S3301 or step S3401, that is, if the stage counter is "0" and the second stage flag is not stored, these correction processes are terminated as they are.

Returning to the description of the replacement process (FIG. 58), after executing the process of step S3208 or step S3209, it is determined in step S3210 whether or not the advance notice execution flag is stored. When the notice execution flag is stored in step S3210, it means that the hold notice can be executed at the game times currently being executed in any of the above processes. In this case, in step S3211, the process of storing in the register is executed so that the first effect is executed as the stage effect of the current hold notice, and then the replacement process is terminated.

If the stage counter is "0" in step S3203 and the second stage flag is stored, the duplication notice correction process is executed in step S3212, and then the replacement process is terminated. ..

Here, by storing the duplicate flag in the second correction process (FIG. 59) and the third correction process (FIG. 60) as described above, the variation start process (variation start process) executed at the start of the next game round ( An affirmative determination is made in step S3001 of the effect setting process (FIG. 56) for the hold notice in FIG. 29), and the duplicate notice setting process is performed in step S3002. Further, an affirmative determination is made in step S3102 of the effect setting process for generating reach (FIG. 57), and a duplicate notice setting process is performed in step S3103. The process of step S3002 and the process of step S3103 are the same processes. Therefore, first, the outline of the duplicate notice will be briefly described, then the duplicate notice setting process in steps S3002 and S3103 will be described, and then the duplicate notice correction process (step S3212) in the replacement process (FIG. 58) will be described. To do.

The duplicate notice is a production in which a hold notice is given a plurality of times without changing the stop result in one game. In this duplication notice, the mode of the stop result is defined to be a special mode in which the same two types of symbols are stopped in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As a special aspect, as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 61A, the reach line of the cross line reach formed over the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs is formed, and the medium symbol is used. The first special mode in which the two reach symbols forming the reach line of the same cross line reach in row Z2 are stopped so as not to result in any jackpot, and the left and right subs as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 61 (b). In the display areas Rs1 and Rs2, a second special mode is set in which the main symbols constituting the two hold notices are stopped and displayed one by one.

<Duplicate notice that is the first special mode>
Hereinafter, the flow of the overlap notice according to the first special aspect will be described with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 62 and 63. In the duplicate notice, which is the first special aspect, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), for example, the notice symbol is the main symbol (specific symbol) with "7" attached, and the main symbol with "7" is attached. A reach line is formed on the right-side falling line L7 by, and a reach line is formed on the right-right rising line L8 by the main symbol with "6". It is assumed that the mode in which the main symbol marked with "7" is stopped and the main symbol marked with "7" is stopped on the right ineffective line L6 is selected. In this case, the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 are set as the movable accessory to be released, and further, as the opening order, the first movable accessory 170 is first controlled to be released. Next, the second movable accessory 171 is set to be open-controlled. Further, the opening timings of the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 are both set so that the opening is controlled after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 62 (b), when the first movable accessory 170 is open-controlled at the timing of t1 after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbol (6) is attached. The hold notice by (non-specific symbol) is established, and the first effect is generated at this timing. Further, at the timing of t2 thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), when the second movable accessory 171 is open-controlled, the main symbol with "7" set as the advance notice symbol (specification). The hold notice by the symbol) is established, and the second effect is generated at this timing. In this case, after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 are continuously open-controlled, and accordingly, the stage effect (first effect and second effect). Therefore, it is possible to realize a stepwise hold notice without changing the stop result in one game round, and it is possible to produce an unexpected effect.

Here, even in the same stop mode as in FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (c), if the notice symbol is the main symbol (non-specific symbol) with "6" attached, the duplicate notice is given. The opening timing of the movable accessory is different.

That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), a reach line is formed on the right-side right-down line L7 by the main symbol with "7", and the right-right up-right line L8 is formed by the main symbol with "6". In the middle symbol row Z2, the main symbol with "6" attached to the middle line L2 stops, and the main symbol with "7" attached to the right ineffective line L6 stops. Is selected. In this case, the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 are set as the movable accessory to be released, and the opening order is the opposite of the case where the specific symbol is the notice symbol. The second movable accessory 171 is set to be open-controlled first, and then the first movable accessory 170 is open-controlled. Further, the opening timings of the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 are both set so that the opening is controlled after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the opening / closing control of the second movable accessory 171 is performed at the timing of t1 after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, the stop display is displayed at the lower stage of the right ineffective line L6. Although the main symbols marked with "7" can be visually recognized, none of the main symbols has appeared in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the hold notice is not established. As shown in FIG. 63 (c), when the opening / closing control of the first movable accessory 170 is performed at the timing of t2 thereafter, the main symbol with "6" in the upper row on the right ineffective line L6 can be visually recognized. At the same time, the main symbol with "7" in the middle row becomes visible. In this case, the hold notice by "6" and "7" is established at the same time, and the first effect and the second effect occur at the same time as the stage effect. The second effect is generated for the main symbol with "6", which is a preview symbol.

In this way, when the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol (“6” in this example) and corresponds to the normal jackpot result, a plurality of hold notices are simultaneously established in the stage notice. .. This is because the hold notice is established for the main symbol (specific symbol) corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result with an odd number in the first stage, and the normal jackpot result as a notice symbol with an even number in the second stage. If the hold notice is established for the corresponding main symbol (non-specific symbol), the player may be disappointed that the jackpot result that can be expected after that has been demoted from the probability variation jackpot result to the normal jackpot result. Because there is. However, if a hold notice is established for a non-specific symbol as the first step and a hold notice is established for another non-specific symbol as the second step, it may be necessary to re-variate the stopped symbol. Since it is necessary to change the symbol arrangement and the number of stopped symbols without requiring re-variation, the configuration may be complicated in the end. Therefore, in this way, a plurality of hold notices by the non-specific symbol and the specific symbol are simultaneously established, and the notice symbol is generated in the non-specific symbol in the second production, so that the player is not discouraged. It becomes possible to recognize the notice symbol.
<Duplicate notice that is the second special mode>
Hereinafter, the flow of the overlap notice, which is the second special aspect, will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 64. As the second special aspect, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), for example, the notice symbol is the main symbol with "7" attached, and the stop result is "7" at the bottom of the right ineffective line. The attached main symbol is stopped and displayed, the main symbol with "7" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle line L2, and the upper part of the left line L1, the middle part of the middle line L2, and the right invalid line L6 It is assumed that the mode in which the main symbol (specific symbol) with "7" attached to each of the lower row and the main symbol (specific symbol) is stopped and displayed is selected. In this case, the main symbol (non-specific symbol) with "6" in the upper row of the right line L3, the middle row of the left ineffective line L9, and the lower row of the middle line L2 is stopped. The second movable accessory 171 and the third movable accessory 172 and the fourth movable accessory 173 are set as the movable accessory to be released, and the opening order thereof is first, the third movable accessory 172 and the third movable accessory 172. The fourth movable accessory 173 is set to be open-controlled, and then the second movable accessory 171 is open-controlled. Further, the opening timings of the second movable accessory 171 and the third movable accessory 172 and the fourth movable accessory 173 are all set so as to be controlled to be released after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed. ing.

As shown in FIG. 64 (b), by controlling the opening of the third movable accessory 172 and the fourth movable accessory 173 at the timing of t1 after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, "6" A hold notice is established with the main symbol marked with, and at the same time, the first effect occurs. Then, at the timing of t2 thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), by controlling the opening of the second movable accessory 171, a hold notice by the main symbol with "7" is established, and at the same time, the second Directing occurs.

The stop result, which is the second special aspect, is set to be selected only when the notice symbol is a specific symbol. This is because, in the stop result which is the first special mode as described above, by controlling the opening of one movable accessory, the symbols constituting the plurality of (two) hold notices can be visually recognized, and the hold notices are established. However, in the stop result, which is the second special mode, it is not possible to make the symbols constituting the plurality of hold notices visible and to establish those hold notices unless the different movable accessories are opened and controlled. caused by. In this case, even if a plurality of movable accessories are open-controlled at the same time, as long as the movable accessories are arranged at different positions, it is assumed that the player visually recognizes each movable accessory at different timings. As a result, it is assumed that the symbols existing behind the movable accessory are also visually recognized at different timings. In this case, for example, if the player first confirms the specific symbol and then confirms the non-specific symbol, it may be disappointing that the jackpot result that can be expected after that is demoted from the probability variation jackpot result to the normal jackpot result. Absent. In particular, in the case of the stop result which is the second special mode, since the symbols that stop in distant regions such as the left and right sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2 are used, there is a possibility that each symbol is confirmed at different timings as described above. It gets higher. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of discouraging the player by selecting this second special mode only when the advance notice symbol is a specific symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. Will be.

In the duplicate notice setting process in the effect setting process for the hold notice, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 65, first, in step S3501, the process of setting the duplicate notice as the effect pattern of the current game times is executed, and in step S3502. Executes the stop result determination process for duplicate notice. In the stop result determination process for the duplicate notice, the stop result in the current duplicate notice effect is determined by using the stop result table for the duplicate notice and the notice symbol provided in various table areas 243a of the ROM 243. In the stop result table for duplicate notice, the notice symbol and the stop result of the special aspect are set in a one-to-one correspondence as an arbitrary combination. Further, the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be opened and controlled are set according to the stop result of the special aspect, and the opening order and the opening timing are also set. Further, as described above, when the notice symbol is a specific symbol, either the first special mode or the second special mode is set to be selected, and when the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, it is set to be selected. The first special aspect is selected. When the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol and the first special aspect is selected, the opening order of the movable accessories 170 to 173 depends on the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol at the second opening timing as described above. It is set so that the hold notice is established at the same time.

In the following step S3503, a process of storing in the register that the first effect and the second effect are to be performed as the stage effect of the current hold notice is executed. Then, in step S3504, the execution timing of each of these effects (opening control of movable accessories 170 to 173 and effect effect) is stored in a register with reference to the stop result table for the overlap notice. In the following step S3505, a process of storing the release flag is executed, and in step S3506, a process of storing the notice execution flag is executed. As a result, in the variable processing, the opening control of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 is performed at the timing stored in step S3504, and at the same time, the step effect is performed on the symbol display device 161.

Next, the duplication notice correction process (step S3212) performed in the replacement process (FIG. 58) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 66.

In the duplication notice correction process, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the game number currently being executed is a game number corresponding to the super reach display. If it is determined that the game times correspond to the super reach display, the correction process for this duplication notice is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the game times do not correspond to the super reach display, the process of grasping the advance notice symbol is executed in step S3602. Then, in step S3603, it is determined whether or not all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are undergoing high-speed fluctuation in the currently executing game times. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3603, after storing the release flag in step S3604, it is determined in step S3605 whether or not the currently executing game number is the game number corresponding to the normal reach display. If it is determined that the game times correspond to the normal reach display, the fanning effect flag is stored in step S3606.

When it is determined in step S3605 that the game times do not correspond to the normal reach display, or after the processing of step S3606 is executed, in step S3607, various table areas 243a of ROM 243 to the fourth stage correction information group as the fourth stage correction information group. The stage correction table is referred to, and in the following step S3608, the address information for the fourth correction is stored, and in step S3609, the first effect and the second effect are stored in the register as the stage effect of the hold notice. The process of storing the target movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed in step S3610.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the fourth-stage correction table is a pair for any combination of the information of the initial effect pattern and the information of the notice symbol except when the super reach display occurs. The information of the effect pattern for the fourth correction and the information of the stop result are set corresponding to in 1, and the address information is set corresponding to the information of the effect pattern and the stop result for each fourth correction. There is. In this case, all the information of the effect pattern for the fourth correction is set as the information of the effect pattern after the period of T1 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. However, the information of the effect pattern for each fourth modification is set so as not to change the variable display time in the initially set effect pattern.

In addition, all the information on the stop result for the fourth amendment is defined as the stop result that is the first special mode or the second special mode. Further, in the information of the effect pattern for the fourth correction in the table for the fourth stage correction, the information of the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be opened and controlled in the stop result which is the special mode and the opening order thereof are the notice symbols. It is set to have a one-to-one correspondence with the information of. Then, the timing of occurrence of the staged effects (first effect and second effect) in the hold notice is determined in correspondence with the opening order of the movable accessories 170 to 173.

After executing the process of step S3610, in step S3611, the process of storing the execution timing of each effect (opening control of movable accessory, stage effect) in the register is executed based on the fourth stage correction table. .. After that, the notice execution flag is stored in step S3612, and the correction process for this duplicate notice is terminated.

Explaining the relationship between the above-mentioned duplication notice and the fanning effect, the fanning effect when the duplication notice is performed is set so as to be performed in the movable accessory that is initially open-controlled. That is, to explain with reference to the example shown in FIG. 62, after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, a fanning effect of whether or not the first movable accessory 170 is open-controlled is executed. After that, the first movable accessory 170 is open-controlled, and then the second movable accessory 171 is open-controlled. However, the configuration of this effect is arbitrary as long as the variable display time of the game times is not changed. For example, when a duplicate notice is given, it is set so that the fanning effect is performed with a shorter length than usual. Before the movable accessories 170 to 173 are open-controlled, the short fanning effect may be performed.

In addition, as for the duplicate notice in the case where the fanning effect is not performed, as already explained, in the pachinko machine 10, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, so-called stop display. The waiting time is set to 2 sec, which is relatively long. Therefore, for example, in the duplicate notice, even if it takes 1 sec for the first stage effect and 1 sec for the second stage effect after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, each effect is played. It is set so that people can check it, and it is possible to produce without difficulty.

Returning to the explanation of the duplication notice correction process (FIG. 66), if it is determined in step S3603 that all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not undergoing high-speed fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S3613. In step S3613, it is determined whether or not the lower symbol sequence Z3 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. If the lower symbol sequence Z3 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S3614 to determine whether or not the fifth correction condition is satisfied. Here, as for the fifth correction condition, if any of the main symbols is stopped or is scheduled to be stopped in the upper part of the middle line L2, the correction condition is satisfied regardless of the notice symbol. If any of the main symbols is stopped or is not scheduled to be stopped in the upper part of the middle line L2, the correction condition is satisfied when the notice symbol is a specific symbol. It is set to be determined to be present.

If it is determined in step S3614 that the fifth correction condition is satisfied, the same processing as in steps S3604 to S3606 is executed in steps S3615 to S3617.

In step S3618, the ROM 243 refers to the fifth-stage correction table as the fifth-stage correction information group, in step S3619, the address information for the fifth correction is stored, and in step S3620, the hold notice is staged. The process of storing the first effect and the second effect in the register is executed, and in step S3621, the process of storing the target movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed.

Similar to the fourth-stage correction table, the fifth-stage correction table has information on the initial effect pattern and information on the advance notice pattern except when the super reach display occurs, as shown in FIG. 67 (b). Information on the effect pattern for the fifth correction and information on the stop result are set in a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of and, and information on the effect pattern and the stop result for each fifth correction. The address information is set corresponding to. In this case, all the information of the effect pattern for the fifth correction is set as the information of the effect pattern after the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. However, the information of the effect pattern for each fifth correction is set so as not to change the variable display time in the initially set effect pattern.

Further, all the information on the stop result for the fifth correction is defined as the stop result in the first special mode or the second special mode, similarly to the information on the stop result for the fourth correction. Further, in the information of the effect pattern for the fifth correction, the information of the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be released and controlled in the stop result which is the special mode and the opening order thereof are paired with the information of the notice symbol. It is set to correspond with 1. Then, the timing of occurrence of the staged effects (first effect and second effect) in the hold notice is determined in correspondence with the opening order of the movable accessories 170 to 173.

After executing the process of step S3621, in step S3622, based on the fifth stage correction table, the process of storing the execution timing of each effect (opening control of movable accessory, stage effect) in the register is executed. .. Then, after storing the notice execution flag in step S3623, the correction process for this duplicate notice is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3614 that the fifth correction condition is not satisfied, the notification is not corrected to the duplicate notice, but is further corrected to the hold notice (normal hold notice or special hold notice) that is not the duplicate notice. Without any notice, the correction process for this duplication notice is completed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the stepwise hold notice is set, and the second step notice is set so that the expectation that a big hit result will be obtained after the first step notice is higher than that of the first step notice.

In the present embodiment, it is set that the expectation is higher when the reach display is displayed without the hold notice being given than when the reach display is displayed only by developing to the first stage. Therefore, when the fifth modification condition is not satisfied as described above, the hold notice is not executed even if the hold condition is satisfied, so that the degree of attention to the subsequent reach display is suitably increased. It becomes possible.

Returning to the explanation of the duplication notice correction process (FIG. 66), if it is determined in step S3613 that the lower symbol sequence Z3 is not undergoing high-speed fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S3624. In step S3624, it is determined whether or not the middle symbol sequence Z2 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. If it is determined that the high-speed fluctuation is in progress, the correction process for this duplication notice is terminated as it is. That is, if the middle symbol sequence Z2 is in the high-speed fluctuation, the hold notice is given even if the hold condition is satisfied. There is no.

When the middle symbol sequence Z2 is changing at high speed in step S3624, it is determined in step S3625 whether or not the sixth correction condition is satisfied. The sixth modification condition is satisfied regardless of the advance notice symbol when each symbol stopped or scheduled to be stopped in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 corresponds to the first special mode. If there are two types of the same symbol in each symbol that has stopped or is scheduled to stop in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, it is a condition that the notice symbol is a specific symbol. It is set to hold in.

If the sixth modification condition is satisfied in step S3625, the release flag is stored in step S3626. Then, in step S3627, the ROM 243 refers to the sixth stage correction table as the sixth stage correction information group, the address information for the sixth correction is stored in step S3628, and further, as an effect effect of the hold notice in step S3629. The process of storing the first effect and the second effect in the register is executed, and in step S3630, the process of storing the target movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed.

Similar to the 4th and 5th stage correction tables, the 6th stage correction table is for information and advance notice of the initial production pattern except when the super reach display occurs, as shown in FIG. 67 (c). The information of the effect pattern for the sixth correction and the information of the stop result are set in a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of the symbol information, and further, the effect pattern and the stop for each sixth correction are set. The address information is set according to the result information. All the information of the effect pattern for the sixth correction is set as the information of the effect pattern after the period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, but the information of the effect pattern for each sixth correction was initially set. It does not change the variable display time in the effect pattern.

Further, the information on the stop result for the sixth correction is the same as the information on the stop result for the fourth and fifth corrections, all of which are special modes in which the same two types of symbols are stopped in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is defined as a stop result that becomes the first special aspect or the second special aspect. Further, in the information of the effect pattern for the sixth correction, the information of the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be released and controlled in the stop result which is the special mode and the opening order thereof are paired with the information of the notice symbol. It is set to correspond with 1. Then, the timing of occurrence of the staged effects (first effect and second effect) in the hold notice is determined in correspondence with the opening order of the movable accessories 170 to 173.

After executing the process of step S3630, the process of storing the execution timing of each effect (opening control of the movable accessory, stage effect) in the register is executed in step S3631 based on the sixth stage correction table. .. After that, the notice execution flag is stored in step S3632, and the correction process for this duplicate notice is terminated.

Further, when it is determined in step S3625 that the sixth correction condition is not satisfied, for the same reason as in the case of step S3614, the correction process for the duplicate notice is performed as it is without executing the notice that is not the duplicate notice. To finish.

In this way, when the advance notice condition is satisfied during the execution of the game round, the game round is executed before the game round related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition in the variable processing. The stage effect is set according to the number of pending information and the status of the variable display of the game times currently being executed. Then, in the case where a plurality of (two) hold notices should be executed in the currently executing game times, the effect and stop result of the currently executing game times are corrected to duplicate notices.

Next, the number of hold information related to the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition, the type of the stage effect selected by the stage effect selection process, and the executing Each relationship with the execution condition (situation) of whether or not the hold notice can be executed in the game times of the above will be described with reference to FIG. 68.

First, when the number of reserved information related to the game times executed before the game times related to the reserved information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition is two or more, that is, two or three, the stage production is selected. Regardless of which stage effect is selected by the process, the stage effect can be executed in the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the effect of the currently executing game time can be modified to the hold notice, the hold notice is not given in the currently executing game time. Then, according to the selected stage effect, the hold notice accompanied by the stage effect is started from the game times one or two times before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition.

If the number of hold information related to the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition is 1, the hold notice will be given in the selected stage production and the game times being executed. Depending on whether or not it can be modified, the effect from the game times being executed differs. That is, if the selected stage effect is the first stage notice, it is not necessary to execute the hold notice in the game time being executed, so that the hold notice accompanied by the first effect is executed in the next game time. In addition, when the second stage notice is selected, if it is possible to correct the pending notice (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a single notice) that is not a duplicate notice in the running game times, the running game times are independent. The first effect is executed as a stepwise effect by modifying the notice. Then, in the next game round, the hold notice accompanied by the second effect is executed.

On the other hand, if it is not possible to modify the notice in the running game time to a single notice, the hold notice is not corrected in the game time being executed, and the duplicate notice accompanied by the first effect and the second effect is executed in the next game time. .. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience such that the execution of the second stage notice is restricted even though the second stage notice has been selected in the stage effect selection process.

When the number of hold information related to the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition is 0, it corresponds to the stage effect selected in the game times being executed. The hold notice is executed only when the notice can be modified. That is, when the selected stage effect is the first stage notice, if the game times being executed can be corrected to a single notice, it is corrected, and if it cannot be corrected, it is not corrected. Further, when the selected stage effect is the second stage notice, if the game times being executed can be corrected to the duplicate notice, it is corrected, and if it cannot be corrected, it is not corrected. In other words, it can be said that even if it is possible to modify the stage effect on the side that is not selected by the stage effect selection process, it is not corrected. With this configuration, the selection rate set in the staged effect selection process is suppressed from being changed by uncertain information such as the timing when the advance notice condition is established, and the balance of the attention level set for each effect is lost. Can be suppressed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the hold notice is executed in consecutive game times, the stage effect is generated in each hold notice. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the player expects that the more consecutive hold notices are, the more the jackpot result will be obtained thereafter. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention of each game.

In the above configuration, as a mode of the stop result of the game round, when one of the main symbols of the plurality of types stops in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the other main symbols also stop in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. A possible special aspect was set. As a result, it is possible to execute a plurality of hold notices in one game. Therefore, even if there is little hold information related to the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition when the notice condition is satisfied, the stop result is the above-mentioned special mode. As a result, it is possible to execute the hold notice a plurality of times in one game round, so that the above-mentioned continuous effect can be established in one game round. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

In the case of a stop result that is a special aspect, in any of the hold notices, at least a part of the symbols constituting the hold notice is shielded by the movable accessories 170 to 173, and the movable accessories 170 to 173 are open-controlled. As a result, the hold notice consisting of the symbols that became visible due to the opening was established. This raises the degree of attention to the movements of the movable accessories 170 to 173, and as a player, the type of hold notice that is established by confirming the movement (whether it is a hold notice with a specific symbol or a hold notice with a non-specific symbol). In a configuration in which a plurality of hold notices can be established in one game, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the types of hold notices that have been established are difficult to understand and confused.

Further, as a stop result in a special mode, a stop result in the first special mode in which a plurality of (two) hold notices can be established by operating one movable accessory, and a plurality of movable accessories are operated, respectively. The stop result, which is the second special mode in which the hold notice is established each time, is set. As a result, in the latter case, it is possible to make it easier to understand the type of hold notice that has been established as described above, and in the former case, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the type of hold notice that has been established. Become. As described above, basically, it is better for the player to easily understand the type of hold notice that has been established. However, depending on the situation, it may be better to make it difficult to understand like the former. That is, when the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, but the hold notice by the non-specific symbol and the hold notice by the specific symbol are established in one game, after the hold notice by the specific symbol is established. If the hold notice with a non-specific symbol is established, the player may be disappointed that the jackpot result that can be expected after that has been demoted from the probability variation jackpot result to the normal jackpot result. Therefore, in such a case, by simultaneously establishing the hold notice by the non-specific symbol and the hold notice by the specific symbol, it becomes difficult to understand which hold notice is established, and the player is disappointed as described above. It is possible to suppress the disappointment.

<Fourth Embodiment>
One of the features of the present embodiment is that it has a configuration in which the degree of expectation that a jackpot result is subsequently obtained differs depending on the suspension mode of the hold notice. Specifically, as the hold notice, the first hold notice, the second hold notice, and the third hold notice with different expectations that result in big hits are set thereafter. The first to third hold notices are given by stopping the same notice-corresponding symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as in the case of the hold notices in the first to third embodiments. It is set so that the degree of expectation that will result in a big hit after that differs depending on the area. Therefore, first, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 69, the outline of the relationship between the suspension mode of the hold notice and the degree of expectation will be described.

As shown in FIG. 69A, the first hold notice is an effect in which the hold notice is established by using only the main symbol stopped in the main display area Rm. As shown in FIG. 69B, the second hold notice uses a symbol that stops in the main display area Rm and a symbol that stops in one of the left and right sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2. A production in which a hold notice is established. As shown in FIG. 69 (c), the third hold notice is an effect in which the hold notice is established by using the symbol that stops in the main display area Rm and the symbol that stops in both the left and right sub display areas Rs1 and Rs2. Say. If the notice condition is satisfied at the start of the game round, it is determined which hold notice is to be executed based on the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition. In this case, if the trigger for satisfying the notice condition is a jackpot result, the probability of selecting the third hold notice is the highest, and if the trigger is a missed result, the probability of selecting the first hold notice is high. The highest setting.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game times that are out of reach due to the normal reach display are also treated as a hold notice. That is, in the normal reach display, when the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 stops in an area other than the reach line in the main display area Rm, the stop result of the game round becomes the stop result corresponding to the hold notice. Further, when the reach symbol stops in the sub-display area Rs in the middle symbol row Z2, the stop result of the game round corresponds to the hold notice, provided that the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are open-controlled. It will be a stop result. Here, a mode of reach display will be described with reference to the schematic view of FIG. 70.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a normal reach display and a super reach display set as the reach display, and the super reach display is set to have a higher expectation of a jackpot result than the normal reach display. In the normal reach display, as described below, the middle symbol column Z2 corresponds to the fluctuation display time determined by the main controller 81 (the fluctuation display time determined in step S508 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. 19). The stop result is uniquely decided.

Specifically, when the fluctuation is first started, it becomes impossible or difficult in appearance to identify each symbol displayed in the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 70 (a). The high-speed fluctuation display (or the first speed display) is executed. After that, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the fluctuation, first, for the upper symbol row Z1, each symbol displayed on the display screen G in the upper symbol row Z1 is speeded up so as to be easy to identify in appearance. The variable display is switched to the low speed variable display (or the second speed display slower than the first speed display). After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the variable display in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, and for the lower symbol row Z3, the identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the lower symbol row Z3 is specified. Is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the appearance is easy. Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the variation display in the lower symbol sequence Z3 is stopped. In this case, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. This timing is called the reach occurrence timing.

At the reach occurrence timing, in the middle symbol row Z2, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the middle symbol row Z2 can be easily identified in appearance. At the same time, the position adjustment process of the symbol is executed. In the position adjustment process of the symbol, the symbol position of the middle symbol row Z2 is adjusted so that the symbol "1" of the middle symbol row Z2 passes through the middle line L2 at the timing of switching from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. To. Specifically, the display control device 212 outputs an internal command to the VDP 255 so that the position of the predetermined symbol is reached at a predetermined period (6 seconds in the present embodiment) elapsed timing from the start of the fluctuation. .. This predetermined period is set to be the same as the period from the fluctuation start timing to the reach occurrence timing. The symbol position adjustment process is always executed when the reach display occurs. In detail, the process of creating such an internal command is incorporated into the variation pattern that displays the reach. That is, the position of the symbol "1" in the middle symbol string Z2 at the reach generation timing is the same regardless of the reach display. In other words, the display mode of the middle symbol string Z2 at the start timing (reach occurrence timing) of the low-speed fluctuation display of the middle symbol string Z2 is determined.

In addition, the period from the start of fluctuation to the timing of reach occurrence is a fixed period regardless of the stop result. Further, in the low-speed fluctuation display, at a constant speed (in the present embodiment, the speed at which the fluctuation display for one symbol is performed in 0.5 seconds) until the fluctuation end command is received (until the fluctuation display time elapses). Variable display is performed. As a result, the stop result of the middle symbol sequence Z2 is uniquely determined from the variable display time. Specifically, the middle symbol column stop result information table is stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243. As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 71, the stop result information table of the middle symbol row is set so that the stop result of each middle symbol row Z2 has a one-to-one correspondence with the information of each fluctuation display time. For example, when the fluctuation display time is set to 16 seconds by the main controller 81, it takes 6 seconds until the reach generation timing, that is, the fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped, and the lower It takes 9.5 (= 0.5 × 19) seconds for the symbol “1” in the middle symbol row Z2 to reach the middle line L2 again after the fluctuation display of the symbol row Z3 is stopped, so the total is 15.5. Since it takes seconds, the remaining time is 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the symbol "1" is stopped at the position moved to the left by one symbol from the middle line L2, that is, the left line L1.

From the above, in the case of reach display, the period from the fluctuation start timing to the low-speed fluctuation display start timing is set to be constant, and the mode of the middle symbol sequence Z2 at the low-speed fluctuation display start timing is uniquely determined. Further, since the fluctuation display speed of the low-speed fluctuation display is constant, the stop result of the middle symbol sequence Z2 is determined according to the fluctuation display time. Then, the stop information is specified based on the game result and the stop result of the middle symbol sequence Z2. As a result, the possible stop results are limited as compared with the case where the stop result of the middle symbol string Z2 is not specified, so that the amount of information stored in advance as the possible stop result can be reduced. ..

The super reach display is the same as the normal reach display from the fluctuation start timing until the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the final stop symbol row, is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display at the reach occurrence timing. The variation display mode of is different. Specifically, the super reach display is temporarily stopped in a predetermined area during the low-speed fluctuation display, and then internal command generation and output processing are executed so as to switch from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display again.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the game times in which the super reach display is performed, the normal reach display is first performed, and the reach symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is temporarily stopped in a predetermined area which is a region different from the reach line. After that, the super reach display is set to be performed. Then, in the present embodiment, a region deviated by one line from the reach line display to the fluctuation destination side is set as the predetermined region to be temporarily stopped. That is, for example, when the normal reach display is performed on the right line L3 as shown in FIG. 72 (a), as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the reach symbol (“7” in the figure is The attached main symbol) is temporarily stopped at the middle line L2, and then the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started again, and the super reach display is performed as shown in FIG. 72 (c). In other words, in the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, the region (development point) in which the normal reach display is changed to the super reach display is predetermined.

Here, the middle symbol sequence control process at the time of reach executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73.

First, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2 is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the timing of T3 described above has passed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3701, the symbol display device 161 is display-controlled so as to decelerate the middle symbol sequence Z2 from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation in step S3702. Specifically, a deceleration command as a deceleration instruction is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 determines whether or not this deceleration command has been received to determine the deceleration timing of the middle symbol sequence Z2. It is possible to grasp whether or not.

When it is determined in step S3701 that the deceleration timing is not reached, or after the process of step S3702 is executed, it is determined in step S3703 whether or not the current reach display is the super reach display. If it is determined that the display is super reach, it is determined in step S3704 whether or not it is the development timing from the normal reach display to the super reach display. Specifically, as described above, the timing at which the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 fluctuates from the reach line to the fluctuation destination side by one line is the development timing from the normal reach display to the super reach display. If it is the development timing, in step S3705, the middle symbol string Z2 during low-speed fluctuation is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the process of developing to the super reach display is executed.

If it is determined in step S3703 that the normal reach display is displayed, if it is determined in step S3704 that it is not the development timing, or after the process of step S3705 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3706. In step S3706, it is determined whether or not it is the stop timing of the middle symbol sequence Z2, that is, whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display. If it is the stop timing, the process of displaying the middle symbol string Z2 as a stop is executed in step S3707. If a negative determination is made in step S3706, or after the process of step S3707 is executed, the middle symbol sequence control process at the time of reach ends.

Next, the effect setting process for the hold notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74. As described above, the effect setting process for the hold notice is the process executed in step S807 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29), and FIG. 74 shows the effect setting process for the hold notice shown in FIG. 43 instead of the effect setting process. Indicates the process to be executed.

First, in step S3801, a process of grasping the advance notice symbol is executed. Then, in step S3802, based on the hold information stored in the hold area 244h, it is determined whether or not the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition is a jackpot result. Specifically, when each unit area of the hold area 244h is referred to and the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in any of the unit areas, the trigger for the establishment of the notice condition is the hold corresponding to the jackpot result. Judge as information. If the hold information corresponds to the jackpot result, the notice type lottery table for the jackpot stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 is referred to in step S3803, and if the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot result, the hold information corresponds to the jackpot result. In step S3804, the notice type lottery table for disconnection stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 is referred to, and in the following step S3805, the hold notice to be executed in this game round is based on the notice type lottery table. Notice of lottery of type Executes the type lottery process.

In the notice type lottery table for big hits, as shown in FIG. 75A, the probability that the third hold notice is selected is the highest, and the probability that the first hold notice is selected is the lowest. In this relationship, the probability of being selected is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the third hold notice is selected with a 60% probability, the second hold notice is selected with a 30% probability, and the first hold notice is selected. The notice is set to be selected with a 10% probability. On the other hand, in the notice type lottery table for disconnection, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the probability that the first hold notice is selected is the highest, and the probability that the third hold notice is selected is the lowest. .. In this relationship, the probability of being selected is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the first hold notice is selected with a 60% probability, the second hold notice is selected with a 30% probability, and the third hold notice is selected. The notice is set to be selected with a 10% probability.

Returning to the description of the selection setting process (FIG. 74) for the hold notice, after executing the notice type lottery process in step S3805, the process proceeds to step S3806. In step S3806, it is determined whether or not the first hold notice is selected based on the processing result of step S3805. If the first hold notice is selected, the stop result determination process for the first hold notice is executed in step S3807. In the stop result determination process, the stop result of the current game is determined by referring to the stop result table for the first hold notice from the ROM 243. The stop result table for the first hold notice is associated with the notice symbol and an arbitrary combination of stopping and displaying the main symbol of the same type as the notice symbol in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Rm. The stop result that will be the first hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol is determined by lottery or the like. Then, in the following step S3808, the effect pattern determination process for the first hold notice is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3806 that it is not the first hold notice, the process proceeds to step S3809 to execute the stop result determination process for the second and third hold notices. In the stop result determination process, the stop result of the current game is determined by referring to one of the stop result tables drawn in step S3805 from the stop result table for the second and third hold notices from ROM 243. In the stop result table for the second hold notice, the notice symbol and the main symbol of the same type as the notice symbol are stopped in the main display area Rm and the sub display areas Rs1 and Rs2 on one of the left and right sides in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Is associated with an arbitrary combination to be displayed, and a stop result as a second hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol is determined by lottery or the like. Further, in the stop result table for the third hold notice, the notice symbol and the main symbol of the same type as the notice symbol are displayed in the main display area Rm and the sub display areas Rs1 and Rs2 on both the left and right sides, respectively, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Is associated with an arbitrary combination to be displayed as a stop, and a stop result as a third hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol is determined by lottery or the like. In the stop result table for the second and third hold notices, similarly to the stop result table for the special hold notice in the first to third embodiments, the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be driven and controlled are included. It is associated.

After that, in step S3810, the effect pattern determination process for the second and third hold notices is executed. In the following step S3811, the process of storing the release flag is executed, and the process of storing the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be driven and controlled in step S3812 is executed. After executing the process of step S3808 or step S3812, the process of storing the notice execution flag is executed in step S3813, and then the effect setting process for the present hold notice is terminated.

Next, the effect setting process for generating reach in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 76. As described above, the effect setting process for generating reach is the process executed in step S805 of the variation start process (FIG. 29).

In the effect setting process for generating reach in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S1001 that the reach of the current game times is normal reach, it is determined in step S3901 whether or not the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored. To do. When the notice condition establishment flag is stored, the process of grasping the advance notice symbol is executed in step S3902, and it is determined in step S3903 whether or not the trigger for the advance notice condition establishment was a big hit result. Then, the corresponding notice type lottery table is acquired in step S3904 and step S3905, and the notice type lottery process is executed in step S3906. These processes are the same as the processes of steps S3801 to S3805.

In the following step S3907, it is determined whether or not the first hold notice is selected based on the processing result of the above step S3906, and if it is the first hold notice, in step S3908, the first hold notice at the time of reach The stop result determination process for the user is executed, and in step S3909, the effect pattern determination process for the first hold notice at the time of reach is executed. Further, if it is not the first hold notice in step S3907, it is determined in step S3910 whether or not the second hold notice is selected, and if it is the second hold notice, at the time of reach in step S3911. The stop result determination process for the second hold notice is executed, and in step S3912, the effect pattern determination process for the second hold notice at the time of reach is executed. If it is not the second hold notice in step S3910, the stop result determination process for the third hold notice at the time of reach is executed in step S3913, and the effect pattern for the third hold notice at the time of reach is executed in step S3914. Execute the decision process.

Hereinafter, the stop result determination process for various hold notices at the time of reach in step S3908, step S3911, and step S3913 will be described in detail.

First, in the stop result determination process for the first hold notice at the time of reach, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 77, in step S4001, the stop symbol of the middle symbol sequence Z2 is grasped. Specifically, in the middle symbol string Z2, it is grasped which symbol stops in the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs. Then, in step S4002, the process of determining the reach symbol is executed. In this process, if the notice symbol grasped in step S3902 is a specific symbol, the specific symbol of the type grasped in step S4001 is determined as the reach symbol, and the notice symbol grasped in step S3902 is not. If it is a specific symbol, the non-specific symbol of the type grasped in step S4001 is determined as the reach symbol.

More specifically, for example, in step S3902, when the notice symbol is grasped as a specific symbol of the main symbol with "7", in step S4001, in the middle symbol string Z2, the main display area Rm. And, it is assumed that it is grasped that the specific symbol of the main symbol having "3" in any of the sub-display areas Rs stops. In this case, in step S4002, the main symbol with "3" is determined as the reach symbol. Further, for example, in step S3902, when the notice symbol is grasped as a non-specific symbol which is the main symbol with "2", in step S4001, in the middle symbol string Z2, the main display area Rm and the sub It is assumed that it is grasped that the non-specific symbol of the main symbol in which "4" is added to any of the display areas Rs is stopped. In this case, in step S4002, the main symbol with "4" is determined as the reach symbol.

In the middle symbol string Z2, the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs in all the game times. Specifically, when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of the main display area Rm, the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the left and right sub-display areas Rs, and the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the main display area Rm. Is stopped and displayed, the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the right line L3 of the main display area Rm.

After the process of step S4002 is performed, the reach line determination process is executed in step S4003. In this process, one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the reach line, and the symbol corresponding to the reach symbol determined in step S4002 is not stopped at the determined reach line, that is, the jackpot result is supported. Determine the reach line so that it does not become a combination of symbols. Then, in step S4004, it is determined whether the symbol corresponding to the reach symbol determined in step S4002 is stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm or the sub display area Rs in the middle symbol string Z2. This process is performed based on the process result of step S4001.

If it is determined in step S4004 that the symbol corresponding to the reach symbol is stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm, the stop result determination process for the first hold notice is terminated as it is. In this case, the hold notice executed in this game round is a combination of only the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm, and becomes the first hold notice.

If it is determined in step S4004 that the symbol corresponding to the reach symbol is stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs, the release flag is stored in step S4005, and the target movable accessory 170 to in step S4006. The process of storing 173 is executed. Then, after executing the process of storing the release timings of the movable accessories 170 to 173 stored in step S4006 as the end of reach in step S4007, the stop result determination process for the first hold notice is terminated. .. In this case, the hold notice executed in this game round is the second hold notice because the reach line is formed in the main display area Rm and the reach symbol is stopped and displayed in the sub display area Rs in the middle symbol row Z2. .. That is, in this case, even if the hold notice drawn in the notice type lottery process (step S3906) is the first hold notice, the second hold notice is executed.

Next, the stop result determination process for the second hold notice at the time of reach, which is executed in step S3911, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78. As described above, this stop result determination process is a process executed when the second hold notice is selected.

In the stop result determination process for the second hold notice, first, in step S4101, a process of grasping the stop symbol of the middle symbol string Z2 is executed. After that, the reach symbol determination process is executed in step S4102, and the reach symbol determined in step S4102 in the subsequent step S4103 is stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm or the sub display area Rs in the middle symbol string Z2. To judge. The processes of steps S4101 to S4103 are the same as the processes of steps S4001, step S4002, and step S4004.

If it is determined in step S4103 that the stop display is displayed in the main display area Rm, the process of determining the reach line as an ineffective line is executed in step S4104. In this case, the reach line is determined so that the reach symbol is not stopped and displayed on the determined line in the middle symbol row Z2, that is, the symbol combination does not correspond to the jackpot result. Then, in step S4105, the release flag is stored, in step S4106, the process of storing the target movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed, and in step S4107, the process of storing the release timing as the reach start time is executed. After that, the stop result determination process for the second hold notice is terminated. As a result, in the hold notice executed in this game round, the reach line is formed in the sub display area Rs, and the reach symbol in the middle symbol string Z2 is stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm. That is, the hold notice executed in the same game is the second hold notice.

If it is determined in step S4103 that the stop display is displayed in the sub-display area Rs, the process of determining the reach line as the effective line is executed in step S4108. Also in this process, after determining the reach line so that the reach symbol is not stopped and displayed on the determined line in the middle symbol row Z2, that is, the symbol combination does not correspond to the jackpot result, the second hold notice is given. Ends the stop result determination process for. As a result, in the hold notice executed in this game round, the reach line is formed in the main display area Rm, and the reach symbols in the middle symbol string Z2 are stopped and displayed in the sub display area Rs. That is, the hold notice executed in the same game is the second hold notice.

Next, the stop result determination process for the third reach hold notice performed in step S3913 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 79. As described above, this stop result determination process is a process executed when the third hold notice is selected.

First, in step S4201, a process of grasping the stopped symbol of the middle symbol string Z2 is executed, a process of determining the reach symbol is executed in step S4202, and in step S4203, the reach symbol determined in step S4202 is the middle symbol. In column Z2, it is determined whether the main display area Rm or the sub display area Rs is stopped and displayed. The processes of steps S4201 to S4203 are the same as the processes of steps S4101 to S4103.

When it is determined in step S4203 that the stop display is displayed in the main display area Rm, the stop result corresponding to the third hold notice cannot be obtained regardless of whether the reach line is set to the valid line or the non-valid line. .. Therefore, in this case, in steps S4204 to S4209, a process of changing the current game time so as to be a third hold notice accompanied by a fanning effect is executed instead of the reach generation effect. That is, in step S4204, the process of changing the current game times from the reach generation effect to the third hold notice when the reach does not occur is executed, and in step S4205, the stop result determination process for the third hold notice is executed. Then, in step S4206, the effect pattern determination process for the third hold notice is executed. The processing of step S4205 and step S4206 is the same as the processing for the third hold notice in the processing of step S3809 and step S3810.

In the following step S4207, a process of storing the release flag is executed, in step S4208, a process of storing the fanning effect flag is executed, and in step S4209, a process of storing the target movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed. After that, the stop result determination process for the third hold notice is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4203 that the stop display is displayed in the sub-display area Rs, the process of determining the reach line to one of the invalid lines L6 to L11 is executed in step S4210. In this case, the reach line is determined so that the reach line is formed in the sub-display area Rs on the left-right opposite side of the sub-display area Rs grasped in step S4203, and the reach is reached on the determined line in the middle symbol sequence Z2. The reach line is determined so that the symbols are not stopped and displayed, that is, the symbol combination does not correspond to the jackpot result. Then, in step S4211, a process of storing the release flag is executed, in step S4212, a process of storing the target movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed, and in step S4213, a process of setting the release timing at the start of reach is executed. Is executed, and then the stop result determination process for the third hold notice is terminated. In this case, the hold notice executed in this game round is the first because the symbol forming the reach line and the reach symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 are stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs on the left and right opposite sides. 3 It will be a hold notice.

In this way, in the game times in which the notice condition is satisfied, one of the first hold notice to the third hold notice is selected and the hold notice is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, if the notice condition is satisfied during the execution of the game round, the hold notice is not executed in the game round. In the present embodiment, since there are more types of hold notices than in the first to third embodiments, the hold notice is changed in order to change the stop result of the game times being executed to the stop result corresponding to the hold notice. The processing load in the game times being executed can be extremely increased by the configuration in which the type of the game is drawn and the stop result is changed according to the lottery result. The above-mentioned limitation of the hold notice is a device for suppressing such a local increase in the processing load.

Next, with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 80 and 81, the state in which the reach display is performed in each game round will be described focusing on the relationship with the hold notice.

When the reach line is formed on the effective line and the reach display is started, the player expects that the reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the reach line, that is, a big hit result is obtained in this game round. As already explained, the reach display is set to the normal reach display and the super reach display, and the super reach display is set to have a higher expectation of a big hit result than the normal reach display. Then, in the present embodiment, in the normal reach display, the reach symbol passes the reach line and is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then develops into the super reach display. For this reason, the player first expects that the reach symbol will be stopped and displayed on the reach line as described above while the normal reach display is being performed, and when the reach symbol passes the reach line, We hope that the normal reach display will develop into a super reach display.

On the other hand, in the hold notice, in the present embodiment, the first hold notice to the third hold notice are set, the third hold notice is most likely to result in a big hit after that, and the first hold notice is subsequently. The expectation that will result in a big hit is set to the lowest. In this third hold notice, a symbol combination that becomes a hold notice is formed by using the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the left and right sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2, and the second hold notice is in either the left or right sub-display area Rs1 or Rs2. A symbol combination that is a hold notice is formed using the symbol that is stopped and displayed in Rs2, and a symbol combination that is a hold notice is formed by using the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm for the first hold notice. To.

In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 80A, when the reach display is performed on the right line L3 which is the effective line, the player first stops the reach symbol on the right line L3 in the middle symbol row Z2. Expect to be displayed. This is because if the stop display is displayed on the right line L3 as it is, a big hit result will be obtained. When the reach symbol passes the reach line, the player then temporarily stops at the middle line L2 in which the middle symbol row Z2 is shifted from the right line L3 by one line to the fluctuation destination side, as shown in FIG. 80 (b). Expect to be displayed. This is because once the stop display is displayed, it may develop into a super reach display after that, and it can be expected that a big hit result will be obtained after that.

On the other hand, if the line L2 is temporarily stopped but does not develop into the super reach display, the stop result corresponds to the stop result that is the first hold notice. Therefore, it can be expected that a big hit result will be obtained in the subsequent game times. In this way, the middle symbol column Z2 is temporarily stopped and displayed at the development point from the normal reach display to the super reach display, and after the temporary stop, the super reach display is developed and the stop display (confirmed display) is reached as it is. And are set. Therefore, in addition to the expectation that the player may get a big hit result in the game round due to the subsequent development in the case of the temporary stop, the player may get a big hit result in the game rounds performed after the game round. You can maintain the expectation that you will not be able to do it. As a result, by directing the game times this time, it is possible to increase the degree of attention not only to the game times this time but also to the subsequent game times, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game as a whole.

As shown in FIG. 80 (c), when the normal reach display does not stop at the middle line L2, the reach symbol further fluctuates to the fluctuation destination side, and the left side is a region farther from the reach line than the middle line L2. When the stop is displayed on the non-effective line L9, the third movable accessory 172 and the fourth movable accessory 173 move to the non-shielding position, resulting in a stop result corresponding to the second hold notice. As mentioned above, the expectation that the second hold notice will be a big hit result after that is set higher than the first hold notice, and by this stop result, the player will be the big hit result after that. Expected to be expected.

Here, in general, it is considered that the farther the reach symbol is from the reach line, the lower the player's expectation for the jackpot result in this game round. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the farther the reach symbol is from the reach line, the higher the expectation that a big hit result will be set in the subsequent game times. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation due to the reach symbol moving away from the reach line, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention throughout the reach.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), a case where the right-right falling line L7 and the right-right rising line L8 provide cross-line reach due to the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol will be described. In this case, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the middle symbol row Z2, the main symbol (specific symbol) with the reach symbol “7” forming the reach line of the right rising line L8 is on the right side. When the stop is displayed on the non-valid line L6, the game result of this game round will be out of order, but this stop result is the stop result which is the second hold notice, and it will be the big hit result in the next and subsequent game rounds. Can be expected to be. In the middle symbol row Z2, when the main symbol with "7" is stopped and displayed on the right line L3, the symbol combination corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, and this game round is the probability variation jackpot result. As shown in FIG. 81 (c), in the middle symbol row Z2, when the main symbol with "7" is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, this stop result is the stop result which is the second hold notice. is there. In addition, once stopped at the middle line L2, the normal reach of "7" can develop into a super reach, so it can be expected that a big hit result will be obtained in this game.

In the middle symbol row Z2, when the main symbol with "7" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, the main symbols with "8", which is a non-specific symbol, are aligned in the right downward falling line L7. It will be a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, and this game will usually be the jackpot result. As shown in FIG. 81 (d), when the main symbol with "7" is stopped and displayed on the left ineffective line L9 in the middle symbol row Z2, this stop result is a stop that is a third hold notice. The result. In this case, as shown in FIG. 81 (b) or FIG. 81 (c) above, the reach symbol is stopped and displayed by one line on the fluctuation base side or the fluctuation destination side from the reach line of "7". The expectation that a big hit result will be higher in the next and subsequent game times is higher than the notice. Further, in this case, the main symbol with "8" is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, and once the main symbol with "8" on the middle line L2 is stopped, the normal reach of "8" becomes super. Since it can develop into reach, it can be expected that it will be a big hit result in this game.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the hold notice, the stop result of the out-of-reach is also set to be subject to the hold notice, and the farther the reach symbol is from the reach line to the fluctuation destination side or the fluctuation base side, the more the expectation that the result will be a big hit in the subsequent game rounds. It was set to be a high-level hold notice. By doing so, it is possible to keep the attention level during the reach suitable, and it is possible to increase the attention level of this game time in the production of holding notice, which raises the attention level of the next and subsequent game times. It will be possible.

As the above specific configuration, the first hold notice that uses only the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm, and the symbols that are stopped and displayed in either the left or right sub-display area Rs and the stop display in the main display area Rm. A second hold notice that uses the symbol to be displayed and a third hold notice that uses the symbol that is stopped and displayed in either the left or right sub-display area Rs are set, and the third hold notice, the second hold notice, and the second 1 It was set so that the expectation of a big hit result would be higher in the order of the hold notice. By setting in this way, in the reach in which the reach line is formed in the main display area Rm, it is more expected that the reach symbol of the middle symbol string Z2 is stopped in the sub display area Rs than in the main display area Rm. In the reach in which the reach line is formed in the sub-display area Rs, the sub-display on the side opposite to the reach line formed in the middle symbol column Z2 is larger than the reach symbol stops in the main display area Rm. Expectations are higher when stopped in the region Rs. That is, the expected degree of the region where the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 stops differs between the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs. By clarifying the visual difference in the notice mode, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to understand the difference in the degree of expectation of the executed notice.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that a plurality of development points from the normal reach display to the super reach display are set. In terms of condition, as the development points from the normal reach display to the super reach display, the first development point where the reach symbol fluctuates by one line from the reach line and temporarily stops at the line shifted to the destination side, and the fluctuate by two lines from the reach line. A second development point that temporarily stops at a line shifted to the front side and a third development point that temporarily stops at a line shifted to the destination side that fluctuates by three lines from the reach line are set. Further, the selected development point and the reach line of the normal reach display before development are associated with each other so that the super reach display can be developed.

More specifically, when the first development point is selected, a line other than the left ineffective line L9 is selected as the reach line of the normal reach display before development. When the second development point is selected, a line other than the left ineffective line L9, the left right downward line L10, and the left right upward line L11 is set as the reach line of the normal reach before development. ing. When the third development point is selected, the reach line is selected as the right line L3, the right ineffective line L6, the right right downward line L7, or the right right upward line L8 as the reach line of the normal reach before development. It is set to be done.

Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic view of FIG. 82, focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment.

In the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29) by the effect control device 82, in step S903 of the effect setting process for jackpot (FIG. 30) and step S1003 of the effect setting process for reach generation (FIG. 32), the super reach occurs. The production pattern at the time of super reach is determined by referring to the production pattern table. As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the probability that the third development point is selected is the highest in the effect pattern table at the time of super reach for big hits, which is selected when the game result of this game is a big hit result. As well as being set, the probability that the first development point will be selected is set to the lowest. The probability of being selected in the order of 3rd development point> 2nd development point> 1st development point is set to be high. Each selection rate is arbitrary as long as it has the above relationship, but in the present embodiment, the probability that the third development point is selected is set to 60%, and the probability that the second development point is selected is set to 30%. The probability that the first development point will be selected is set to 10%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the effect pattern table at the time of super reach for disengagement, which is selected when the game result of this game is a disengagement result, the probability that the first development point is selected is It is set to the highest and the probability that the third development point is selected is set to the lowest. Then, the probability of being selected in the order of the first development point, the second development point, and the third development point is set to be high. Each selection rate is arbitrary as long as it has the above relationship, but in the present embodiment, the probability that the first development point is selected is set to 60%, and the probability that the second development point is selected is set to 30%. The probability that the third development point will be selected is set to 10%.

Since it is set in this way, in the normal reach display, the degree of expectation that the game result of the game times will be a big hit result differs depending on the area (development point) where the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 temporarily stops. That is, the highest degree of expectation is obtained when the device is temporarily stopped at the third development point, and the lowest degree of expectation is when the device is temporarily stopped at the first development point. Expectations increase in the order of 3rd development point> 2nd development point> 1st development point.

Further, since the development points are set as described above, it is possible to predict which development point is selected by the reach line on which the normal reach display is performed. That is, when the reach line on which the normal reach display is performed is the right line L3, the right ineffective line L6, the right right downward line L7, or the right right upward line L8, any of the first to third development points is selected. There may be. If the reach line on which the normal reach display is performed is the middle line L2, the downward-sloping line L4, and the upward-sloping line L5, there is no possibility that the third development point has been selected, and the first development point or the second development point is It will be selected. When the reach line on which the normal reach display is performed is the left line L1, the left right falling line L10, and the left right rising line L11, there is no possibility that the second and third development points are selected, and the first The development point will be selected.

In this way, since the reach line of the normal reach display is determined by the development point of the super reach display, the normal reach display and the development point of the lines L1, L10, L11 in which only the first development point is possible are set. In the normal reach display of the non-line (left ineffective line L9), there is a concern that the degree of attention will decrease.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), in the effect pattern table at the time of normal reach for big hits, the lines L1, L10, and L11 which may have only the first development point are The probability of being selected is high (60%), followed by the high probability of selecting lines L2, L4, L5 where the first or second development point may have been selected (30%). Next, the probability that the lines L3, L6, L7, and L8 where the first to third development points may be selected is selected is set high (9%). Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (d), in the effect pattern table at the time of normal reach for disconnection, lines L3, L6, L7, and L8 in which the first to third development points may be selected are selected. The probability of being selected is the highest (60%), and then the lines L2, L4, and L5, where the first development point or the second development point may be selected, are most likely to be selected (30). %), And the probability that lines L1, L10, L11, where only the first development point is possible, is selected is set to the lowest (10%). The effect pattern table at the time of normal reach is a table referred to in step S906 in the effect setting process for jackpot in the change start process (FIG. 29) and step S1022 in the effect setting process for generating reach.

By setting the effect pattern table at the time of normal reach in this way, it is possible to suppress the decrease in attention of the normal reach display due to the development point of the super reach display being set as described above. It has become.

Incidentally, the left non-effective line L9 in which the development point is not set is set only for the jackpot table in the effect pattern table at the time of normal reach, and the selection rate is set to the lowest (1%). That is, when the reach is displayed on the left non-effective line L9, the jackpot result is confirmed at that time, which is a premier effect.

Further, although detailed description by the figure is omitted, when a point corresponding to the left sub-display area Rs2 is selected as the above-mentioned development point, the third movable accessory 172 and the third movable accessory 172 and the third movable accessory are displayed when the normal reach display is developed to the super reach display. 4 The drive units 172a and 173a are driven and controlled so that the movable accessory 173 moves to the non-shielding position. Therefore, when the point corresponding to the left sub-display area Rs2 is selected in the fluctuation start processing, the corresponding movable accessory 172, 173 and the development timing are stored.

Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 83, the state in which the reach display is performed in each game round will be described focusing on the relationship with the development point to the super reach display.

As shown in FIG. 83A, when a reach occurs on the right line L3, the player first expects that the reach symbol stops on the right line L3, which is the reach line in the reach. If the reach symbol passes the reach line, there is still the possibility that it will develop into a super reach display after that. Then, as the development points, the first development point (middle line L2) shown in FIG. 83 (b), the second development point (left line L1) shown in FIG. 83 (c), and FIG. 83 (d) are shown. The third development point (left non-effective line L9) is set, and the farther the reach symbol is from the reach line to the fluctuation destination side, the higher the expectation that a big hit result will be in the post-development super reach display is set. ing. Therefore, as a player, the reach symbol after passing the reach line is expected to fluctuate from the first development point to the second development point and from the second development point to the third development point. You will pay attention to the whereabouts. This makes it possible to suitably increase the degree of attention during reach.

Further explaining the relationship with the hold notice, if a reach occurs on the right line L3, if the stop is displayed (confirmed display) after stopping at the first and second development points, the first hold notice is given. The stop result is equivalent to. On the other hand, if the stop display (confirmed display) is displayed as it is after the stop at the third development point, the stop result corresponds to the second hold notice.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when the normal reach display is performed, the farther the development point from the normal reach display to the super reach display is from the reach line, the higher the expectation that a jackpot result will be obtained in the game. Is set high, so that the degree of attention of the reach can be suitably increased.

In the above configuration, due to the relationship between the reach line and the development point, when the normal reach display is performed, the development point may be limited by the reach line, so that the degree of attention to the normal reach display is reduced. Is a concern. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the expected degree of a big hit result is different depending on the type of reach line without developing into the super reach display and keeping the normal reach display. By doing so, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect by setting the development point as described above while avoiding the inconvenience that the degree of attention is lowered due to the relationship with the development point in the normal reach display.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a colorless and transparent game board 100, and a movable accessory device 162 and a symbol display device 161 arranged behind the game board 100 are used to realize a characteristic effect.

First, the configuration of the game board 100 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84.

In the present embodiment, the configuration of the center frame 130 provided on the game board 100 is different. That is, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 132 is arranged at the exit of the front side ball passage 134 of the roof frame 131, and the game ball passing through the front side ball passage 134 is received by the ball receiving portion 132. Become. The stage frame 150 in the present embodiment is formed by extending both left and right ends upward, so that the back side ball passage 153 is communicated with the ball receiving portion 132.

That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the opening 135 of the roof frame 131 is distributed to either the left or right front side ball passage 134, and is received by the ball receiving portion 132 to the back side ball passage 153. It is derived and then derived to stage 144. In this case, a part of the left and right back side ball passages 153 is arranged so as to overlap the movable accessory device 162 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the game ball passing through the left and right back ball passages 153 also overlaps with the movable accessory device 162 in the front-rear direction during the passage. Further, as described above, since the movable accessory device 162 is arranged so as to overlap the display screen G in the front-rear direction, the game ball that overlaps the movable accessory device 162 in the front-rear direction during the passage is simultaneously combined with the display screen G. It will overlap in the front-back direction.

Further, in the roof frame 131, detection sensors 136a and 136b for detecting the passage of the game ball are provided near the entrances of the left and right front ball passages 134. The detection sensors 136a and 136b are connected to the effect control device 82, and the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 enters the front side ball passage 134 based on the detection information (detection signal) from these detection sensors 136a and 136b. It is possible to grasp that the ball has been generated (the game ball passes through the back side ball passage 153).

In the present embodiment, characteristic control is performed in which the movements of the movable accessories 170 to 173 are linked to the movements of the game ball by utilizing the above configuration. Hereinafter, the processing during fluctuation by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 85. As described above, the variable motion processing is the process executed in step S705 of the variable display control process (FIG. 28), and FIG. 85 is a process executed in place of the variable motion process shown in FIG. 35. Is.

In the variable processing in the present embodiment, similarly to the processing in steps S1201 to S1207, the processing for performing the fanning effect is executed in steps S4301 to S4307. In step S4308, it is determined whether or not the release flag is stored in the RAM 244. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4308, the process proceeds to step S4309.

In step S4309, based on the detection information of the detection sensors 136a and 136b, has the game ball entered the front side ball passage 134 corresponding to the movable accessory 170 to 173 scheduled to execute the opening control in this game round? Judge whether or not. Specifically, when either one of the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 is scheduled to execute the opening control in this game round, it is arranged in the front side ball passage 134 on the left side. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 136a, a positive determination is made in step S4309. Further, when either one of the third movable accessory 172 and the fourth movable accessory 173 is scheduled to execute the opening control in this game round, the detection sensor arranged in the front side ball passage 134 on the right side When the passage of the game ball is detected by 136b, an affirmative determination is made in step S4309.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4309, the process proceeds to step S4310, and a process of adding 1 to the ball entry counters provided in various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 is executed. This ball entry counter is referred to when the MPU 202 grasps the number of game balls that have entered the front ball passage 134.

If a negative determination is made in step S4309, or after the process of step S4210 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4311. In step S4311, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. If it is determined that the number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S4312, and the processes for controlling the opening and closing of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are executed in steps S4312 to S4317. Since each process of steps S4312 to S4317 is the same as the process of steps S1209 to S1214, the description is incorporated.

When a negative determination is made in step S4311, that is, when the value of the ball entry counter is less than a predetermined number, even if the release flag is stored (even if an affirmative determination is made in step S4308). ), The process for controlling the opening / closing of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 described above is not executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the open flag is stored, and even in the game times in which the special hold notice is executed, it is special unless a predetermined number or more of the game balls are entered into the corresponding front side ball passage 134. The hold notice will not be executed.

Here, the ball passing process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86. The ball passing process is a process that is started at a predetermined timing, and specifically, is a process that is started after the variable display control process (FIG. 28) is executed.

In the ball passing process, first, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not it is the variation display start timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start processing is performed in the fluctuation display control processing executed before the ball passing processing started this time. If it is determined that it is the variation display start timing, the process proceeds to step S4402, and it is determined whether or not the release flag is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4402, a process of outputting a release suggestion command to the display control device 212 is executed in step S4403. The release suggestion command includes information on movable accessories 170 to 173 scheduled to execute opening / closing control in this game. In the display control device 212 that has received the opening suggestion command, the symbol display device so as to perform a suggestion effect suggesting which of the left and right front side ball passages 134, the movable accessory 170 to 173 on the passage side, is scheduled to operate. Display control of 161. Specifically, for example, if the first movable accessory 170 or the second movable accessory 171 is the target, the message "Aim at the right passage!" Is displayed, and the third movable accessory 172 or the fourth movable accessory is displayed. If the character 173 is the target, display "Aim at the left passage!".

If a negative determination is made in step S4401 or step S4402, or after the process of step S4403 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4404. In step S4404, it is determined again whether or not the release flag is stored. If it is determined that the release flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S4405. In step S4405, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the corresponding front ball passage 134 based on the detection information from the detection sensors 136a and 136b. This process is the same as the process of step S4309.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4405, the drive units 170a to 173a of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are driven and controlled in step S4406 to act as an operation corresponding to entering the front ball passage 134. For example, the movable accessory 170 to 173 is vibrated. If a negative determination is made in step S4404 or step S4405, or after the process of step S4406 is executed, the ball passing process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, when the notice condition is satisfied at the start of the game round and the special hold notice is scheduled to be executed in the game round, the suggestion effect is executed by the symbol display device 161 as described above. To. Then, when the player enters the game ball into the front side ball passage 134 according to the suggested effect, the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 operate (vibrate) each time the ball enters. Then, when the number of incoming balls exceeds a predetermined number and the opening timing is reached, the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are controlled to move to the non-shielded position, and the special hold notice is executed.

On the other hand, as described above, when the suggestion effect is performed but the ball is not entered into the corresponding front ball passage 134, or when the number of balls entering the corresponding front ball passage 134 does not reach the predetermined number. No special hold notice will be given to.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, even if the special hold notice is not given in this way, the game results in the current game times and the subsequent game times do not change. However, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which it is possible to play a game while having a sense of expectation for the subsequent game times by giving a special hold notice, so as a player who wants to enjoy the production as much as possible. Even if it is understood that it does not affect the game result, it is considered that it is hoped that a special hold notice will be given at this game time. In this case, the player operates the launch handle 55 to try to insert the game ball into the front side ball passage 134 so that the special hold notice is given. By doing so, it is possible to encourage active participation in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned suggestion effect is performed only at the start of the game round, but the advance notice condition is satisfied during the execution of the game round, and the replacement process (step S4319) is performed in the game round. If it is set to give a special hold notice, no suggestive effect will be given. On the other hand, even when a special hold notice is set during the execution of the game round in this way, the corresponding movable accessory 170 to the corresponding movable accessory 170 when the game ball enters the corresponding front side ball passage 134. Since 173 operates, the player can grasp that a special hold notice can be given after that. By doing so, it is considered that the player who wants to enjoy the production as described above usually operates the launch handle 55 so as to enter the front side ball passage 134, and in this case, such a case. It is possible to give a special feeling that only the player who is performing the firing operation can grasp the special hold notice before the special hold notice is given, and it is possible to preferably encourage active participation in the game.

In such a configuration, when the player launches the game ball in the launch mode for enjoying the production as described above, the launched game ball passes through the front side ball passage 134 and the back side ball passage 153. Then, it is derived to the stage 144. As described above, the game ball led out to the stage 144 has a configuration in which it is easy to enter the operating port 115 arranged below the game ball. However, the above-mentioned launching mode is a launching mode in which the ball is easily entered into the operating port 115. It can be said that. That is, the launch mode for the player to enjoy the production is a launch mode in which the player can easily obtain a privilege (easily receive a winning / losing lottery). As a result, it is possible to fully enjoy the production without giving a disadvantage to the player, and it is possible to preferably exert the effect of improving the interest.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the movable accessory device 162 and the symbol display device are associated with the movement of the game ball by utilizing the positional relationship between the game board 100, the movable accessory device 162, and the symbol display device 161. Since the effect of 161 can be performed, the effect on the game machine side (the operation of the movable accessories 170 to 173 and the display screen G) can be added to the game of following the movement of the game ball launched by the player's operation with the eyes. It is possible to perform a novel effect of associating a hold notice). As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

<7th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the movable accessory device 162 is different from that of the first to sixth embodiments. Hereinafter, the outline of the movable accessory device 300 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. 87 and 88 are schematic views showing the relationship between the display screen G and the movable accessory device 300, and the symbol display device 161 (display screen G) located behind the movable accessory device 300 is outlined by a two-dot chain line. It is described as.

As shown in FIG. 87, similarly to each of the above-described embodiments, the movable accessory device 300 includes four movable accessories 310, 320, 330, 340 arranged at the four corners of the display screen G of the symbol display device 161. have. These four movable accessories 310, 320, 330, and 340 are fans that can be opened and closed, and are in an open state (shielded state) that overlaps the display screen G in the front-rear direction and a closed state that does not overlap the display screen G in the front-rear direction (shielded state). It is possible to switch to the non-shielded state) (see FIGS. 87 and 88).

Specifically, when the upper right movable accessory (first movable accessory) 310 arranged at the upper right of the display screen G is opened, the upper right portion of the display screen G (variable display area) is covered and difficult to see. Alternatively, it becomes impossible and the upper right portion is exposed and the visibility of the upper right portion is guaranteed by being closed. That is, the target for switching between shielding and non-occlusion by the upper right movable accessory (first movable accessory) 310 arranged at the upper right of the display screen G is the upper right portion of the display screen G (variable display area). Similarly, the target for switching between shielding and non-occlusion by the lower right movable accessory (second movable accessory) 320 arranged at the lower right of the display screen G is arranged at the lower right part of the display screen G and at the upper left of the display screen G. The target of switching between shielding and non-shielding by the upper left movable accessory (third movable accessory) 330 is the upper left part of the display screen G, and the lower left movable accessory (fourth movable accessory) arranged at the lower left of the display screen G. The target for switching between shielding and non-shielding by 340 is the lower left portion of the display screen G.

These four movable accessories 310, 320, 330, 340 have the same basic structure. Therefore, in the following description, the upper right movable accessory 310 will be illustrated with reference to the schematic view of FIG. 89, and then the other movable accessories 320, 330, 340 will be described focusing on the differences from the upper right movable accessory 310. Explains. FIG. 89 is a front view of the movable accessory 310.

The movable accessory 310 has a bone portion 311 formed by combining a plurality of long plate-shaped members in the front-rear direction of the game machine. The bone portion 311 is a pair of anterior-posterior rib portions 314 (front side is anterior rib portion 314a, posterior side is posterior rib portion 314b), and a plurality of middle bone portions (three in the present embodiment) sandwiched between the rib portions 314. It is composed of 315. The plate surfaces of the ribs 314 and the middle bones 315 face forward and backward, and are laminated at one end thereof. A main part 317 is formed at one end of the main part, and the movable accessory 310 opens and closes by rotating the bone part 311 around the main part 317.

A semi-transparent fan surface portion 312 is attached to the end portion (the other end portion) of each bone portion 311 on the side opposite to the main portion 317. The fan surface portion 312 has a fan shape of about 150 °, and the rib portions 314a and 314b are fixed from behind to both sides of the fan-shaped diameter, and the middle bone portions 315 are fixed to the middle portion at equal intervals. There is. The fan surface portion 312 is alternately provided with a fixed portion 312a to be fixed to each bone portion 311 and a non-fixed portion 312b sandwiched between the fixed portions 312a, and the fixed portion 312a and the non-fixed portion 312b are provided. A bent portion 312c that bends when the movable accessory 310 is closed is formed at the boundary portion. The bent portion 312c includes a mountain fold formed along the edge of each bone portion 311 and a valley fold provided between the bent portions 312c of the mountain folds, and the fan surface portion 312 has a mountain fold. The part and the valley fold part are formed alternately.

As shown in the schematic view of FIG. 90A, the mountain fold portion and the valley fold portion are maintained in the open state, so that when the movable accessory 310 is closed, the bent portion 312c is used as a starting point. It will be guided to deform. That is, it is possible to prevent the fan surface portion 312 from bending at another portion without bending at the bent portion 312c. By specifying the deformed portion of the fan surface portion 312 in this way, it is possible to prevent the folding function from not working well due to the unintended deformation of the fan surface portion 312 due to repeated opening and closing. ..

The movable accessory 310 is integrated with the game board 100 by fixing the front rib portion 314a to the back surface of the game board 100. As shown in FIG. 87 and the like, a drive motor 313 as a power source is arranged behind the movable accessory 310 (main part 317), and the movable accessory 310 opens and closes by the power from the drive motor 31. ..

In order to open and close the movable accessory 310, one of the ribs 314 is fixed and the other is rotated so that the movable accessory 310 can be opened and closed. However, with such a configuration, it may be difficult to open and close smoothly, and the stress generated during opening and closing may be locally increased to reduce durability. In order to eliminate such inconvenience, in the present embodiment, a driving force transmission mechanism for realizing opening and closing of the movable accessory 310 is characteristic. Therefore, the power transmission mechanism will be described below with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 89 and 90 (b).

As shown in FIG. 89, a through hole 318 penetrated in the front-rear direction is formed in the main portion 317, and a gear 319 is arranged in each of the through holes 318. As shown in FIG. 90B, the gear 319 includes a drive unit side gear 313b fixed to the rotation shaft 313a of the drive motor 313, a bone portion side gear 313c fixed to each bone portion 311 and the drive thereof. It is composed of a planetary gear 313d arranged between the partial gear 313b and the bone side gear 313c. The bone side gear 313c is a sun gear, the drive unit side gear 313b is an internal gear, and the planetary gear 313d is a planet. It functions as a planetary gear mechanism as a carrier.

The gear ratio of each gear 313b to 313d is such that the rotation speed of the bone portion on the rotation tip side is relatively faster than the rotation speed of the bone portion on the rotation base end side. It is set. That is, it is set so that the larger the amount of movement during opening and closing, the faster the rotation speed. More specifically, the timing at which each bone portion reaches the open position / closed position is set to be the same timing.

When the drive motor 313 is driven and controlled to rotate the rotation shaft 313a, the drive unit side gear 313b rotates, and the power is transmitted to the bone portion side gear 313c via the planetary gear 313d. The drive motor 313 is connected to the effect control device 82 as in each of the above-described embodiments, and the drive control of the drive motor 313 is performed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82.

When the drive motor 313 operates by the drive signal from the effect control device 82 (when the rotation shaft 313a rotates), each bone portion 311 excluding the anterior rib portion 314a rotates. That is, by controlling the rotation shaft 313a to rotate clockwise in the front view, each bone portion 311 rotates so that the fan opens, the fan surface portion 312 is opened, and the opening overlaps with the display screen G in the front-rear direction. It becomes a state (see FIG. 87). Further, from this state, the drive motor 313 is driven and controlled, and the rotation shaft 313a is rotationally controlled counterclockwise in a front view, so that each bone portion 311 rotates so as to close the fan, and the fan surface portion 312 Is closed and switches to a closed state that does not overlap the display screen G in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 88). In this case, the fan surface portion 312 is folded at each bent portion 312c and is housed between the front and rear rib portions 314a and 314b. When the fan surface portion 312 is closed in this way, the outer shape of the movable accessory 310 in the front view of the game machine is smaller than that in the open state.

Since the fan surface portion 312 is semi-transparently formed as described above, when the upper right movable accessory 310 is arranged at the shielding position, as shown in FIG. 87, from the display screen G behind (right side sub-display area Rs1). The light will pass through the fan surface portion 312. In this case, in the present embodiment, the visibility of the design displayed on the display screen G behind is changed by utilizing the positional relationship between the fan surface portion 312 and the display screen G.

That is, each bone portion 311 rotates in a direction substantially parallel to the display screen G and is displaced to a shielded position and a non-shielded position. On the other hand, the maximum rotation position of each bone portion 311 is set so that the angle formed by the front and rear rib portions 314a and 314b (about 120 ° in the present embodiment) is smaller than the angle formed by the fan surface portion 312 (about 150 °). When each bone portion 311 moves to a shielding position, each bent portion 312c is arranged at a predetermined angle α as shown in FIG. 90 (a). As a result, a surface that is non-parallel to the fan surface portion 312 and the display screen G is generated, and the light emitted from the display screen G is refracted on the non-parallel surface to reduce the visibility of the display screen G. Specifically, the non-fixed surface is the non-fixed portion 312b, and the fixed portion 312a continuous with the non-fixed portion 312b is arranged substantially parallel to the display screen G. Therefore, in the fixed portion 312a, the light emitted from the display screen G is hardly refracted and is transmitted as it is.

By providing a surface parallel to the surface non-parallel to the display screen G in this way, the visibility of the display screen G is changed, and the player is behind the movable accessories 310, 320, 330, 340. It is possible to make the design displayed on the screen interesting.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory 310 opens and closes, a bending operation occurs at the bent portion 312c of the fan surface portion 312. Therefore, if the fan surface portion 312 is formed of Japanese paper or the like so as to have only translucency rather than transparency, there may be a concern that the strength of the bent portion 312c is lowered and the upper right movable accessory 310 is weakened. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the strength is secured by forming the fan surface portion 312 with nylon resin or the like. By arranging the display screen G and the fan surface portion 312 in a non-parallel manner, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display screen G behind the display screen G from being excessively improved. By doing so, while achieving the shielding effect of reducing the visibility of the display screen G in the situation where the upper right movable accessory 310 is arranged in the shielding position, there is an inconvenience such as weakening of the upper right movable accessory 310 due to the position displacement. It is possible to avoid.

Further, if the entire surface of the fan surface portion 312 is arranged so as to be non-parallel to the display screen G, it is necessary that not only the non-fixed portion 312b but also the fixed portion 312a is non-parallel. In this case, it becomes necessary to display each bone portion 311 fixed to the fixing portion 312a as the display screen G, which may complicate the structure. On the other hand, since each bone portion 311 is fixed to the fixed portion 312a, the light from the display screen G is not transmitted forward by making each bone portion 311 non-transparent. Therefore, by arranging the fixing portion 312a so as to be substantially parallel to the display screen G as in the present embodiment, the shielding function of the display screen G is ensured while suppressing the complication of the structure.

Here, regarding the upper movable accessories 310 and 330, when the anterior ribs 314a and 334a are fixed to the game board 100 and these fixed anterior ribs 314a and 334a open and close the movable accessories 310 and 330. The proximal end side and the posterior rib portion 314b and 334b side are the distal end sides. On the other hand, in the lower movable accessories 320 and 340, the posterior ribs 324b and 344b are fixed to the base body 163 instead of the anterior ribs 324a and 344a, and these fixed posterior ribs 324b and 334b. Is the base end side when opening and closing the movable accessories 320 and 340, and the front end side and the anterior rib portions 324a and 344a side are the tip side.

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 91, in the movable accessory device 300, when the movable accessories 310, 320, 330, and 340 are closed, some of the upper and lower movable accessories are mutually moved in the front-rear direction. They are arranged so that they overlap. The overlap of the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320 and 330, 340 will be described with reference to FIG. 91. Since the movable accessory device 300 has a symmetrical configuration, the movable accessories 310 and 320 arranged on the right side of the display screen G will be illustrated here.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper movable accessories 310 and 330 can be opened and closed by fixing the anterior ribs 314a and 334a to the game board 100 and rotating the posterior ribs 314b and 334b. Will be done. On the other hand, the lower movable accessories 320 and 340 are opened and closed by fixing the posterior ribs 324b and 344b to the game board 100 and rotating the anterior ribs 324a and 344a. By arranging the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320, 330, 340 in this way, even if both are in the open state and overlap in the front-rear direction as described above, the movable accessory device 300 is arranged. It suppresses the increase in thickness.

Specifically, assuming that the respective thicknesses when the movable accessories 310, 320, 330, and 340 are arranged in the shielded position are d1, the overall thickness is d1 in the situation where they are arranged in the non-shielded position. However, the thickness at each site is thinner than d1 (see, for example, d2). By superimposing the movable accessories 310, 320, 330, and 340 between the thinned portions, the space before and after the portion where the overlap occurs can be made smaller than d1 × 2. That is, it is possible to shorten the distance between the display screen G arranged behind the movable accessory device 300 and the game board 100 arranged in front of the movable accessory device 300, which is caused by the increase in the distance. It is possible to suppress a decrease in visibility of the display screen G to be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the relationship between the main symbol that is stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs of the display screen G and the movable accessory will be illustrated. FIG. 92 is a schematic view showing the relationship between the movable accessories 310 and 320 and the main symbol stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs1.

As shown in FIG. 92A, when the upper movable accessory 310 is opened, the fan surface portion 312 of the movable accessory 310 is a part of the main symbol that stops in the middle symbol row Z2 in the sub-display area Rs. It overlaps in the front-back direction. Further, when the lower movable accessory 320 is arranged at the shielding position, the fan surface portion 322 of the movable accessory 320 overlaps a part of the main symbols stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 in the sub-display area Rs in the front-rear direction. Arranged like this. The main symbols stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 of these sub-display areas Rs include a first portion P1 that is visible from the front of the game machine without overlapping the upper and lower movable accessories 310 and 320 in the front-rear direction, and the upper movable part. A second part P2 that overlaps only the accessory 310 in the front-rear direction, a third part P3 that overlaps only the lower movable accessory 320 in the front-rear direction, and a fourth part that overlaps the upper and lower movable accessories 310 and 320 in the front-rear direction. P4 is set.

Then, the main symbol stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 of the sub-display area Rs switches from the open state to the closed state of the lower movable accessory 320 under the condition that the upper movable accessory 310 is in the open state. Then, as shown in FIG. 92B, of the above-mentioned parts P1 to P4, the third part P3 in addition to the first part P1 becomes visible from the front of the game machine. On the other hand, when the upper movable accessory 310 is switched from the open state to the closed state while the lower movable accessory 320 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 92 (c), each of the above parts. Of P1 to P4, the second part P2 in addition to the first part P1 becomes visible from the front of the game machine. Further, when both the upper and lower movable accessories 310 and 320 are switched from the open state to the closed state, the fourth portion P4 becomes visible as shown in FIG. 92 (c).

Assuming that the main symbol is composed of the character image and the numerical image, the parts that can be visually recognized on the condition that both the upper and lower movable accessories 310 and 320 are switched to the closed state (fourth part P4). By arranging the numerical image in)), as described in the first to sixth embodiments above, the holding symbol stops in the middle symbol row Z2 of the sub-display area Rs in the holding notice, and the upper and lower movable combinations It becomes easier for the player to recognize the significance of the special hold notice that becomes effective when both the objects 310 and 320 are displaced to the non-shielded position. That is, in the above-mentioned hold notice, in addition to the movements of the movable accessories 310, 320, 330, 340, the fact that the fourth part P4 becomes visible is the establishment of the hold notice using the symbol in the middle of the sub-display area Rs. It becomes a condition, and it becomes easy to recognize the success or failure of the hold notice.

In addition, as the main symbol, one consisting of a character image and a numerical image and one that seems to be the same at first glance (specifically, the one in which the numerical image is excluded) are set, and all of these main symbols are set. Is configured so that the display can be stopped, so that the mode of the hold notice can be further diversified. For example, when the upper and lower movable accessories 310 and 320 are closed and the fourth part can be visually recognized, the hold notice condition is satisfied because the main symbol has a numerical image attached, and the numerical image. It is advisable to set so that the hold notice condition is not satisfied because the main symbol is not marked with. This can contribute to further improvement in the degree of attention to the production using the movable accessory.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

In the movable accessory device 300, the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320 and 330, 340 are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction, and the main symbols stopped in the middle of the sub-display area Rs are the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320. And 330,340 shielded. As a result, the establishment of the special hold notice using the main symbol that stops in the middle stage is not only from the viewpoint of visibility of the main symbol that stops in the middle stage, but also the operation of the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320 and 330, 340. It is possible to show the player from the viewpoint as well, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize the establishment of the special hold notice.

In such a configuration, the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320 and 330, 340 are made into fan-shaped movable accessories to enhance the decorativeness as the movable accessories and to occupy the occupied area when closed (unshielded state). Has been reduced. The vertically fan-shaped upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320 and 330, 340 are arranged so that the open tips are reversed in the front-rear direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the front-rear width of the movable region of the movable accessories 310, 320 and 330, 340 while achieving the above-mentioned effects. Therefore, the distance between the display screen G and the game board 100 can be shortened, and the visibility of the display screen G can be improved.

Further, in order to enhance the shielding effect (effect of reducing visibility) of the display screen G by the movable accessory device 300, the fan surface portions 312, 322, in the situation where each movable accessory 310, 320, 330, 340 is opened. The non-fixed portions 312b, 322b, 332b, and 343b of the 332 and 342 are made non-parallel to the display screen G. As a result, the light emitted from the display screen G is refracted at the non-fixed portions 312b, 322b, 332b, 342b, and the shielding effect of the display screen G can be enhanced. As a configuration for enhancing such a shielding effect, for example, it is conceivable that each fan surface portion 312, 322, 332, 342 is formed of a non-transparent member, or is formed of a member such as Japanese paper having translucency. .. However, in the former case, there is a concern that the decorativeness of the movable accessory will be reduced, and in the latter case, it is feared that it will be difficult to guarantee the strength of the movable accessory. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each fan surface portion 312, 322, 332, 342 is semi-transparently formed of resin or the like to enhance the decorativeness and strength, and the fan surface portions are arranged as described above. It is possible to secure the shielding effect of the screen G.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, by operating the movable accessories 170 to 173 to display a plurality of symbol combinations (specifically, combinations of the same specific symbols) corresponding to a plurality of hold notices during one game round, 1 Although the configuration is such that it appears as if a plurality of hold notices have been given during the game, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is further diversified. Hereinafter, the display mode of the hold notice added in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a schematic view showing the flow of the hold notice.

There are roughly two patterns for the hold notice added in the present embodiment. Specifically, a first display pattern that displays a combination of symbols corresponding to a plurality of types (two types in the present embodiment) of hold notices at a time, and a plurality of stages (two stages in the present embodiment). A second display pattern is set to display the symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice.

When deciding which of the first display pattern and the second display pattern is to be executed, the display pattern determination table stored in the various table areas 243a of the effect control device 82 is referred to. Here, in the display pattern determination table, when the hold information that triggered the hold notice corresponds to a big hit, the second display pattern is easier to select than the first display pattern, and the hold notice is triggered. When the pending information becomes not corresponding to the jackpot, the first display pattern is set so as to be easier to select than the second display pattern. As a result, the second display pattern has a higher expectation when the hold notice is executed than the first display pattern.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where only one symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is stopped and displayed has been described, but the number of symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice displayed in one hold notice ( The more types), the higher the above expectations are set. More specifically, the expected degree is the same as the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is stopped and displayed once for each of a plurality of game times (more specifically, twice) in the above embodiment. It is set.

First, the first display pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 93 (a) → FIG. 93 (b), when the variable display of the symbol starts → ends, the combination of the “7” symbol and the “6” symbol are displayed in the main display area Rm of the display screen G. The combinations are displayed at the same time. That is, two types of symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice are displayed together. In the first display pattern, the player's expectation can be raised at once as compared with the case where only one symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is stopped and displayed. After the two types of symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice are displayed, the variable display of the symbols is started as shown in FIG. 93 (c), and the game proceeds to the next game round.

As for the second display pattern, as described with reference to FIG. 62 and the like, the hold notice is executed in two stages in one game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93 (a) → FIG. 93 (d), when the variable display of the symbol starts → ends, a combination of “8” symbols is set in the main display area Rm of the display screen G. It will be displayed. At this timing, it is possible to display another symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice by the combination of the "7" symbols that are stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs, but the sub-display area Rs is determined by the movable accessories 170 to 173. It is shielded, making it difficult to confirm the stopped symbol. That is, in FIG. 93 (d), only one symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (d) → FIG. 93 (e), the movable accessories 170, 172, and 173 operate, and the symbol stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs becomes visible. As a result, the combination of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs is displayed on the display screen G so that the combination of the “7” symbols can be visually recognized by the player. As a result, two types of symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice will be displayed. After the two types of symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice are displayed, the variable display of the symbols is started as shown in FIG. 93 (c), and the game proceeds to the next game round.

In this way, by displaying a plurality of types of symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice in the main display area Rm at once, the hold notice having a strong impact can be executed. Further, even if only one symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is stopped in the main display area Rm, a pattern that increases to two types is provided after that, and this pattern has a higher degree of expectation than the former. By setting, the player expects that the second symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is displayed, and it is possible to preferably suppress the player's expectation from dropping at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, superiority or inferiority is set for the two display patterns, but instead of using the two display patterns together in order to change the degree of expectation, the first display pattern / first display pattern / first depending on the timing of determining the hold notice. It is also possible to have a configuration in which two display patterns are selected.

For example, when a hold notice is given based on the hold information already stored at the start of the game, or when all the symbols are fluctuating at high speed, the stop mode (stop eye) of the symbols is changed (stop). It is possible to replace it. Therefore, in such a case, the first display pattern is selected. On the other hand, when the hold notice is given based on the hold information newly acquired after the start of the game round, and it is already difficult to change the stop mode (stop eye) of the symbol, the main display area. It is determined whether or not it is possible to display two symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice on the entire display screen G including Rm and the sub-display area Rs, and if the result of the determination is affirmative. , Select the second display pattern.

In this way, if the first display pattern / second display pattern is selected according to the start trigger of the hold notice, which hold information is likely to win the jackpot from the contents of the hold notice is determined. A game of predicting is added, which can contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game.

<9th embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, the configuration in which the degree of expectation of a jackpot result after that differs depending on the suspension mode of the hold notice has been described. Here, in the fourth embodiment, a part of the configuration in which the outline of the production is simplified and shown will be supplementarily described based on its technical significance.

As described above, the hold notice as the "special notice" is set with the first hold notice, the second hold notice, and the third hold notice having different expectations that result in a big hit. The first to third hold notices are common in that they are executed by stopping the same notice-corresponding symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and making the symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice visible to the player. However, the stop area (spraying range) of the symbol combination is different. Then, the degree of expectation that the jackpot result will be obtained after that is set to be different depending on this stop area. That is, even when the hold notice is given by the same symbol combination, the degree of expectation differs depending on the degree of scattering of the symbols forming the symbol combination.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 94, the first hold notice is an effect in which the hold notice is established by the combination of only the main symbols stopped in the main display area Rm. The spraying range of the symbol combination corresponding to the first hold notice remains within the main display area Rm.

In the second hold notice, the symbols corresponding to the second hold notice are scattered over a wider area than the symbols corresponding to the first hold notice. Specifically, a symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is configured by a symbol that stops in the main display area Rm and a symbol that stops in one of the sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2 on the left and right. That is, the spraying range of the symbol combination corresponding to the second hold notice extends not only within the main display area Rm but also over the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs2.

In the third hold notice, the symbols corresponding to the third hold notice are scattered over a wider area than the symbols corresponding to the second hold notice. Specifically, the symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is configured by the symbol that stops in the main display area Rm and the symbol that stops in both the left and right sub display areas Rs1 and Rs2. That is, the spraying range of the symbol combination corresponding to the third hold notice extends not only within the main display area Rm but also over the main display area Rm and the sub display areas Rs1 and Rs2.

If the trigger of the hold notice is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, the probability of being selected in the order of the third hold notice> the second hold notice> the first hold notice increases, and the trigger is released and the hold corresponding to the result is held. In the case of information, it is set so that the probability of being selected in the order of 1st hold notice> 2nd hold notice> 3rd hold notice is high. As a result, the degree of expectation that will result in a big hit after that is higher in the order of 3rd hold notice> 2nd hold notice> 1st hold notice. That is, for the symbol set combination corresponding to the hold notice, the jackpot result depends on how many display areas the stop area is formed, that is, the degree of scattering of the symbols forming the symbol combination. The degree of expectation is different, and the greater the degree of scattering of the symbols, the higher the degree of expectation.

In addition, in the first hold notice, the number of other symbols based on the symbol belonging to the middle symbol row as the final stop target, specifically, the number of symbol shift frames belonging to the upper symbol row is "1", and the lower symbol row The number of misaligned frames of the symbols belonging to is "0". As a result, the total number of misaligned frames of the other symbols based on the symbol belonging to the middle symbol row is "1".

In the second hold notice, the total number of other symbols based on the symbol belonging to the middle symbol row as the final stop target, more specifically, the number of symbol shift frames belonging to the upper symbol row is "2", and the lower symbol row The number of misaligned frames of the symbols belonging to is "2". As a result, the total number of misaligned frames of the other symbols based on the symbol belonging to the middle symbol row is "3".

In the third hold notice, the total number of other symbols based on the symbol belonging to the middle symbol row as the final stop target, more specifically, the number of symbol shift frames belonging to the upper symbol row is "2", and the lower symbol row The number of misaligned frames of the symbols belonging to is "4". As a result, the total number of misaligned frames of the other symbols based on the symbol belonging to the middle symbol row is "6".

In this way, with regard to the symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice, the number of misaligned frames of other symbols based on the symbol belonging to the specific symbol sequence increases, that is, the total distance between the symbols increases. , It can be said that it is configured so that the expectation of a big hit result is high.

In the game times after the hold notice is given (the game times that triggered the hold notice), various predictive effects, main effects, and the like can be executed in a wide area of the display screen G. In this case, if the player's field of view is narrowed, there is a high possibility that the effects will be overlooked even if the various effects are executed. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the configuration is such that the degree of dispersion of the symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice is increased and the degree of expectation is increased, it is possible to suitably widen the field of view of the player. It is possible to prevent the effect from being exerted well due to the occurrence of oversight.

In particular, after urging the player to broaden the field of view by the hold notice, by performing the above-mentioned predictive effect, the main effect, etc., the game will move to the subsequent game times while the effect of expanding the field of view continues. .. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably exert the above-mentioned effect.

<10th Embodiment>
The game board 100 of the game board unit 90 shown in each of the above embodiments is provided with a portion facing the display screen G of the symbol display device 161. One of the features of the present embodiment is that the movable accessory device is devised to facilitate the operation by utilizing the facing portions. Hereinafter, the movable accessory device 300X and the configuration related thereto (game board 100X) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. 95 (a) is a front view of the game board unit 90X, (b) is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit 90X, FIG. 96 (a) is a rear perspective view of the game board 100X, and FIG. 96 (b) is a game board 100X. It is the schematic which shows the relationship with the movable accessory device 300X. In FIG. 95B, for convenience of explanation, a solid line indicates that the movable accessory device 300X can be visually recognized through the game board 100X.

The main configuration of the game board 100X is the same as that of the seventh embodiment. Therefore, the description of these common configurations will be incorporated, and the differences from the seventh embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a), a decoration 125X is provided on a portion of the front portion of the game board 100X facing the display screen G. The decoration 125X improves the appearance of the game board 100X.

The decoration 125X has a matte finish (for example, shot blasting) that suppresses the straight-line transmission of light (it is translucent). By making the decoration 125X translucent and ensuring the visibility of the display screen G located behind the decoration 125X, it is possible to prevent the display screen G from becoming extremely difficult to see. That is, it is avoided that the improvement of the appearance by the decoration 125X becomes a factor that hinders the confirmation of the design or the like related to the interest of the player.

The decoration 125X has a band shape, and is arranged so as to partition the main display area and the sub display area set on the display screen G. That is, the decoration 125X is provided with a support function that facilitates the distinction between the main display area and the sub display area.

As schematically shown in FIG. 95 (b), as in the other embodiments, the movable accessory device 300X is arranged between the game board 100X and the symbol display device 161 (display screen G). .. On the back portion of the game board 100X, a guide groove 126X is formed as a "guide portion" that supports the movement of each movable accessory (the upper right movable accessory 310X is illustrated in the figure) constituting the movable accessory device 300X. (See FIG. 96 (a)).

The guide groove 126X is formed so as to extend along the decoration 125X when viewed from the front of the game machine. More specifically, the groove width of the guide groove 126X is suppressed to be smaller than the width of the decoration 125X, and is formed so as to overlap the decoration 125X as a whole. As a result, the guide groove 126X is prevented from protruding from the decoration 125X when viewed from the front of the game machine, and the guide groove 126X is hidden behind the decoration 125X.

An engaging pin 350X that engages with the guide groove 126X is projected from the rotating tip portion of the rib portion 314 (corresponding to the “movable body”) that constitutes the movable accessory 310X (see FIG. 96 (b)). ). When opening and closing the movable accessory 310X, the engaging pin 350X moves in a state of being engaged with the guide groove 126X, so that the opening and closing operation can be stably performed.

Further, when the movable accessory 310X is open, the engaging pin 350X comes into contact with the end of the guide groove 126X, so that further movement is prevented. That is, the guide groove 126X is provided with a function as a stopper for the movable accessory 310X.

Further, when the movable accessory 310X is open, the engaging pin 350X is supported by the guide groove 126X. As a result, the support function of the movable accessory 310X is strengthened.

Since the same applies to the relationship between the decoration 125X and the guide groove 126X and the movable accessories 320, 330, 340, the description will be incorporated.

As described in detail above, by adding the function of guiding the movable accessory 310X to the facing portion of the game board 100X, it is possible to stabilize the movement of the movable accessory 310X.

For example, when the movable accessory 310X is enlarged or the operating range of the movable accessory 310X is set wide, the effect using the movable accessory device 300X can be made to have an impact. It is advantageous in improving the degree of attention to. However, on the other hand, it is assumed that the movement of the movable accessory 310X tends to be unstable. As described above, the unstable movement of the movable accessory 310X causes a malfunction and a deterioration in appearance, and may be an obstacle in exerting the above effect. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences, and it is possible to suitably exert the effect function of the movable accessory device 300X.

In particular, in a configuration in which the support position (holding position) of the movable accessory 310X does not overlap with the display screen G, the movable accessory 310X is moved in front of the display screen G to move the movable accessory 310X from the support position. The position variation of the movable accessory 310X tends to be large in a distant part. In this respect, if the game board 100X has the facing portion and the guide groove 126X is provided in the facing portion, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. That is, the technical idea shown in the present embodiment is applied to the movable accessory 310X having a movable portion (such as a rib portion) that is displaced so as to have a large overlap with the display screen G depending on the situation. It can contribute to the realization of a preferable configuration in which the effect function and the like of the movable accessory device 300X can be stably exhibited.

When the movable accessory 310X is a rotation type, the blur width (for example, misalignment) at the rotation tip portion tends to be large during the operation of the movable accessory 310X. Therefore, if the guide target by the guide groove 126X is the rotating tip portion of the movable accessory 310X, the above-mentioned blurring can be suppressed and the movement of the movable accessory 310X can be suitably stabilized.

If the guide groove 126X is conspicuous when the display screen G is viewed through the facing portion of the game board 100X, the appearance of the game machine may be deteriorated. Therefore, by arranging the guide groove 126X behind the decoration 125X as a "pattern" formed on the game board 100X (opposing portion), the guide groove 126X is made inconspicuous and the above-mentioned deterioration in appearance is suppressed. be able to.

The decoration 125X is provided on the front portion of the facing portion, and the guide groove 126X is provided on the back portion of the facing portion. With such a configuration, the presence of the guide groove 126X can be prevented from becoming a factor that makes it difficult to give the decoration 125X, and the decoration 125X and the guide groove 126X can be suitably coexisted in the facing portions of the game board 100X. It will be possible.

Although the above description has been made based on the movable accessory device 300 shown in the seventh embodiment, the technical idea shown in the present embodiment is not applicable only to the movable accessory device 300. However, it can also be applied to the movable accessory device 162 shown in the first embodiment.

In this case, for example, guide rails corresponding to the movable accessories 170 to 173 are provided on the back portion of the game board 100, and a pattern such as decoration is provided on the front portion of the game board 100 at a portion overlapping the guide rails from the front of the game machine. It may be configured to give.

<11th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the movable accessory device 300 provided between the game board 100 and the symbol display device 161 is different from that of the tenth embodiment, and the game board is adapted to this. The composition of the decoration and the like given to 100 has been changed. Hereinafter, the movable accessory device 300Y and the configuration related thereto in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 (a) is a schematic view showing the relationship between the game board 100Y and the movable accessory device 300Y, and FIG. 97 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 97 (a).

As shown in FIG. 97A, in the present embodiment, the decoration 125Y is formed along the effective lines L1 to L5, and the decoration 125Y is provided with a function of teaching the effective line. In this way, by teaching the effective line by the decoration 125Y as a "pattern", it becomes difficult to distinguish between the effective line and the ineffective line in a game machine in which the effective line and the ineffective line are used together. It is suppressing.

It should be noted that the effective lines intersect with each other, and the decoration 125Y corresponding to these effective lines also intersects to form one pattern as a whole, but it is not always necessary to combine the decorations 125Y with each other. The decoration 125Y may be provided separately for each effective line.

A guide groove 126Y as a "guide portion" is formed behind the decoration 125Y corresponding to the diagonally inclined effective line L4 (downward right line) and the effective line L5 (upward right line). In the present embodiment, the movable decorative body 401Y constituting the movable accessory device 300Y is integrated with the game board 100Y via the guide groove 126Y and the like. Therefore, the movable decorative body 401Y moves along the guide groove 126Y (by its own weight) while being held by the game board 100Y, so that the movable decorative body 401Y moves diagonally across the display screen G. Since various measures have been taken for the configuration related to the movement of the movable decorative body 401Y, the details of the movement of the movable decorative body 401Y will be described later.

The movable accessory device 300Y is composed of the movable decorative body 401Y as a "movable body" provided so as to be movable, and a returning mechanism for returning the movable decorative body 401Y to the initial position. Since the movable decorative body 401Y returns to the initial position by moving along a predetermined path, it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect by the movable accessory device 300Y.

The movable decorative body 401Y is provided from a disk-shaped facing portion 402Y facing the back surface of the game board 100Y and a ridge engaging portion 403Y that is provided so as to project forward from the facing portion 402Y and engages with the guide groove 126Y. Has a base body.

A seal member 404Y as a decorative member is attached to the back surface portion (rear surface portion) of the facing portion 402Y. A pattern such as a character is given to the front surface (sticking surface) of the seal member 404Y. The base body is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the pattern given to the seal member 404Y can be visually recognized through the base body.

Stopping portions capable of stopping the movable decorative body 401Y are provided at both ends of the guide groove 126aY corresponding to the upward-sloping effective line L5 and both ends of the guide groove 126bY corresponding to the downward-sloping effective line L4.

Holders 411Y and 412Y capable of holding the movable decorative body 401Y that has reached the stop are provided on both the left and right sides of the display screen G, respectively. The holders 411Y and 412Y are configured to be switchable between a hold state in which the convex portion 405Y formed on the movable decorative body 401Y is sandwiched from behind and a release state in which the convex portion 405Y is not sandwiched.

Here, rails 413Y and 414Y are attached to the rear portions of the game board 100Y at positions on the left and right sides of the display screen G so as to connect a pair of upper and lower stopping portions. The rails 413Y and 414Y hold the holders 411Y and 412Y movably, and the holders 411Y and 412Y are allowed to move up and down along the rails 413Y and 414Y. The holders 411Y and 412Y can be moved in the vertical direction, but are not allowed to move in the horizontal direction. In FIG. 97 (b), the holders 411Y and 412Y are simulated by the two-dot chain line, but the holders 411Y and 412Y actually move to this position (the position overlapping the variable display area of the display screen G). I don't do it.

The movable decorative body 401Y moves following the holders 411Y and 412Y while being held by the holders 411Y and 412Y. In the present embodiment, a device is provided to prevent the movable decorative body 401Y from falling off from the game board 100Y during such movement.

As shown in FIG. 97A, the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y are housed in the recesses 126cY to 126fY formed on the back surface of the game board 100X, respectively. The rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y are formed with engaging grooves 421aY to 424aY that engage with the engaging portion 403Y of the movable decorative body 401Y, respectively. The movable decorative body 401Y that has reached the stop portion is stopped in a state where the base body (engaged portion 403Y) of the movable decorative body 401Y is engaged with the engaging grooves 421aY to 424aY.

The rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y are pivotally supported by the game board 100Y in a state of being rotatable about an axis extending in the thickness direction of the game board 100Y. A motor as a drive unit for rotating the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y is attached to the game board 100Y in a one-to-one correspondence with the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y. By operating these motors, the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in the recesses 126cY to 126fY.

The game board 100Y is formed with groove portions 126gY and 126hY extending in the vertical direction so as to connect the upper and lower stopping portions. The groove portions 126gY and 126hY are also formed in accordance with the engaging portion 403Y of the movable decorative body 401Y.

The rotating body 421Y has a configuration in which the engaging groove 421aY communicates with the guide groove 126aY and the groove portion 126hY communicates with each other by the rotation of the rotating body 421Y, and the rotating body 422Y rotates the rotating body 422Y. The engagement groove 422aY is switched between a state in which the engagement groove 422aY communicates with the guide groove 126aY and a state in which the engagement groove 422aY communicates with the groove portion 126gY. It is configured to switch between a state of communicating and a state of communicating with the groove portion 126gY, and the rotating body 424Y has a state in which the engaging groove 424aY communicates with the guide groove 126bY and a state of communicating with the groove portion 126hY due to the rotation of the rotating body 424Y. It is configured to switch to.

The holders 411 and 412Y are also attached to the rails 413Y and 414Y in a state of being rotatable around an axis extending in the thickness direction of the game board 100Y. When the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y rotate while the movable decorative body 401Y stopped at the stop portion is held by the holders 411Y and 412Y, the holders 411Y and 412Y also rotate accordingly. That is, even when the movable decorative body 401Y is held by the holders 411Y and 412Y, the presence of the holders 411Y and 412Y hinders the movement of the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y, that is, the change in the posture of the movable decorative body 401Y. is not it.

The game board 100Y is formed with a stopper that prevents further rotation when the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y communicate with each other in either of the above two grooves, and the rotation angle is restricted. ing. By defining the rotation position when communicating with each groove by these stoppers, it is avoided that the above-mentioned communication function, that is, the function of securing the movement path of the movable decorative body 401Y does not work well.

The drive motors for the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y and the drive motors for the holders 411Y and 412Y are connected to the effect control device 82, and operate by outputting a drive signal from the effect control device 82. Further, the movable accessory unit 400Y includes a detection sensor for detecting the movable decorative body 401Y provided at each stop portion, a detection sensor for detecting the position of the holders 411Y and 412Y, and a detection sensor for detecting the rotation position of the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y. Has a detection sensor. These various sensors are connected to the effect control device 82, and the effect control device 82 determines the stop position of the movable decorative body 401Y, the vertical position of the holders 411Y and 412Y, based on the detection information (detection signal) from these detection sensors. It is possible to grasp the rotation position of the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y.

As shown in FIG. 97A, the center frame 130Y shown in the present embodiment has a gate shape, and the movable accessory device 300Y is covered from the front of the game machine by the center frame 130Y. In this way, by hiding the movable accessory device 300Y behind the center frame 130Y and making it difficult to visually check it, the deterioration of the appearance of the game board unit 90Y is suppressed. It is also difficult to visually confirm the movable decorative body 401Y that is stopped at the stop portion. Therefore, it is difficult to know whether the movable decorative body 401Y moves from the left or right, and the impact of the movable decorative body 401Y when moving can be strengthened.

Next, the operation mode of the movable accessory device 300Y (movable decorative body 401Y) will be described with reference to the schematic view of FIG. 98. The standby position of the movable decorative body 401Y is roughly divided into a stop portion at the upper right of the display screen G and a stop portion at the upper left of the display screen G. Here, for convenience of explanation, the movement of the movable decorative body 401Y from the state where it is stopped at the stop portion on the upper right of the display screen G will be illustrated.

In a situation where the movable decorative body 401Y is waiting at the stop portion on the upper right of the display screen G, when the execution timing of the effect by the movable accessory device 300Y comes, the rotating body 421Y rotates and rotates. The engaging groove 421aY of the body 421Y is switched to a state of communicating with the guide groove 126aY. At this point, since the movable decorative body 401Y is not held by the holder 412Y, the movable decorative body 401Y moves from the engaging groove 421aY of the rotating body 421Y to the guide groove 126aY of the game board 100Y by its own weight. The movable decorative body 401Y moved to the guide groove 126aY moves from the upper right stop portion to the lower left stop portion by its own weight while being held by the game board 100Y.

After the movable decorative body 401Y waiting at the stop portion moves to the game board 100Y side, the rotating body 421Y rotates, and the engaging groove 421aY of the rotating body 421Y switches to a state of communicating with the groove portion 126hY. ..

Here, a supplementary description will be given of a configuration in which the movable decorative body 401Y is stopped (standby) at the upper right stop portion. As described above, the rotating body 421Y can switch between a state in which the engaging groove 421aY communicates with the guide groove 126aY and a state in which the engaging groove 421aY communicates with the groove portion 126hY by rotating itself. Here, in the middle of both rotation positions, the guide groove 126aY and the groove portion 126hY are not communicated with each other, and the end portion of the engaging groove 421aY faces the wall surface of the recess 126cY. That is, in this state, the wall surface of the recess 126cY functions as a stopper that prevents the movable decorative body 401Y from coming off from the engaging groove 421aY. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y is maintained in a state of being stopped at the stop portion without flowing into either the guide groove 126aY or the groove portion 126hY.

The movable decorative body 401Y that has flowed into the guide groove 126aY flows down along the guide groove 126aY. However, the guide groove 126aY intersects the guide groove 126bY at an intermediate position thereof, and the guide groove 126aY is partially cut off. However, the engaging portion 403Y of the movable decorative body 401Y is formed to be sufficiently longer than this cutting distance. Therefore, when the movable decorative body 401Y arrives at the above-mentioned shredded portion, the engaging portion 403Y and the guide groove 126aY are engaged so as to straddle the shredded portion, and the existence of the shredded portion is movable. It is avoided that it becomes a factor that hinders the movement of the decorative body 401Y.

When the movable decorative body 401Y is waiting at the upper right stop portion, the rotating body 422Y of the lower left stop portion is waiting at a position where the engaging groove 422aY of the rotating body 422Y communicates with the guide groove 126aY. There is. Therefore, the movable decorative body 401Y that has moved along the guide groove 126aY moves from the game board 100Y to the rotating body 422Y. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y is hidden behind the center frame 130Y and is out of the player's field of view.

After the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the rotating body 422Y, it is sandwiched by the holder 411Y arranged at the bottom of the rail 413Y. After that, the rotating body 422Y rotates, and the engaging groove 422aY of the rotating body 422Y is switched to a state in which the engaging groove 422aY communicates with the groove portion 126gY.

In this way, after the posture of the movable decorative body 401Y is changed and the movement path to the upper side is secured, the holder 411Y rises along the rail 413Y. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y moves toward the upper left stop. Also in this case, since the movable decorative body 401Y moves behind the center frame 130Y, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable decorative body 401Y from being visually recognized by the player.

After the movable decorative body 401Y waiting at the stop portion moves from the rotating body 422Y to the game board 100Y side, the rotating body 422Y rotates, and the engaging groove 422aY of the rotating body 422Y communicates with the guide groove 126aY. Switch to the state of

Here, with respect to the rotating body 423Y constituting the upper left stop portion, the engaging groove 423aY of the rotating body 423Y is in a state of communicating with the groove portion 126gY. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y lifted by the holder 411Y reaches the upper left stop.

As described above, the rotating body 423Y can be switched between a state in which the engaging groove 423aY communicates with the guide groove 126bY and a state in which the engaging groove 423aY communicates with the groove portion 126gY by rotating itself. Here, in the middle of both rotation positions, the guide groove 126bY and the groove portion 126gY are not communicated with each other, and the end portion of the engagement groove 423aY faces the wall surface of the recess 126eY. That is, in this state, the wall surface of the recess 126eY functions as a stopper that prevents the movable decorative body 401Y from coming off from the engaging groove 423aY. After the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the upper left stop portion, the rotating body 423Y rotates, and in this state, the movable decorative body 401Y does not flow into either the guide groove 126bY or the groove portion 126gY. , It will be maintained in the state of being stopped at the stop. Along with this, the holding of the movable decorative body 401Y by the holder 411Y is released, and the holder 411Y returns to the lowermost position of the rail 413Y.

In a situation where the movable decorative body 401Y is waiting at the stop portion on the upper left of the display screen G, when the execution timing of the effect by the movable accessory device 300Y comes, the rotating body 423Y rotates and rotates. The engaging groove 423aY of the body 423Y is switched to a state of communicating with the guide groove 126bY. At this point, since the movable decorative body 401Y is not held by the holder 411Y, the movable decorative body 401Y moves from the engaging groove 423aY of the rotating body 423Y to the guide groove 126bY of the game board 100Y by its own weight. The movable decorative body 401Y moved to the guide groove 126bY moves from the upper left stop portion to the lower right stop portion by its own weight while being held by the game board 100Y.

After the movable decorative body 401Y waiting at the stop portion moves to the game board 100Y side, the rotating body 423Y rotates, and the engaging groove 423aY of the rotating body 423Y switches to a state of communicating with the groove portion 126gY. ..

The movable decorative body 401Y that has flowed into the guide groove 126bY flows down along the guide groove 126bY. However, the guide groove 126bY intersects the guide groove 126aY at an intermediate position thereof, and the guide groove 126bY is partially cut off. However, the engaging portion 403Y of the movable decorative body 401Y is formed to be sufficiently longer than this cutting distance. Therefore, when the movable decorative body 401Y arrives at the above-mentioned shredded portion, the engaging portion 403Y and the guide groove 126bY are engaged so as to straddle the shredded portion, and the existence of the shredded portion is movable. It is avoided that it becomes a factor that hinders the movement of the decorative body 401Y.

When the movable decorative body 401Y is waiting at the upper left stop portion, the rotating body 424Y of the lower right stop portion waits at a position where the engaging groove 424aY of the rotating body 424Y communicates with the guide groove 126bY. ing. Therefore, the movable decorative body 401Y that has moved along the guide groove 126bY moves from the game board 100Y to the rotating body 424Y. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y is hidden behind the center frame 130Y and is out of the player's field of view.

After the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the rotating body 424Y, it is sandwiched by the holder 412Y arranged at the lowermost part of the rail 414Y. After that, the rotating body 424Y rotates, and the engaging groove 424aY of the rotating body 424Y is switched to a state in which the engaging groove 424aY communicates with the groove portion 126hY.

In this way, after the posture of the movable decorative body 401Y is changed and the movement path to the upper side is secured, the holder 412Y rises along the rail 414Y. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y moves toward the upper right stop portion. Also in this case, since the movable decorative body 401Y moves behind the center frame 130Y, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable decorative body 401Y from being visually recognized by the player.

After the movable decorative body 401Y waiting at the stop portion moves from the rotating body 424Y to the game board 100Y side, the rotating body 424Y rotates, and the engaging groove 424aY of the rotating body 424Y communicates with the guide groove 126bY. Switch to the state of

Here, with respect to the rotating body 421Y constituting the upper right stop portion, the engaging groove 421aY of the rotating body 421Y is in a state of communicating with the groove portion 126hY. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y lifted by the holder 411Y reaches the upper left stop.

After the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the rotating body 421Y, the rotating body 421Y rotates to the intermediate position, and the end portion of the engaging groove 423aY faces the wall surface of the recess 126eY. In this state, the wall surface of the recess 126eY functions as a stopper for preventing the movable decorative body 401Y from coming off from the engaging groove 423aY, and the movable decorative body 401Y flows into both the guide groove 126bY and the groove portion 126gY. It will be maintained in a state of being stopped at the stop without any problem. Along with this, the holding of the movable decorative body 401Y by the holder 412Y is released, and the holder 412Y returns to the lowermost position of the rail 414Y.

The relationship between the operation of the movable accessory device 300Y described in detail above and the display effect executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 161 will be described. In the present embodiment, the first type accessory interlocking effect and the second type accessory interlocking effect are set as the effect peculiar to the present embodiment.

The first-class accessory-linked effect is a so-called notice effect, and has a configuration that can be selected when suggesting a reach line with a high expectation of becoming a big hit before shifting to the reach variation display. Specifically, when the type 1 accessory interlocking effect is selected in the game in which the reach effect is executed, the movable decorative body 401Y can pass through either the effective line L4 or the effective line L5. The presence is grasped, and the stop mode of the pattern is determined so that the reach line is formed by the grasped effective line.

When the game times correspond to the jackpot result, the stop mode of the symbol is set so that the effective line at which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped coincides with the line where the movable decorative body 401Y moves. The configuration may be determined, and the type 1 accessory interlocking effect may be a definite effect in which the jackpot is confirmed.

The second type accessory interlocking effect is a so-called chance-up effect, and is selected when suggesting a reach line with a high expectation of becoming a big hit after shifting to the reach variation display. Specifically, when the second type accessory interlocking effect is selected in the game in which the reach effect is executed, the movable decorative body 401Y can pass through either the effective line L4 or the effective line L5. Know if there is. When it is determined that the grasped effective line and the effective line corresponding to the jackpot are matched, the movable decorative body 401Y is operated by referring to the effect determination table for matching. If it is determined whether or not the effective line that has been grasped and the effective line that is stopped and displayed do not match the combination of the symbols corresponding to the jackpot, refer to the effect determination table for non-matching. It is determined whether or not to operate the movable decorative body 401Y.

The effect determination table for matching is set so that the number of cases where the movable decorative body 401Y is operated is larger than the case where the movable decorative body 401Y is not operated. On the other hand, the effect determination table for disagreement is set so that the number of cases in which the movable decorative body 401Y is operated is smaller than that in the case where the movable decorative body 401Y is not operated. As a result, the degree of expectation that a big hit will occur when the movable decorative body 401Y operates is adjusted to be higher than when the movable decorative body 401Y does not operate.

In the present embodiment, the guide groove 126Y is camouflaged by the decoration 125Y that teaches the effective line, and the decoration 125Y and the guide groove 126Y can be preferably coexisted.

The movable decorative body 401Y crosses the front of the display screen G in a state of being held by the guide grooves 126aY and 126bY of the game board 100Y. At this time, the arm or the like that supports the movable decorative body 401Y does not project to a position where it overlaps with the display screen G, and the appearance of the effect using the movable decorative body 401Y can be suitably improved.

A plurality of routes for the movable decorative body 401Y to cross the front of the display screen G are set, and the player can be made to predict which route the movable decorative body 401Y will fall along, and the movable accessory device 300Y is used. It is possible to suppress the production from becoming monotonous.

Further, the movement path of the movable decorative body 401Y has a shape (figure 8) that can be traced with a single stroke, and the movable decorative body 401Y can be used repeatedly. The configuration used to move the movable decorative body 401Y from the lower stop to the upper stop is hidden behind the center frame 130Y, so the presence of the movable accessory device 300Y makes the gaming machine look good. Can be suitably suppressed from decreasing.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or may be partially or wholly applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol to be stopped is always displayed in the sub-display area Rs as the "second area", but the sub-display area Rs is at least as a "switching means". It suffices if the symbol is displayed when various effects such as the hold notice effect are executed in association with the movement of the movable accessories 170 to 173 and the like. That is, when those effects are not executed, the symbols displayed in the sub-display area Rs may be hidden.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the symbols displayed in the sub-display area Rs are shielded by movable accessories 170 to 173 or the like as "switching means", but the visibility of these symbols is relative. It suffices if it is possible to switch between a high state and a low state, and it is not always necessary that a shielding function is provided.

For example, the movable accessories 170 to 173 and the like are made translucent or opaque so that the symbols displayed in the sub-display area Rs are not visually invisible, but are difficult to see through the movable accessories 170 to 173. You may.

(3) It suffices as long as it is possible to change the visibility of the symbol stopped in the sub-display area Rs, and it is not always necessary to make the "switching means" movable.

For example, in the game board 100, a transmissive liquid crystal or the like is mounted on a portion overlapping the sub-display area Rs in the front-rear direction, and the visibility of the sub-display area Rs is changed by changing the display mode of the transmissive liquid crystal (visual approval / non-visualization). It is also possible to configure it.

Further, focusing on the point that the visibility of the symbol stopped in the sub-display area Rs is changed by the movable movable accessory 170 to 173 or the like, for example, the configuration corresponding to the movable accessory is displayed / hidden on the display screen G. The visibility of the symbol in the sub-display area Rs may be changed by adopting the configuration (a configuration in which a movable accessory is simulated and displayed).

(4) A part of the main symbol that is stopped and displayed rearward when the movable accessory 170 to 173 or the like as the "switching means" is arranged at the shielded position (the first portion P1 in the seventh embodiment). ) Is covered so that it can be seen from the front, but it may be configured to cover the entire main symbol that is stopped and displayed at the rear so that it cannot be seen.

(5) Effective lines L1 to L5 and ineffective lines L6 to L11 are provided as lines at which each symbol stops, but it is necessary to distinguish each line L1 to L11 at which a symbol can stop as an effective line and an ineffective line. It is not always necessary, and it is possible to use the ineffective lines L6 to L11 as effective lines. In this case, for example, the movable accessories 170 to 173 are operated so as to straddle both the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs, or when the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed in the sub display area Rs. By clearly indicating the combination of the symbols, it is possible to notify that the jackpot has been won. By the way, in such a configuration, it is arbitrary whether or not to perform the re-variation effect of the above-mentioned symbols, and further, when the re-variation effect is performed, a line for stopping the combination of the symbols corresponding to the jackpot is provided. Whether or not to change it is also optional.

For example, when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained, the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed in the sub-display area Rs so as to straddle both the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs. It is also possible to re-variate the symbol so that the main display area Rm displays the combination of the symbols corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result to perform the re-variation effect. Regarding the re-variation effect, the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed in the main display area Rm so as to straddle both the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs, or in the sub display area Rs. By configuring the configuration so that it is more likely to occur when the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed, more specifically, the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed in the main display area Rm. <When the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed so as to straddle both the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs <The combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed in the sub display area Rs. By adopting a configuration in which the possibility of occurrence is high in the order of the cases, the player's expectation is quickly lowered even when the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is not displayed in the main display area Rm. It can be suitably suppressed.

(6) The symbol display mode (that is, the type of each symbol, the symbol arrangement, the variable display mode, the reach display mode, the execution mode of the hold notice, etc.) in the symbol display device 161 as the "picture display means" is as described above. It is not limited to that of the embodiment, and various changes can be made without departing from the gist shown in each embodiment.

For example, the scroll display direction of the symbol sequence is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction. Further, the number of symbol rows is not limited to three, and may be four or more rows or two rows. Furthermore, it is not necessary to set a plurality of effective lines, and at least one is sufficient.

By the way, on the display screen G, it is not always necessary to scroll the symbol string in a predetermined direction, and the symbol displayed at the predetermined position disappears and the next symbol is displayed, so that the symbol is replaced. It can also be an aspect. In this case, although the concept of the moving direction of the symbol disappears, the playability of predicting the variation display pattern of the symbol is guaranteed by giving a certain regularity to the mode of change.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, when the symbol corresponding to the jackpot result is finally stopped in the situation where the reach display is performed, the more it stops downstream from the reach line, the later it reappears. The configuration is such that there is a high possibility that it will fluctuate and result in a big hit, but at least it is sufficient if it is set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit increases as the degree of separation of the symbol from the reach line increases. The distance direction is not limited to the downstream direction. It may be set so that the expectation of a big hit is high when the vehicle stops in the upstream direction. Further, these two configurations may be combined so that when the symbol stops, the degree of expectation of a big hit increases depending on the degree of separation from the reach line to the upstream side or the downstream side.

According to the modification, when the reach is displayed, the player first expects that the predetermined symbol stops at a position far away, and if not, the predetermined symbol is displayed on the reach line. It is expected that it will stop, and if it passes the reach line, it will be expected that a predetermined symbol will stop far away from the reach line. Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain the player's expectation during the reach display, and it is possible to contribute to further improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

(8) If the expectation of a big hit differs depending on the stop mode of the symbol related to the reach display, it is not always necessary to make a big hit during the game round by re-variation. For example, it is possible to set the effect as a hold notice effect (look-ahead effect) so that when a big hit is won in a later game round, a reach display that greatly deviates can be easily selected.

Further, in such a configuration, when the reach display (for example, normal reach) is performed, if the execution condition of the hold notice is satisfied, the stop mode of the middle symbol row is changed (symbol replacement or scrolling). It is possible to increase the chances that the hold notice will be executed. Since such a hold notice can be realized by changing only the symbol that finally stops without having to change all of the variable display modes of the symbols, even if the hold notice is interrupted during the game round, it can be realized. As a result, the control load does not increase extremely.

It should be noted that, if the above-mentioned stop stitch is changed on the condition that the discriminating power is low and the high-speed fluctuation is in progress, the occurrence of discomfort due to the interruption of the above-mentioned hold notice can be suitably suppressed.

(9) For example, it is assumed that new hold information may be acquired between the start of the game round and the final confirmation display of the game result, and the game round being executed based on such hold information. The execution condition of the hold notice is set to the configuration in which the hold notice is given (the timing for determining whether or not the hold notice is executed by displaying the combination of symbols (for example, the hold notice) is set as the timing after the start of the game). However, by adding the following conditions when the execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to more preferably execute the advance notice effect.

For example, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly acquired and the hold notice is executed based on this hold information, the combination of the final stopped symbols determined at the start of the game round is grasped and this grasp is performed. Based on the information obtained, it is determined whether or not there is a combination of symbols corresponding to the hold notice that has a high degree of scatter corresponding to a combination with a high degree of expectation. Then, if there is a thing with a large degree of scattering, the hold notice is given, and if there is no thing with a large degree of scattering, it is determined whether or not a thing with a large degree of scattering can be formed by replacing the stop symbol. If the replacement is possible, the suspension notice may be given based on the replacement.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the lottery for generating the hold notice (hold notice setting process) is performed by the effect control device 82, but this may be executed by the main control device 81. In this case, by configuring the command to be output from the main control device 81 when the hold notice is won, the number of command outputs can be reduced as compared with the above configuration in which the command is output each time the hold information is acquired.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of operating ports 115 may be provided. In this case, the plurality of operating ports may be configured to have superiority or inferiority in the execution frequency and the degree of expectation of the hold notice.

For example, when two operating ports are provided, the holding information based on the winning of the other operating port is more the holding information based on the winning of the other operating port than the holding information based on the winning of one operating port. Occurrence of hold notice The configuration may be such that it is easy to win the lottery. Further, the hold information based on the winning of the other operating port is easier to win the special holding notice lottery process by the effect control device 82 than the holding information based on the winning of one operating port (the special holding notice is executed). (Easy) may be configured. Furthermore, it is more effective when the hold information based on the winning of one operating port is the information corresponding to the jackpot result than when the holding information based on the winning of the other operating port is the information corresponding to the jackpot result. The configuration may be such that it is easy to win a lottery for generating a hold notice or a special hold notice lottery by the control device 82.

In these configurations, if an electric accessory is provided for one of the operating ports, a prize is likely to occur in the operating port provided with the electric accessory in the high frequency support mode. The notice (special hold notice) is easily executed, and the execution frequency of these hold notices (special hold notice) can be changed without changing the winning probability of the lottery for generating the hold notice (special hold notice). As a result, it is possible to add inflection to the production and improve the interest.

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the ineffective alignment effect or revariation effect and the special hold notice may be established at the same time. Specifically, for example, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are set to a stop mode in which the cross line reach occurs on the ineffective line, and in the stop mode of the cross line reach, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped at one reach line. This is an ineffective alignment effect, and the symbol forming the other reach line is stopped in another area of the middle symbol row Z2 to stop the special hold notice by the symbol forming the other reach line. .. Then, after the variation display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is completed, the symbol of the line on which the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is formed can be visually recognized to perform a re-variation effect, or a symbol combination that serves as a special hold notice is formed. A special hold notice may be given so that the design on the side of the player can be visually recognized (in this case, the other is an ineffective alignment effect). According to this configuration, if it is a re-variation effect, it will be a big hit result in the game times, and even if it is not a re-variation effect, it may be a special hold notice, and for both this time and the next and subsequent game times It is possible to have a sense of expectation.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 81 determines the variation display time, and the effect control device 82 determines various effects in response to the variation display time. The device 81 may be configured to determine the variable display time and various effects, or the effect control device 82 may be configured to determine the variable display time and various effects. In these cases, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the variable display time may be determined first and various effects may be determined in accordance with the variable display time, or the various effects may be determined and then determined. The variable display time may be determined according to the effect.

(14) In the first to third embodiments, based on the fact that the notice condition is satisfied during the execution of the variation display, the hold notice is executed in the game times during which the variation display is being executed. However, it may be changed as follows. That is, instead of or in addition to the above configuration, the hold notice by the non-specific symbol is changed to the hold notice by the specific symbol based on the fact that the notice condition is satisfied in the game round in which the hold notice is executed with the non-specific symbol as the notice corresponding symbol. It may be configured to determine whether or not it can be changed, and if it can be changed, change it to a hold notice with a specific symbol.

More specifically, when the notice condition of the hold notice by the specific symbol is satisfied in the game time for executing the hold notice by the non-specific symbol, that is, based on the hold information corresponding to the out-of-reach by the non-specific symbol, for example. When the notice condition is satisfied and the hold information corresponding to the probability change jackpot result is acquired at the timing before the hold information corresponding to the out-of-reach is subject to the hit / fail judgment, the hold notice by the non-specific symbol is specified. It will be changed as a hold notice by the design. Further, when executing the hold notice by the non-specific symbol, the stop mode corresponding to the duplicate notice in the third embodiment is configured to be selectable, and the non-specific symbol among the stop modes corresponding to the duplicate notice is provided. The movable accessory is operated so as to establish only the hold notice of. Then, when the stop mode corresponding to the duplicate notice is selected in the game round for executing the hold notice by the non-specific symbol, the movable accessory to be operated by changing to the hold notice by the specific symbol is changed, and the non-specific symbol is not used. A configuration may be configured in which the hold notice of the specific symbol is established without establishing the hold notice of the specific symbol.

According to the modification, it is possible to change from the hold notice by the non-specific symbol to the hold notice by the specific symbol without changing the stop symbol, and even after the variation display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is completed. It is possible to easily change the design that is the target of this hold notice.

In addition, as the stop mode of each symbol on the display screen G, there is a stop mode of the hold notice (normal hold notice) using only the symbols that stop in the main display area Rm, and a symbol that stops in the sub display area Rs. It includes a mode of suspension of the including hold notice (special hold notice). For example, the mode in which the main symbol with "6" in the upper row of the middle line L2, the middle row of the left line L1 and the lower row is stopped is a normal hold notice stop mode by a non-specific symbol. In this case, the main symbol with "7" in the upper row of the left ineffective line L9, the middle row of the right line L3, and the lower row is stopped, and the special hold notice is stopped by the specific symbol. A stop mode such as in a game in which a non-specific symbol is given a hold notice is selected, and when the notice condition by a specific symbol is satisfied during the execution of the game, the hold notice of the game is usually given. It may be configured to change from the hold notice to the special hold notice.

(15) Regarding the stage effect shown in the third embodiment, the number of steps can be arbitrarily changed, but the upper limit of the number of steps is preferably within the upper limit of the number of hold + 1. .. It should be noted that the staged effect is not an essential configuration, and it is possible to remove the staged effect from the hold notice.

(16) In a configuration in which a plurality of hold notices are executed without changing the stop result in one game as in the third embodiment, the movable accessory 170 to 173 constitutes the hold notice. The configuration that shields the symbol of is not an essential configuration requirement. That is, for example, in the main display area Rm, the stop results corresponding to the plurality of hold notices may be visibly displayed as the stop result of one game round, whereby the plurality of hold notices may be established.

(17) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the development point may be set also on the variable base side of the reach line. In this case, since the development points in one reach line are more diverse than those in the fifth embodiment, it is difficult to limit the presence or absence of development from the reach line to the super reach display.

(18) In the fifth embodiment, the expectation of the jackpot result increases as the development point from the normal reach display to the super reach display moves away from the reach line. However, if the reach symbol moves away from the reach line, The farther away, the higher the development rate to the super reach display may be.

(19) In the sixth embodiment, the movable accessories 170 to 173 are moved from the shielded position to the non-shielded position based on the detection results of the detection sensors 136a and 136b, but the movable accessory 170 to 173 is shielded from the non-shielded position. It may be configured to move to a position. That is, the movable accessories 170 to 173 may be arranged in the non-shielded position instead of the shielded position in the normal state, and may be moved from the non-shielded position to the shielded position based on the detection results of the detection sensors 136a and 136b. For example, by moving the movable accessory 170 to 173 to the shielding position when the game ball passes through the back side ball passage 143, the passing game ball and the movable accessory 170 to 173 arranged behind it are configured. The movement of the game ball can be emphasized by the contrast with.

(20) In the seventh embodiment, the superposition of the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320, 330, 340 may be reversed. That is, in the seventh embodiment, the upper movable accessories 310 and 330 have the posterior ribs 314b and 334b as the open tip side, and the lower movable accessories 320 and 340 have the anterior ribs 324a and 344a. Although it is set to the open tip side, the anterior ribs 314a and 334a of the upper movable accessories 310 and 330 are set to the open tip side, and the posterior ribs 324b and 344b of the lower movable accessories 320 and 340 are set to the open tip side. May be good.

(21) In the tenth and eleventh embodiments described above, the decoration 125 as a "predetermined pattern" is formed by processing the surface of the game board 100, but how is the "predetermined pattern" formed? It is optional to provide it. For example, a sticker or the like may be attached to form a pattern. Further, a light emitting portion provided on the outer peripheral portion of the game board 100 and a light guide portion for guiding the light from the light emitting portion to the light emitting region formed on the game board 100 are provided, and the above-mentioned "predetermined" is provided by the light emitting region. The pattern may be displayed.

Further, the "predetermined pattern" may be configured to overlap the guide groove 126 as the "guide portion" in the front-rear direction, and the arrangement location is not limited to the front portion of the game board 100. For example, it can be arranged on the back surface of the game board 100 or embedded inside the game board.

(22) In the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the concave guide groove 126 is provided as the "guide portion", but the function of guiding the movable decorative body 401 or the like as the "movable body" can be exhibited. If, the shape is not limited to concave. It is also possible to form a convex shape protruding from the back surface of the game board 100. For example, a guide rail may be provided on the back surface of the game board 100. The configuration corresponding to the "guide portion" does not need to be integrally molded with the game board 100, and a guide member (for example, a rail member) provided separately from the game board 100 is attached to the game board 100. It is also possible to do.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is configured by, for example, the same symbol combination (for example, "7" symbol x 3), but what kind of symbol combination corresponds to the hold notice. Is optional. For example, a symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice may be configured by three consecutive symbols (for example, "1" symbol, "2" symbol, and "3" symbol).

Further, although the symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is configured by using the three symbol rows, the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices if at least a plurality of symbols are combined to form a symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice, and the target can be two symbol rows.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, the movable accessory 170 to 173, 310, 320, 330, 340 and the display control device 212 are controlled by the effect control device 82 based on the command output from the main control device 81. However, instead of this, the display control device 212 controls the effect control device 82 and the movable accessory 170 to 173, 310, 320, 330, 340 based on the command output from the main control device 81. It may be configured to be used. Further, instead of the configuration in which the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, the configuration in which both the control devices 82 and 212 are provided as one sub-side control device may be used. Further, the functions of the effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 may be integrated in the main control device 81, and the functions of both the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 may be integrated in the main control device 81. May be.

(25) In the above embodiment, a so-called chance eye is formed as a "special notification" by combining symbols displayed as a stop display or a temporary stop display, but the specific mode of the "special notification" is optional. is there. For example, it may be configured to perform "special notification" by making a specific character appear. In particular, when performing special notifications for a plurality of minutes during one game, the character may appear a plurality of times or a plurality of times.

(26) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that generate a right when a ball enters and become a big hit, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and game machines such as sparrow balls.

(26) The characteristic configuration shown in the first to eleventh embodiments and the configuration shown in the other other embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
In addition, the invention described in the following feature A group states, "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a pattern display device for variablely displaying a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine. For example, when the game ball passes through the operating port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a hit state, and a variable display of the pattern is displayed. When the lottery is won, a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). Regarding the background and technology, "In recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to games. However, in the configuration of gaming machines, there are still improvements in achieving an increase in the degree of attention to games." There is room for it. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Features A1. A pattern display means (design display device 161) that variablely displays a plurality of patterns on a display screen (display screen G), and
Information acquisition means (a function to execute a winning process for a working port in the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers, and
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute the process of step S501) and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result, the privilege grant means (function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player, and
Prior to the grant determination being made by the grant determination means, or based on the grant determination being made by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is made. The stop result corresponding to the determination result of is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the above-mentioned of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing the fluctuation start processing in the main control device 81, a function of executing the fluctuation display control processing in the effect control device 82) that controls the pattern display means so that the pattern variation display is performed. In the game machine equipped
A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub display area Rs) are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means.
The game rotation control means
For each game round, based on the result of the grant determination, the stop mode determining means (for starting fluctuation in the effect control device 82) for determining the stop mode of the pattern in the game round related to the special information subject to the grant determination. Function to execute processing) and
When the variation display of the pattern is performed in each game time, the pattern is stopped in the first region and the second region in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means to end the variation display of the game times. Have the means
It is possible to switch between a first state (for example, a non-shielded state) and a second state (for example, a shielded state) in which at least a part of the pattern stopped in the second region is more difficult to see or invisible than the first state. Switching means (movable accessory device 162,300) and
It is provided with a special notification means (a function of executing an effect setting process for a hold notice in the effect control device 82) that performs a special notification (for example, a hold notice) based on the stop mode of the pattern determined by the stop mode determining means.
The stopping mode determined by the stopping mode determining means includes
The first special stop mode (stop result corresponding to the normal hold notice), which is a predetermined special stop mode by the combination of the patterns stopped in the first area, and
The second special stop mode (stop result corresponding to the special hold notice) is included, which becomes a predetermined special stop mode by the combination of the pictures including the picture to stop in the second area.
The special notification means controls the switching means to switch from the second state to the first state based on the determination by the stop mode determining means that the second special stop mode is to be used. A gaming machine characterized by having a notification switching control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1208 to S1214 in the effect control device 82) for performing the special notification.

According to the feature A1, the first area and the second area are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen, and the special notification includes the special notification by the combination of the patterns stopping in the first area (first special stop mode). , A special notification is set by a combination of patterns including a pattern that stops in the second region (second special stop mode). By diversifying the mode of stopping the special notification in this way, it is possible to suppress the special notification from becoming monotonous and contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

In particular, it is possible to switch between a first state (for example, a non-shielded state) and a second state (for example, a shielded state) in which at least a part of the pattern stopped in the second region is more difficult to see or invisible than the first state. When the switching means is provided and the special notification is performed by the second special stop mode, the switching means is controlled to switch from the second state to the first state. As described above, the special notification by the second special stop mode involves not only the combination of the patterns to be stopped and displayed on the display screen but also the state change of the switching means. In this way, when each special notification is performed, by providing a movement difference in the entire device related to the notification in the notification mode, it becomes easy to exert the effect of improving the degree of attention.

Feature A2. A pattern display means (design display device 161) that variablely displays a plurality of patterns on a display screen (display screen G), and
Information acquisition means (a function to execute a winning process for a working port in the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers, and
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute the process of step S501) and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result, the privilege grant means (function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player, and
Prior to the grant determination being made by the grant determination means, or based on the grant determination being made by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is made. The stop result corresponding to the determination result of is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the above-mentioned of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing the fluctuation start processing in the main control device 81, a function of executing the fluctuation display control processing in the effect control device 82) that controls the pattern display means so that the pattern variation display is performed. In the game machine equipped
A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub display area Rs) are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means.
The game rotation control means
For each game round, based on the result of the grant determination, the stop mode determining means (for starting fluctuation in the effect control device 82) for determining the stop mode of the pattern in the game round related to the special information subject to the grant determination. Function to execute processing) and
When the variation display of the pattern is performed in each game time, the pattern is stopped in the first region and the second region in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means to end the variation display of the game times. Have the means
It is possible to switch between a first state (for example, a non-shielded state) and a second state (for example, a shielded state) in which at least a part of the pattern stopped in the second region is more difficult to see or invisible than the first state. Switching means (movable accessory device 162,300) and
The information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination is before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. Destination identification means to be specified at the timing (function to execute confirmation processing for hold notice in the main control device 81) and
When the specific result by the prior identification means is a predetermined specific result, the prior identification means is performed in a game round that is performed before the game round related to the special information that is the specific target of the prior specific means. It is equipped with a special notification means (a function of executing the effect setting process for the effect control device 82) for performing a special notification (holding notice) corresponding to the specific result of the above.
The stopping mode determined by the stopping mode determining means includes
The first special stop mode (stop result corresponding to the normal hold notice), which is a predetermined special stop mode by the combination of the patterns stopped in the first area, and
The second special stop mode (stop result corresponding to the special hold notice) is included, which becomes a predetermined special stop mode by the combination of the pictures including the picture to stop in the second area.
The special notification means controls the switching means to switch from the second state to the first state based on the determination by the stop mode determining means that the second special stop mode is to be used. A gaming machine characterized by having a notification switching control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1208 to S1214 in the effect control device 82) for performing the special notification.

According to the feature A2, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not the target of the grant determination is the timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. May be executed in. As a result, for the player, not only the game for confirming the acquisition determination result of the acquired special information, but also the order of being the target of the assignment determination when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means. With regard to the later special information, a game of confirming or predicting the result when the grant determination is made according to the content of the special notification is added, and the game is diversified.

In addition, a first area and a second area are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen, and the special notification includes a special notification by a combination of patterns that stop in the first area (first special stop mode) and a second area. A special notification is set by a combination of patterns (second special stop mode) including a pattern that stops at. By diversifying the mode of stopping the special notification in this way, it is possible to suppress the special notification from becoming monotonous and contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

In particular, it is possible to switch between a first state (for example, a non-shielded state) and a second state (for example, a shielded state) in which at least a part of the pattern stopped in the second region is more difficult to see or invisible than the first state. When the switching means is provided and the special notification is performed by the second special stop mode, the switching means is controlled to switch from the second state to the first state. As described above, the special notification by the second special stop mode involves not only the combination of the patterns to be stopped and displayed on the display screen but also the state change of the switching means. In this way, when each special notification is performed, by providing a movement difference in the entire device related to the notification in the notification mode, it becomes easy to exert the effect of improving the degree of attention.

Feature A3. It is provided with a transition means (a function of executing the hold notice setting process in the effect control device 82) for shifting to the executable state for the special notification based on the specific result by the prior identification means being the predetermined specific result. ,
The special notification means is
When the transition means shifts to the executable state, the first region and the second region are set during the game round based on the stop mode of the current game round determined by the stop mode determining means. A grasping means for grasping a stopped pattern or a pattern to be stopped in the first region and the second region (a function of executing steps S2101, step S2403, step S2503, etc. in the effect control device 82) and
Based on the grasping result by the grasping means, a determination means (effect) for determining whether or not the stop mode of the pattern in the game round can be changed to the first special stop mode or the second special stop mode during the game round. (Functions for executing steps S2404, S2504, etc. in the control device 82) and
When it is determined by the determination means that the first special stop mode can be changed, the first special notification is executed by changing the stop mode of the pattern in the current game round to the first special stop mode. The notification means (a function of executing the process of correcting the normal hold notice in the first to third correction processes of the effect control device 82), and
When it is determined by the determination means that the second special stop mode can be changed, the stop mode of the pattern in the current game round is changed to the second special stop mode, and the switching means is changed by the notification switching control means. The second special notification means for executing the special notification by switching from the second state to the first state (in the first to third correction processes in the effect control device 82, a process of modifying the special hold notice is executed. The gaming machine according to feature A2, which is characterized by having (function) and.

According to the above configuration, there is a case where the game shifts to the executable state for special notification during the game rotation (during the variable display of the pattern), and in this case, the first special notification means or the second special notification means is used this time. Special notifications may be given during the game times. In this way, by expanding the permissible range of the acquisition timing of the special information in which the special notification can be executed, it is possible to suitably increase the chances that the special notification is executed.

In particular, in this game machine, a special notification by a combination of patterns that stop in the first area and a special notification by a combination of patterns including a pattern that stops in the second area are set. Therefore, when the state shifts to the standby state during the game round as described above, even if the stop mode of the current game round cannot be changed to the special notification by the combination of the symbols that stop in the first region, the second region is set. If a pattern to be stopped is included, there is a possibility that the special notification can be changed, and even if it is assumed that the acquisition timing of the special information is various, it is possible to preferably suppress the opportunity for the special notification to be performed.

Feature A4. When it is determined by the determination means that the special notification means can be changed to either the first special stop mode or the second special stop mode, the first special notification means is more than the special notification by the second special notification means. The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized in that it has means for giving priority to special notification by special notification means.

According to the above configuration, when the state shifts to the standby state during the game, the special notification in the first special stop mode is preferentially executed over the special notification in the second special stop mode. Here, in the case of the special notification that is the second special stop mode, not only the stop mode but also the switching control of the switching means is a condition of the special notification. It is not necessary to move the switching means when the special notification is performed in which the special notification is established only in the stop mode of the pattern. Therefore, it is possible to make changes smoothly, and it is possible to preferably suppress an increase in the processing load due to the special notification.

Feature A5. When it is determined by the determination means that the special notification means can be changed to either the first special stop mode or the second special stop mode, the second special notification means is more than the special notification by the first special notification means. The gaming machine according to feature A3 or feature A4, which comprises means for giving priority to special notification by special notification means.

According to the above configuration, when the game shifts to the executable state during the game, the special notification in the second special stop mode is preferentially executed over the special notification in the first special stop mode. .. In the case of the special notification in the second special stop mode, since the switching control of the switching means is performed, the visual impact is stronger than that in the special notification in the first special stop mode. This makes it possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A6. In the display area of the pattern on the display screen, a plurality of variable display areas (each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3) are provided so as to correspond one-to-one with a plurality of pattern rows.
The variation display mode of the pattern in the variation display region includes a high discrimination variation mode and a low discrimination variation mode in which the distinctiveness of the pattern is relatively high and low, and the high discrimination variation mode and the low discrimination mode are included. The variation mode can be switched for each variation display area.
The first special notification means and the second special notification means change the pattern of the variation display area in which the variation display is performed in the low identification variation mode among the plurality of variation display areas, thereby performing the game rotation. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A3 to A5, wherein the stop mode of the pattern in the above is changed to a stop mode corresponding to the special notification.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the stop pattern is changed during the game round to perform special notification, the pattern in the variable display area where the variable display is performed in the low identification variation mode in which the distinctiveness of the pattern is low is changed. Because it is performed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player when the pattern is changed.

Feature A7. It is provided with a transition means (a function of executing the hold notice setting process in the effect control device 82) for shifting to the executable state for the special notification based on the specific result by the prior identification means being the predetermined specific result. ,
The stop mode determining means has a configuration capable of determining the second special stop mode even in a situation where the state has not shifted to the executable state.
When the notification switching control means shifts to the executable state during the game rotation, if the stop mode of the game rotation being executed is the second special stop mode, the switching means is moved to the second state. Features A2 to feature A2 to have an in-operation switching control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2101 to S2105 in the effect control device 82) for switching to the first state from the above and executing the special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A6.

According to the above configuration, if the transition to the standby state is performed in a situation where the variation display of the game times is performed so that the stop mode is the second special stop mode, the switching means is switched from the second state to the first state. Special notification will be given. On the other hand, even in a situation where the variable display of the game times is performed so that the stop mode is the second special stop mode, if it is not set to the executable state, the switching control of the switching means is not performed and the second region is entered. The pattern to be stopped is maintained in a state where it is difficult to see or cannot be seen, and no special notification is given. That is, it is possible to change whether or not to perform the special notification depending on the subsequent situation without changing the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means at the start of the game round. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of performing special notification without changing the stop mode during the execution of the variable display of the game times.

Feature A8. The special notification means is
Based on the stop mode of the current game round determined by the stop mode determining means, the pattern stopped in the first region and the second region or the first region and the second region during the game round. A specific pattern combination corresponding to special notification by a combination of a grasping means for grasping a pattern to be stopped in an area and a pattern including a pattern to be stopped in the second area based on the grasping result of the grasping means after the start of the game round. It has a determination means for determining whether or not it can be formed.
The second notification switching control means controls the switching means to switch from the second state to the first state when it is determined by the determination means that the specific pattern combination can be formed. The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that it has a means for visually recognizing a pattern forming the specific pattern combination in the area.

In recent years, special notification (so-called look-ahead effect) corresponding to predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to the grant determination is more than the special information is subject to the grant determination. A game machine that is executed at the previous timing has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, for the player, not only the game of confirming the acquisition determination result of the acquired special information, but also the following games are added. That is, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the result of the special information when the order of being the target of the grant judgment is later is according to the content of the special notification. A game of confirming or predicting is added. As a result, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed, and the interest of the game is improved.

However, in the case of performing such a special notification, it is generally decided whether or not to perform the special notification based on the hold information stored at the start of the game round, and the special notification is related to the special notification. There may be inconveniences such as the restrictions becoming stronger and the effect of improving the interest of the special notification cannot be exerted well. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when special information is acquired after the start of the game round, there is a possibility that special notification corresponding to this special information can be executed. That is, the execution condition is relaxed as compared with the conventional look-ahead effect, and the above effect can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature A9. The feature A1 to feature A8, wherein the notification switching control means performs the switching control so that the switching means switches from the second state to the first state after the end of the variation display of the pattern. The gaming machine described in any one.

As described above, when the switching means is in the second state, the pattern stopped or stopped in the second region is difficult to see or cannot be seen. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the second special stop mode is used. Therefore, by setting the switching means to the first state after the end of the variable display of the pattern, that is, when the pattern is stopped, a special notification that is unexpected for the player is performed. In addition, according to the above configuration, there remains the expectation that special notification may be performed even after the variable display of the pattern is completed, and the attention to the game is quickly reduced after the stop display of the pattern is displayed. It can be suppressed suitably.

Feature A10. The pattern display means is configured to scroll the pattern sequence in the arrangement direction.
Any of the features A1 to A9, wherein the second region is set to include a region upstream of the first region on the display screen in the scroll direction of the pattern sequence. The game machine described in one.

According to the above configuration, the pattern that stops in the second region passes through the first region before the stop. As a player, it is possible to grasp to some extent whether or not it is in the second special stop mode before switching the switching means, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the stop pattern.

Feature A11. The pattern display means is configured to scroll the pattern sequence in the arrangement direction.
Any of the features A1 to A10, wherein the second region is set to include a region downstream of the first region on the display screen in the scroll direction of the pattern sequence. The game machine described in one.

Since the second region is located on the downstream side of the first region, it becomes difficult to grasp the pattern that stops in the second region during the fluctuation (immediately before the stop). As a result, it is possible to suppress that the player is aware that the second special stop mode is set before the switching means is switched, and the special notification can be made unexpected.

Feature A12. The pattern display means is configured to scroll the pattern sequence in the arrangement direction.
The first area and the second area on the display screen are arranged in the scroll direction of the pattern sequence.
In the pattern display means, when a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed in the first area while the pattern string is stopped and displayed, the pattern that precedes or follows the predetermined pattern in the second area. The gaming machine according to any one of feature A1 to feature A11, wherein the pattern is configured to be stopped and displayed.

According to the above configuration, since the pattern sequence is scrolled, the player stops the pattern stopped in the second area, which is difficult to see or cannot be seen by the switching means, in the first area. It can be inferred based on the pattern. That is, by paying close attention to the symbol displayed as a stop in the first area, it is possible to grasp to some extent whether or not the second special stop mode is set before switching the switching means. As a result, the degree of attention to the stop pattern can be increased.

Feature A13. The switching means
A movable body (movable accessory 170 to 173, 310, 320, which overlaps with the second region in the second state and retracts to a position not overlapping with the second region in the first state. 330,340) and
It has a drive unit (drive units 170a to 173a, 313, 323, 333, 343) for operating the movable body.
A1 to A12, wherein the notification switching control means switches between the first state and the second state by driving and controlling the driving unit to operate the movable body. The gaming machine described in any one.

When the special notification by the second special stop mode is executed, the movable body operates to change the visibility of the pattern. By making the special notification an effect that involves the movement of the movable body, it becomes easier to attract the attention of the player, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the special notification.

Feature A14. A pattern display means (design display device 161) that variablely displays a plurality of patterns on a display screen (display screen G), and
Information acquisition means (a function to execute a winning process for a working port in the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers, and
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute the process of step S501) and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result, the privilege grant means (function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player, and
Prior to the grant determination being made by the grant determination means, or based on the grant determination being made by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is made. The stop result corresponding to the determination result of is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the above-mentioned of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing the fluctuation start processing in the main control device 81, a function of executing the fluctuation display control processing in the effect control device 82) that controls the pattern display means so that the pattern variation display is performed. In the game machine equipped
A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub display area Rs) are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means.
The game rotation control means
For each game round, based on the result of the grant determination, the stop mode determining means (for starting fluctuation in the effect control device 82) for determining the stop mode of the pattern in the game round related to the special information subject to the grant determination. Function to execute processing) and
When the variation display of the pattern is performed in each game time, the pattern is stopped in at least the first region of the first region and the second region in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means, and the game round. Have a means to end the variable display of
Switching means (movable accessory device 162,) capable of switching between a first state (for example, a non-shielded state) and a second state (for example, a shielded state) in which the second region is harder to see or invisible than the first state. 300) and
It is provided with a special notification means (a function of executing an effect setting process for a hold notice in the effect control device 82) that performs a special notification (for example, a hold notice) based on the stop mode of the pattern determined by the stop mode determining means.
The stopping mode determined by the stopping mode determining means includes
The first special stop mode (stop result corresponding to the normal hold notice), which is a special stop mode depending on the combination of the patterns displayed in the first area, and
The second special stop mode (stop result corresponding to the special hold notice) is included, which is a predetermined special stop mode by the combination of the pictures including the picture to be stopped and displayed in the second area.
The special notification means controls the switching means to switch from the second state to the first state based on the determination by the stop mode determining means that the second special stop mode is to be used. A gaming machine characterized by having a notification switching control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1208 to S1214 in the effect control device 82) for performing the special notification.

According to the feature A13, the first area and the second area are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen, and the special notification includes the special notification by the combination of the patterns stopping in the first area (first special stop mode). , A special notification is set by a combination of patterns including a pattern that stops in the second region (second special stop mode). By diversifying the mode of stopping the special notification in this way, it is possible to suppress the special notification from becoming monotonous and contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

In particular, it is possible to switch between a first state (for example, a non-shielded state) and a second state (for example, a shielded state) in which at least a part of the pattern stopped in the second region is more difficult to see or invisible than the first state. When the switching means is provided and the special notification is performed by the second special stop mode, the switching means is controlled to switch from the second state to the first state. As described above, the special notification by the second special stop mode involves not only the combination of the patterns to be stopped and displayed on the display screen but also the state change of the switching means. In this way, when each special notification is performed, by providing a movement difference in the entire device related to the notification in the notification mode, it is easy to exert the effect of improving the degree of attention.

In the configuration shown in this feature, when the special notification related to the second region is performed, the design may be always displayed in the second area, or the design may be hidden before the special notification is performed. → It may be configured to be displayed.

Feature A15. A pattern display means (design display device 161) that variablely displays a plurality of patterns on a display screen (display screen G), and
Information acquisition means (a function to execute a winning process for a working port in the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers, and
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute the process of step S501) and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result, the privilege grant means (function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player, and
Prior to the grant determination being made by the grant determination means, or based on the grant determination being made by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is made. The stop result corresponding to the determination result of is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the above-mentioned of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing the fluctuation start processing in the main control device 81, a function of executing the fluctuation display control processing in the effect control device 82) that controls the pattern display means so that the pattern variation display is performed. In the game machine equipped
A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub display area Rs) are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means.
The game rotation control means
For each game round, based on the result of the grant determination, the stop mode determining means (for starting fluctuation in the effect control device 82) for determining the stop mode of the pattern in the game round related to the special information subject to the grant determination. Function to execute processing) and
When the variation display of the pattern is performed in each game time, the pattern is stopped in the first region and the second region in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means to end the variation display of the game times. Have the means
Switching between the first state (unshielded state) and the second state (shielded state) in which at least a part of the pattern stopped in the second region is more difficult to see or invisible than the first state. Means (movable accessory device 162,300) and
It is provided with a special notification means (a function of executing an effect setting process for a hold notice in the effect control device 82) that performs a special notification (for example, a hold notice) based on the stop mode of the pattern determined by the stop mode determining means.
The special notification means is
Based on the stop mode of the current game round determined by the stop mode determining means, the pattern stopped in the first region and the second region or the first region and the second region during the game round. A grasping means to grasp the pattern to be stopped in the area,
After the start of the game round, a determination means for determining whether or not a specific pattern combination corresponding to the special notification can be formed by a combination of patterns including a pattern that stops in the second region based on the grasping result of the grasping means. When,
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific pattern combination can be formed, the switching means is controlled to switch from the second state to the first state to switch the specific pattern combination in the second region. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a switching control means for notification that makes it possible to visually recognize the pattern forming the above.

In recent years, special notification (so-called look-ahead effect) corresponding to predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to the grant determination is more than the special information is subject to the grant determination. A game machine that is executed at the previous timing has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, for the player, not only the game of confirming the acquisition determination result of the acquired special information, but also the following games are added. That is, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the result of the special information when the order of being the target of the grant judgment is later is according to the content of the special notification. A game of confirming or predicting is added. As a result, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed, and the interest of the game is improved.

However, in the case of performing such a special notification, it is generally decided whether or not to perform the special notification based on the hold information stored at the start of the game round, and the special notification is related to the special notification. There may be inconveniences such as the restrictions becoming stronger and the effect of improving the interest of the special notification cannot be exerted well. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when special information is acquired after the start of the game round, there is a possibility that special notification corresponding to this special information can be executed. That is, the execution condition is relaxed as compared with the conventional look-ahead effect, and the above effect can be more preferably exhibited.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features A3 to A13 to the features A14 and A15.

Further, the "predetermined specific stop mode" shown in the above feature group may be any one corresponding to the stop mode determined in advance by the game rotation control means or the like, and the appearances do not necessarily have to be completely the same. For example, when there are a plurality of combination patterns and arrangement patterns of patterns in a configuration forming a so-called chance eye, that is, when a plurality of specific stop modes (chance eyes) are stored, these are collectively considered as a concept. Any "predetermined specific stop mode" may be used.

<Characteristic B group>
In addition, the invention described in the following feature B group states, "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a pattern display device for variablely displaying a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine. For example, when the game ball passes through the operating port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a hit state, and a variable display of the pattern is displayed. When the lottery is won, a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). " Regarding the background and technology, "In recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the degree of attention to games. It was made with the problem that the invention "is."

Feature B0. A pattern display means (design display device 161) that variablely displays a plurality of pattern sequences on a display screen (display screen G), and
Information acquisition means (a function to execute a winning process for a working port in the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers, and
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute the process of step S501) and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result, the privilege grant means (function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player, and
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is made. The stop result corresponding to the determination result of is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the above-mentioned of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. With game time control means (a function of executing the fluctuation start processing in the main control device 81, a function of executing the fluctuation display control processing in the effect control device 82, etc.) that controls the pattern display means so that the pattern variation display is performed. ,
The information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination is before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. Destination identification means to be specified at the timing (function to execute confirmation processing for hold notice in the main control device 81) and
When the specific result by the prior identification means is a predetermined specific result, the prior identification is performed in the game rounds that are performed before the game rounds related to the special information that is the specific target of the prior specific means. It is equipped with a special notification means (a function of executing the effect setting process for the effect control device 82) for performing a special notification (hold notice) corresponding to a specific result of the means.
The special notification means is a plurality of execution means (movable accessory device 162, 300, symbol arrangement of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, overlapping effect setting by the effect control device 82) for executing the special notification for a plurality of minutes in one game. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a function of executing processing and correction processing for duplication notice).

According to the feature B0, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not the target of the grant determination is the timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. May be executed in. That is, for the player, not only the game in which the acquired special information grant determination result is confirmed in the game times corresponding to the grant determination result, but also a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means. Is added to the game of confirming or predicting the result when the special information is subject to the grant determination according to the content of the special notification for the special information whose order is the target of the grant determination. As a result, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed.

In this feature, in particular, special notification can be executed for a plurality of minutes in one game. Therefore, for example, even if there is less special information subject to grant determination before the special information that triggered the special notification, that is, when the special notification is performed, the special information at that time is special. Even when there are few opportunities to execute the notification, it is possible to execute the special notification for a plurality of minutes in the game times corresponding to the special information to be granted and determined before the notification. This makes it possible to suitably execute the special notification regardless of the number of special information in the situation where the special notification is performed.

As described above, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature B1. A pattern display means (design display device 161) that variablely displays a plurality of pattern sequences on a display screen (display screen G), and
Information acquisition means (a function to execute a winning process for a working port in the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers, and
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute the process of step S501) and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result, the privilege grant means (function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player, and
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is made. The stop result corresponding to the determination result of is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the above-mentioned of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. With game time control means (a function of executing the fluctuation start processing in the main control device 81, a function of executing the fluctuation display control processing in the effect control device 82, etc.) that controls the pattern display means so that the pattern variation display is performed. ,
The information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination is before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. Destination identification means to be specified at the timing (function to execute confirmation processing for hold notice in the main control device 81) and
When the specific result by the prior identification means is a predetermined specific result, each pattern sequence is performed in the game rounds that are performed before the game rounds related to the special information that is the specific target of the prior identification means. A special notification means (directing) that displays a specific pattern combination consisting of a combination of the patterns constituting the above two pattern rows one by one and performs a special notification (holding notice) corresponding to the specific result of the prior identification means. (A function to execute the effect setting process for the hold notice in the control device 82).
The special notification means is a plurality of execution means (movable accessory device) that displays a plurality of the specific pattern combinations or displays a plurality of types of specific pattern combinations in one game and executes the special notification for a plurality of minutes. The gaming machine is characterized by having 162,300, a symbol arrangement of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, a function of executing a duplicate effect setting process and a duplicate notice correction process by the effect control device 82).

According to the feature B1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not the target of the grant determination is the timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. May be executed in. That is, for the player, not only the game in which the acquired special information grant determination result is confirmed in the game times corresponding to the grant determination result, but also a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means. Is added to the game of confirming or predicting the result when the special information is subject to the grant determination according to the content of the special notification for the special information whose order is the target of the grant determination. As a result, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed.

The player grasps the grant determination result of each game time based on the information (final stop result) from the pattern display means. The aspect information corresponding to the stop mode of the pattern in the pattern display means is determined by the aspect information determining means based on the grant determination result. Then, the special notification is executed in the pattern stop mode (pattern combination) in the pattern display means. By configuring the special notification by combining the patterns in this way, the player can naturally confirm the special notification if he / she tries to grasp the grant determination result of each game time. Therefore, even though the special notification is given, it is suppressed that it is overlooked.

In this feature, in particular, special notification can be executed for a plurality of minutes in one game. Therefore, for example, even if there is less special information subject to grant determination before the special information that triggered the special notification, that is, when the special notification is performed, the special information at that time is special. Even when there are few opportunities to execute the notification, it is possible to execute the special notification for a plurality of minutes in the game times corresponding to the special information to be granted and determined before the notification. This makes it possible to suitably execute the special notification regardless of the number of special information in the situation where the special notification is performed.

As described above, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature B2. The plurality of execution means is characterized in that when a plurality of the special notifications are executed, the plurality of execution means have means for executing the special notifications for a plurality of minutes without changing the combination of the patterns stopped and displayed on the display screen. The gaming machine according to the feature B1.

According to the feature B2, when displaying a plurality of specific pattern combinations, the special notification is performed while the pattern sequence stopped and displayed on the display screen is maintained as it is, that is, the pattern sequence remains stopped. By performing the special notification for a plurality of minutes, it is not necessary to repeat the stop → change → stop of the pattern sequence, and while enjoying the effect shown in the feature B1 etc., it is possible to suitably suppress the increase in the control load caused by the effect. it can.

Feature B3. The game according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the plurality of execution means have means for sharing a combination of patterns that are stopped and displayed on the display screen when a plurality of the special notifications are executed. Machine.

According to the feature B3, when executing the special notifications for a plurality of minutes, it is not necessary to change the outcome for each special notification, and it is possible to suppress an extreme increase in the processing load required for the special notifications.

In addition, for example, "the plurality of execution means has means for executing the special notification for a plurality of minutes by displaying so that a plurality or a plurality of types of the specific pattern combinations are included in one stop mode of the pattern. The effect shown in the feature B2 can be suitably exhibited by adopting the configuration of "."

Further, for example, "the game time control means has a plurality of unit displays for displaying the pattern as a stop display or a temporary stop display after the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas as the one game time. The plurality of execution means include means for executing the special notification for a plurality of minutes by displaying the specific pattern combination in the unit display, and stops at the unit display. The effect shown in the feature B3 can be suitably exhibited by the configuration of "having the same means as the combination of the displayed patterns".

Feature B4. The game time control means determines the stop mode of the pattern in the game time related to the special information subject to the grant determination based on the result of the grant determination for each game time (effect). It has a function of executing the variation start processing in the control device 82), and when the variation display of the pattern is performed at each game time, the pattern is stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means to perform the same game. It ends the variable display of the pattern at the time.
The stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means includes a special stop mode (special mode) in which a plurality of the specific pattern combinations exist.
The special notification means is a selection means (movable accessory device 162, which enables the special notification by the specific pattern combination of 1 included in the special stop mode and invalidates the special notification by the other specific pattern combination. 300, a function to execute processing during fluctuation by the effect control device 82)
The plurality of execution means is characterized in that the special notification is executed for a plurality of minutes in one game by sequentially switching the specific pattern combination valid and invalid by the selection means. The gaming machine according to any one of B3.

According to the above configuration, since the pattern combination corresponding to the specific result of the plurality of destination-specific means included in the special stop mode is sequentially enabled or disabled by the selection means, the stop result of 1 is not changed. It is possible to execute the special notification for a plurality of minutes in the game times.

For example, the stop stitch related to the special notification may be set as a special stitch in which a plurality of specific pattern combinations are mixed.

Feature B5. The selection means enables special notification by the specific pattern combination by making one of the plurality of specific pattern combinations visible, and at least of the other specific pattern combinations. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the special notification by the specific pattern combination is invalidated by making a part invisible or difficult to see.

According to the above configuration, it is easy for the player to understand whether or not the special notification is effective because it is determined whether or not the special notification is effective depending on the visual level (for example, easy / difficult) of the specific pattern combination. That is, even in a special configuration in which a plurality of special notifications are performed during one game, it is possible to preferably suppress that each special notification is not recognized well and is overlooked.

Feature B6. Movable body and
The movable body is in the first state (unshielded state) and in the second state (shielded state) in which at least a part of the specific pattern combination is difficult or invisible from the front of the game machine. Equipped with switching means (movable accessories 170 to 173, 310, 320, 330, 340) that can be switched to
The selection means controls the switching means so that the movable body is in the second state to invalidate the special notification by the specific pattern combination, and the switching means so that the movable body is in the first state. The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized in that it has means for controlling the means to enable special notification by the specific pattern combination.

According to the above configuration, the effectiveness of the special notification is determined by the change in visibility on the display screen (specifically, the change in the range that is easy to see / difficult to see). This is advantageous in helping the player's understanding and preferably exerting the notification function by the special notification. When the special notification is enabled (when executed), the movable body is switched from the second state to the first cover state, while when the special notification is disabled (when not executed), the movable body is changed to the second state. By maintaining it, the movement of the movable body can attract the player's attention. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the state (movement) of the movable body.

Feature B7. A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub display area Rs) are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means.
The game turn control means stops the picture in the first region and the second region in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means when the change display of the picture is performed in each game turn, and the game It ends the variable display of times.
The movable body covers at least a part of the pattern that stops in the second region by switching from the second state to the second state so as to be difficult to see or invisible from the front of the game machine.
The stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means includes a stop mode (stop result corresponding to the special hold notice) that becomes the special stop mode by a combination of patterns including a picture that stops in the second region. And
The special notification means controls the switching means to switch the movable body from the second state to the first state based on the determination by the stop mode determining means to make the special stop mode. The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the game machine has a means for performing the special notification.

A first area and a second area are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen, and a special notification is set in the special notification by a combination of patterns including a pattern that stops in the second area (special stop mode). For example, by using a display area (second display area) located outside the normal display area (first display area), the number of combinations of patterns that can be used for special notification increases, and the execution condition of special notification (stop of pattern) Aspects) can be suitably increased.

In particular, when the special notification is performed, the effect of improving the degree of attention can be easily exerted by providing a difference in the movement of the entire device related to the notification in the notification mode.

Feature B8. The grant response result includes the first grant response result (probability variation jackpot result) in which the first privilege is granted to the player by the privilege granting means, and the player's profit is more than the first privilege by the privilege granting means. It includes the result of the second grant (usually the jackpot result), which gives a small amount of the second special benefit.
In the special notification means, when the specific result by the prior identification means corresponds to the first grant correspondence result, the first specific symbol combination corresponding to the first grant correspondence result (stop corresponding to the hold notice by the specific symbol). The special notification is executed so as to be (result), and when the specific result by the prior identification means corresponds to the second grant correspondence result, the second specific pattern combination (non-non-assignment correspondence result) corresponds to the second grant correspondence result. It has a means to execute the special notification so as to be a stop result corresponding to the hold notice by a specific symbol).
The stop mode of the pattern determined by the stop mode determining means includes a special stop mode in which the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination are stopped.
The selection means is one in which one of the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination included in the special stop mode is valid and the other is invalid.
The plurality of execution means sequentially switch between the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination, which are valid or invalid by the selection means, in accordance with the specific result by the prior specific means, whereby the game times are described. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B4 to feature B7, characterized in that special notification is executed for a plurality of minutes.

According to the above configuration, the first specific pattern combination corresponding to the first privilege being given to the stop mode of the picture stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the second corresponding to the second privilege being given. A special stop mode in which both specific pattern combinations are stopped is included. Then, the plurality of execution means executes the special notification for a plurality of minutes by sequentially switching the validity or invalidity of the first / second specific pattern combination in the game times that is the special stop mode. In this case, the special notification is sequentially performed in response to the specific result by the prior identification means. That is, if the order corresponds to the first grant correspondence result, the player expects that the first privilege will be granted after that, and if the order corresponds to the second grant correspondence result. , The player expects that the second privilege will be granted after that. Since the second privilege is set so that the profit that the player can obtain is smaller than that of the first privilege, the player expects that the order corresponds to the first privilege, and executes a plurality of the second benefits. Attention will be paid to the order of special notification by means. This makes it possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B9. The grant response result includes the first grant response result (probability variation jackpot result) in which the first privilege is granted to the player by the privilege granting means, and the player's profit is more than the first privilege by the privilege granting means. It includes the result of the second grant (usually the jackpot result), which gives a small amount of the second special benefit.
In the special notification means, when the specific result by the prior identification means corresponds to the first grant correspondence result, the first specific symbol combination corresponding to the first grant correspondence result (stop corresponding to the hold notice by the specific symbol). The special notification is executed so as to be (result), and when the specific result by the prior identification means corresponds to the second grant correspondence result, the second specific pattern combination (non-non-assignment correspondence result) corresponds to the second grant correspondence result. It has a means to execute the special notification so as to be a stop result corresponding to the hold notice by a specific symbol).
The stop mode of the pattern determined by the stop mode determining means includes a special stop mode in which the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination are stopped.
When the special information that triggered the special notification corresponds to the second grant correspondence result, the plurality of execution means simultaneously enable the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B4 to feature B8, which comprises means.

According to the above configuration, the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination can be effective at the same time by the plurality of execution means. In this case, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which specific pattern combination corresponds to the special information that triggered the setting of the special notification state. Even though the special information that triggered the setting of the special notification state corresponds to the second grant correspondence result, the order in which the first / second specific pattern combination is valid is the first specific. Establishment of pattern combination → When the second specific pattern combination is established, the player is disappointed that the grant response result that can be expected after that has been demoted from the first grant response result to the second grant response result. It could be.

Therefore, by adopting this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by the special notification by leaving a possibility that any of the granting response results can be obtained, and a plurality of minutes in one game. It becomes possible to preferably execute the special notification.

Feature B10. Based on the fact that the execution condition of the special notification is satisfied in the situation where the variation display of the pattern is performed, the special notification means sends the special notification by the plurality of execution means in the game times during the variation display. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B9, which comprises means for executing a plurality of minutes (a function of executing a replacement process by the effect control device 82).

According to the above configuration, when the execution condition of the special notification is satisfied in the situation where the variation display of the game times is performed, the special notification is executed for a plurality of minutes in the game times in which the variation display is performed. Therefore, even if the number of special information (game times) in which the special notification can be executed is small, it is possible to suitably increase the chances of the special notification being performed. That is, it is possible to suppress that the number of times the special notification is executed is limited by the number of special information stored at the time of prior identification.

Feature B11. The game time control means determines the stop mode of the pattern in the game time related to the special information subject to the grant determination based on the result of the grant determination for each game time (effect). It has a function of executing the variation start processing in the control device 82), and when the variation display of the pattern is performed at each game time, the pattern is stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means to perform the same game. It ends the variable display of the pattern at the time.
In the plurality of execution means, the combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the stop mode of the pattern determined by the stop mode determining means includes a plurality of the specific pattern combinations or a specific combination of a plurality of types. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, characterized in that the special notification is executed based on the above.

According to the above configuration, the display for the special notification is made by utilizing the stop mode of the pattern in the game times in which the special notification for a plurality of minutes is executed. By performing the special notification using the stop mode of the pattern preset by the game time control means (stop mode determination means), it is not necessary to reset the stop mode of the pattern when executing the special notification, and the special notification can be sent. It is possible to suppress an extreme increase in the processing load at the time of performing.

In particular, in combination with the feature B7, by adding a pattern that stops in both the first region and the second region, it is possible to suitably suppress the restriction on the execution opportunity of the special notification.

Feature B12. When the execution condition of the special notification is satisfied in the situation where the variation display of the pattern is performed, the special notification means stops the pattern in the game times determined by the stop mode determining means. Judgment means for determining whether or not the special notification can be executed in the game round based on the aspect information (function of executing processes such as step S3204, step S2404, and step S2504 by the effect control device 82). Have,
When the determination means determines that the special notification cannot be executed, the plurality of execution means carry over means (effect control) for executing a plurality of the special notifications in the next and subsequent game times of the determined game times. The device 82 has a function of executing the processes of step S3301, step S3302, step S3401, and step S3402).
The gaming machine according to feature B11, wherein the stop mode determining means has means for determining a stop mode based on the information of the carry-over means in subsequent game times.

According to the above configuration, when the special notification cannot be executed, the special notification by the plurality of executing means is executed in the next and subsequent game times. As a result, it is not necessary to perform processing such as changing the stop result or the variation display time in order to execute the special notification in the game time being executed, and moreover, a plurality of minutes in one game time by a plurality of execution means. Since the special notification is performed, the special notification can be executed without reducing the number of times the special notification is executed. Further, in the subsequent game times that are the targets of the multiple notifications, the stop mode is determined based on the fact that the multiple notifications are applied. Therefore, for example, the stop mode does not correspond to the special notification, and the special notification is provided. It can be preferably avoided that it is not executed well.

Feature B13. If a plurality of special information that is the target of the grant determination is stored by the acquired information storage means before the special information that triggered the special notification, the grant determination is made before the special information. It is provided with means (a function of executing step S3104, step S3201, etc. by the effect control device 82) for limiting the special notification for the plurality of minutes by the plurality of execution means in the game times related to the target special information. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B1 to the feature B12.

If there is a plurality of special information that is the target of the grant judgment before the special information that triggered the special notification, the special notification may be given in each of the game times related to the plurality of special information. There is little need to execute special notifications for multiple minutes in the game times. Therefore, in this configuration, special notifications for a plurality of minutes by a plurality of execution means are restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the chances of performing special notifications for a plurality of minutes being unnecessarily increased, and to clarify the difference between a simple special notification and a plurality of notifications. Therefore, it is possible to guarantee a premier feeling that the special notification shown in this feature is performed.

Feature B14. When the special notification is executed, the notification mode setting means (effect control device 82) is set so that the special notification executed in the current game round is accompanied by an effect different from the special notification executed in the previous game round. (Functions for executing processes such as steps S3004 to S3008, steps S3105 to S3109), and
When the special notifications for a plurality of minutes are performed in one game by the plurality of execution means, the special notifications to be executed later in the special notifications for the plurality of minutes are accompanied by an effect different from the special notifications to be executed first. Continuous notification setting means to be set (a function of executing step S3211, step S3504, step S3609, step S3620, step S3630, etc. by the effect control device 82) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B1 to the feature B13.

According to the above configuration, the player recognizes the special notification of each game time as a so-called step-up effect that develops differently for each game time. Even when a plurality of special notifications are performed in one game by a plurality of execution means, a different effect is performed for each special game, so that the player can develop the step-up effect in each of the above game times in one game. It becomes easier to understand as (established). This makes it possible to enhance the significance of having a plurality of execution means.

Feature B15. A determination means for determining whether or not to shift to the executable state for the special notification based on the specific result by the prior identification means (a jackpot notice setting process by the effect control device 82, (Function to execute the notice setting process for disconnection) and whether or not the notification mode setting means or the continuous notification setting means is set to accompany the different special notification when the determination means shifts to the executable state. Is provided with a lottery means (a function of executing the processing of step S2809 and step S2908 by the effect control device 82).
The lottery means is set so that the probability that the specific result by the prior identification means is the grant correspondence result is higher than the case where the specific result by the prior identification means is not the grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to feature B14, which is characterized in that it is played.

According to the above configuration, if the special notification this time is accompanied by an effect different from that executed last time, it can be expected that the special information to be granted after that is the result of the grant correspondence. Therefore, the player expects that this special notification will be accompanied by a different effect from the previous special notification, that is, the special notification will be developed. Here, if the plurality of execution means shown in the feature B1 is provided, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the premise of the plurality of notifications cannot be executed when the special notification is to be developed.

<Characteristic C group>
In addition, the invention described in the following feature C group is "for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, one is known to be provided with a pattern display device for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns on a display screen. In such a gaming machine, for example, when a gaming ball passes through an operating port provided in a gaming area, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a hit state. The variable display of the above-mentioned symbols is started. When the lottery is won, the combination of the specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state. Transition to the specific gaming state. Along with this, for example, opening and closing of a variable ball entry device provided in a game area has been started, and a large amount of game balls have been paid out (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). " Here, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game in the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature C1. On a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of variable display areas (each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3) are set, a symbol display means (symbol display device 161) for scrolling and displaying a symbol string corresponding to the variable display area. ,
Information acquisition means (a function to execute a winning process for a working port in the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers, and
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute the process of step S501) and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result, the privilege grant means (function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player, and
In one game round based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, after the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, the unit display for stopping or temporarily stopping the pattern is performed at least once. In each game time, the game time control means (a function of executing the fluctuation start process by the main control device 81, effect control) that controls the pattern display means so as to stop and display the result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. (Function to execute variable display processing by device 82) and
With the special notification means (a function of executing the effect setting process for the hold notice in the effect control device 82) that the game time control means displays a stop display or a temporary stop display of a specific pattern combination to perform a special notification (for example, a hold notice). With
In the mode of the stop display or the temporary stop display of the specific pattern combination,
A first display mode (for example, a weak chance eye) in which the degree of scattering of each pattern constituting the specific pattern combination in the scroll direction is set to be relatively small, and
It includes a second display mode (for example, a strong chance eye) in which the degree of scattering of each pattern constituting the specific pattern combination in the scroll direction is set to be relatively large.
When the grant correspondence result is obtained in the game times in which the special notification is executed or in the game times after the game times, the second display mode is selected from the first display mode and the second display mode. If it is easy to be performed and the special notification is executed in the game times or the game times after the game times and the result is not the grant correspondence result, the first display mode of the first display mode and the second display mode is used. A game machine characterized by having a selection means set so as to be easy to select.

In a game machine of a type in which a sequence of symbols is displayed on a display screen, it is common to shift to a reach display by displaying a stop display or a temporary stop display in which the symbols are grouped close to each other. When shifting to a special gaming state (for example, winning) that is advantageous to the player, such a reach display is often performed. For this reason, the player's attention tends to be directed to a very limited area of the display screen.

Here, as shown in this feature, a difference is set in the degree of scattering of the patterns when the specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped, and the degree of the scattering is increased, which is expected to result in the grant determination result. If the configuration is such that the degree is large, it is possible to encourage the player's attention to be directed to a wide area of the display screen. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the effect of the display screen being overlooked and the effect function not being exerted well.

Feature C2. On a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of variable display areas (each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3) are set, a symbol display means (symbol display device 161) for scrolling and displaying a symbol string corresponding to the variable display area. ,
Information acquisition means (a function to execute a winning process for a working port in the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers, and
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute the process of step S501) and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result, the privilege grant means (function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player, and
In one game round based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, after the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, the unit display for stopping or temporarily stopping the pattern is performed at least once. In each game time, the game time control means (a function of executing the fluctuation start process by the main control device 81, effect control) that controls the pattern display means so as to stop and display the result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. (Function to execute variable display processing by device 82) and
With the special notification means (a function of executing the effect setting process for the hold notice in the effect control device 82) that the game time control means displays a stop display or a temporary stop display of a specific pattern combination to perform a special notification (for example, a hold notice). With
In the mode of the stop display or the temporary stop display of the specific pattern combination,
A first display mode (for example, a weak chance eye) in which the separation distance between the symbols constituting the specific pattern combination in the scroll direction is set to be relatively small, and
It includes a second display mode (for example, a strong chance eye) in which the separation distance between the symbols constituting the specific pattern combination in the scroll direction is set to be relatively large.
When the grant correspondence result is obtained in the game times in which the special notification is executed or in the game times after the game times, the second display mode is selected from the first display mode and the second display mode. If it is easy to be performed and the special notification is executed in the game times or the game times after the game times and the result is not the grant correspondence result, the first display mode of the first display mode and the second display mode is used. A game machine characterized by having a selection means set so as to be easy to select.

In a game machine of a type in which a sequence of symbols is displayed on a display screen, it is common to shift to a reach display by displaying a stop display or a temporary stop display in which the symbols are grouped close to each other. When shifting to a special gaming state (for example, winning) that is advantageous to the player, such a reach display is often performed. For this reason, the player's attention tends to be directed to a very limited area of the display screen.

Here, as shown in this feature, a plurality of distances between the patterns when the specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped are set to cause a difference in the degree of scattering of the specific pattern assembly, and the distance ( If the degree of scattering) is increased and the degree of expectation as a result of the grant determination is increased, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention to a wide area of the display screen. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the effect of the display screen being overlooked and the effect function not being exerted well.

Feature C3. A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub display area Rs) are set in the variable display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means.
The second region is arranged so as to include a region on the upstream side of the first region on the display screen in the scroll direction of the pattern row.
In the first display mode, the specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped in the first area.
In the second display mode, the feature C1 or the feature C2 is characterized in that the specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped over both the first region and the second region. The game machine described in.

As shown in the feature C1 and the like, the difference between the first display mode and the second display mode is difficult to understand because the regions in which the specific pattern combination is formed are different in the first region / the second region. It can be suppressed.

Feature C4. The information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination is before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. It is equipped with a destination identification means (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the main control device 81) to be specified at the timing.
When the specific result by the first-specific means is a predetermined specific result, the special notification means is performed before the game related to the special information to be specified by the first-specific means. By controlling the pattern display means so that the mode of the stop display or the temporary stop display of the game times becomes the first display mode or the second display mode, the special result corresponding to the specific result of the prior identification means is obtained. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C1 to the feature C3, which has a means for giving a notification (holding notice).

According to the feature C4, when the special notification corresponding to the specific result of the prior identification means is executed, the degree of variation in the specific pattern combination becomes large, and the expectation for the subsequent game times increases. .. That is, the player proceeds to the subsequent game times with the player's field of view expanded by the specific notification. As a result, even when an effect corresponding to the grant determination result is performed on the display screen, the effect (for example, a detailed effect) can be overlooked by directing the player's consciousness to a wide area of the display screen. Can be suitably suppressed. In addition, when the subsequent production is performed in a narrow range (for example, the center of the display screen), the production is performed in a state where the field of view is widened, and it is of course possible to prevent the production from being overlooked. It can contribute to improving the impact of the production.

Feature C5. When the determination result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, as a variation mode of the game times executed by the game times control means, a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is performed on a preset effective line. Is set to be displayed as a stop display or a temporary stop display.
As the unit display, by stopping the variable display of the pattern in at least a part of the variable display area, the reach pattern combination in which a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result may be established is the effective line or the effective line thereof. Is set to form a reach line by stopping and displaying it on a different line, and to display a pattern variation in the remaining variation display area under the situation where the reach line is formed.
At least as the reach fluctuation display
The reach pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed, and the reach corresponding pattern forming the predetermined pattern combination together with the reach pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the reach line by stopping on the reach line. Reach fluctuation display and
An off-reach variation display is set in which the reach pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed, and the reach-corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed by shifting from the reach line to the upstream side or the downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern. And
The special notification means includes the unit display including a result mode displayed when the game round related to the predetermined special information is completed based on the predetermined special information being acquired by the information acquisition means. Is executed, the special control means (effect control) that controls the pattern display means to perform the special notification so that the out-reach unit display, which is the unit display including the out-of-reach variation display, is executed. It has a function of executing the processes of steps S3805 to S3812 and steps S3906 to S3914 by the device 82).
At least as the off-reach unit display
A first-class off-reach unit display in which the reach-corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in a first area away from the reach line on the upstream side or the downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern.
A second-class off-reach unit display in which the reach-corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in a second area further away from the reach line on the upstream side or the downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern from the first area.
Is set,
The special control means includes the selection means, and when the selection means displays the predetermined pattern combination via the deviation reach unit display, the selection means is more than the type 1 deviation reach unit display. It is configured so that it is easy to select the type 2 out-of-reach unit display, and when the predetermined pattern combination is not displayed, it is easier to select the type 1 out-of-reach unit display than the type 2 out-of-reach unit display. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3.

When a privilege (for example, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than usual) is given to the player, the reach-corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the predetermined combination of patterns is stopped and displayed. In a situation where the reach variation display is performed, the player expects the reach-compatible pattern to reach the reach line on the upstream side of the reach line, and stops the display as it is when the reach-compatible pattern reaches the reach line. I expect it to be done.

In such a configuration, it is assumed that the closer the reach-compatible pattern is to the reach line, the higher the attention to the game, while the farther the reach-compatible pattern is from the reach line, the lower the attention is. In addition, it is expected that the degree of attention will drop at once by shifting to the reach variation display and the reach-compatible pattern is stopped and displayed before the reach line.

In this regard, according to this feature, the off-reach unit display may be set to be executed before the transition unit display in which the stop result corresponding to the grant response result is displayed is executed. Then, as this out-of-reach unit display, the reach-corresponding pattern is displayed from the reach line as compared with the first out-of-reach variation display in which the reach-corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in the first area away from the reach line. The second out-of-reach variation display, which is stopped and displayed in the second region located on the upstream side or the downstream side of the first region, has a higher selection rate. Therefore, as a player, it can be expected that the farther the reach-corresponding pattern is from the reach line, the more the privilege will be granted as a result of the grant correspondence. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the degree of attention caused by the positional relationship between the reach line and the reach-corresponding pattern in the situation where the reach variation display is performed.

Feature C6. On a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of variable display areas (each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3) are set, a symbol display means (symbol display device 161) for scrolling and displaying a symbol string corresponding to the variable display area. ,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a function of executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
Acquired information storage means (holding area RE) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Grant determination means (step in the main control device 81) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. Function to execute the processing of S501) and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result, the privilege grant means (function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player, and
In one game round based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, after the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, the unit display for stopping or temporarily stopping the pattern is performed at least once. In each game time, the game time control means (a function of executing the fluctuation start process by the main control device 81, effect control) that controls the pattern display means so as to stop and display the result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. It is equipped with a function to execute variable display processing by the device 82).
When the determination result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, as a variation mode of the game times executed by the game times control means, a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is performed on a preset effective line. Is set to be displayed as a stop display or a temporary stop display.
As the unit display, by stopping the variable display of the pattern in at least a part of the variable display area, the reach pattern combination in which a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result may be established is the effective line or the effective line thereof. Is set to form a reach line by stopping and displaying it on a different line, and to display a pattern variation in the remaining variation display area under the situation where the reach line is formed.
At least as the reach fluctuation display
The reach pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed, and the reach corresponding pattern forming the predetermined pattern combination together with the reach pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the reach line by stopping on the reach line. Reach fluctuation display and
An off-reach variation display is set in which the reach pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed, and the reach-corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed by shifting from the reach line to the upstream side or the downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern. It ’s a game machine
Rather than executing the unit display including the result mode displayed when the game round related to the predetermined special information is completed based on the predetermined special information being acquired by the information acquisition means. Prior, special control means (steps S3805 to step S3812 by the effect control device 82, steps S3906 to step S3906 to control the pattern display means so that the out-reach unit display, which is the unit display including the out-of-reach variation display, is executed. The function of executing the process of step S3914) is provided.
At least as the off-reach unit display
A first-class off-reach unit display in which the reach-corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in a first area away from the reach line on the upstream side or the downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern.
A second-class off-reach unit display in which the reach-corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in a second area further away from the reach line on the upstream side or the downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern from the first area.
Is set,
When the special control means displays the predetermined pattern combination via the out-of-reach unit display, the type 2 out-of-reach unit display is more likely to be selected than the first-class out-of-reach unit display. When the predetermined pattern combination is not displayed, the type 1 out-of-reach unit display is more easily selected than the type 2 out-of-reach unit display. A game machine to be.

When a privilege (for example, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than usual) is given to the player, the reach-corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the predetermined combination of patterns is stopped and displayed. In a situation where the reach variation display is performed, the player expects the reach-compatible pattern to reach the reach line on the upstream side of the reach line, and stops the display as it is when the reach-compatible pattern reaches the reach line. I expect it to be done.

In such a configuration, it is assumed that the closer the reach-compatible pattern is to the reach line, the higher the attention to the game, while the farther the reach-compatible pattern is from the reach line, the lower the attention is. In addition, it is expected that the degree of attention will drop at once by shifting to the reach variation display and the reach-compatible pattern is stopped and displayed before the reach line.

In this regard, according to this feature, the off-reach unit display may be set to be executed before the transition unit display in which the stay result corresponding to the grant response result is displayed is executed. Then, as this out-of-reach unit display, the reach-corresponding pattern is displayed from the reach line as compared with the first out-of-reach variation display in which the reach-corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in the first area away from the reach line. The second out-of-reach variation display, which is stopped and displayed in the second region located on the upstream side or the downstream side of the first region, has a higher selection rate. Therefore, as a player, it can be expected that the farther the reach-corresponding pattern is from the reach line, the more the privilege will be granted as a result of the grant correspondence. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the degree of attention caused by the positional relationship between the reach line and the reach-corresponding pattern in the situation where the reach variation display is performed.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C5 or feature C6, wherein the first region and the second region are provided on the downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern with respect to the reach line.

In a configuration in which a privilege is given when a reach-compatible pattern stops at the reach line, the degree of attention of the reach variation display tends to decrease at once, especially after the reach-compatible pattern has passed the reach line. In this respect, as shown in this feature, by providing the first region and the second region on the downstream side of the reach line, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention even after passing through the reach line.

Feature C8. The acquired information storage means stores special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
The grant determination means sequentially determines the grant of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination is before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. Destination identification means to be specified at the timing (function to execute confirmation processing for hold notice in the main control device 81) and
When the specific result by the prior identification means is a predetermined specific result, the game round is performed before the game round related to the special information that is the specific target of the prior specific means. By controlling the pattern display means so that the stop display mode is a predetermined display mode for stopping and displaying a specific pattern combination, a special notification (holding notice) corresponding to a specific result of the prior identification means is performed. It is provided with means (a function of executing the effect setting process for the hold notice in the effect control device 82).
As the predetermined display mode, a first display mode corresponding to the type 1 off-reach unit display and a second display mode corresponding to the type 2 off-reach unit display are set. The gaming machine according to any one of feature C5 to feature C7.

The special notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not the target of the grant determination may be executed at the timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. is there. That is, for the player, not only the game for confirming the acquisition determination result of the acquired special information, but also when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the order of being the target of the assignment determination is later. A game is added in which the result of the special information of the above is confirmed or predicted according to the content of the special notification when it is the target of the grant determination. As a result, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed.

In such a configuration, the above special notification is performed as a reach unit display. That is, in the game times in which the special notification is performed, the player expects that the reach variation display executed will correspond to the grant response result (not the out-of-reach unit display). Pay attention to the times. On the other hand, even if the reach variation display is a deviated reach variation display, if the deviated reach unit display corresponding to the special notification is used, there is still room for a privilege to be given in the subsequent game times.

As described in Feature C5, etc., the type 2 out-of-reach unit display in which the reach-compatible pattern stops in the first area is more than the type 1 out-of-reach unit display in which the reach-compatible pattern stops in the first area. There is a high degree of expectation that the game will shift to a special game state (high selection rate). Therefore, the player first expects that the privilege will be given in the game times in which the reach variation display is performed, and if not, the reach-compatible pattern will be from the first area. Also expect to stop in the second area. By doing so, a novel game effect is realized in which the degree of attention to the reach variation display of the game times is increased according to the game results of the subsequent game times.

Feature C9. When the determination result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, the game time control means is the second type by the special control means in the game times related to the special information that is the target of the grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to feature C8, characterized in that it is provided with a limiting means for limiting the off-reach unit display.

According to the above configuration, in the game times when the determination result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, it is restricted that the second type out-of-reach unit display is performed. In other words, in the game times in which the second type out-of-reach unit display is performed, the special information related to the game times does not correspond to the grant response result, and the privilege is not given in this game time. Therefore, when the reach-corresponding pattern passes through the reach line and further passes through the first region, the expectation for granting the privilege is diminished in the game round, and the degree of attention may be lowered. However, even in this case, as described in feature C8, if the reach-compatible pattern stops in the second region, the expectation for granting the privilege will increase in the subsequent game rounds, so that the decrease in attention is preferably avoided. it can.

Feature C10. When the determination result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, the description type 1 out-of-reach unit display is selected by the special notification means in the game times related to the special information that is the target of the grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to the feature C8 or the feature C9, wherein the probability is set higher than the probability that the second type out-of-reach unit display is selected.

According to the above configuration, once the reach-compatible symbol is stopped in the first area in the out-of-reach unit display, the probability that the privilege will be given in the next and subsequent game times is lower than the probability that the reach-compatible symbol is stopped in the second area. However, there is a high probability that benefits will be granted in this game. In other words, from the relationship between the first area and the second area, the player has high expectations for this game if the reach-compatible pattern stops in the first area, and from the next time onward if the reach-compatible pattern stops in the second area. I have high expectations for the game times. As a result, the degree of attention of the reach variation display can be suitably increased in relation to the stop area of the reach-corresponding pattern in the reach variation display.

Feature Multiple reach lines are set to be formed at the same time so that the first reach pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the reach line of C11.1 and the second reach pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the other reach lines. Being done
In the reach variation display, the first pattern that forms the predetermined pattern combination together with the first reach pattern combination and the predetermined pattern combination that is different from the first pattern and together with the second reach pattern combination. Includes a variable display that sets both the second pattern and the second pattern to pass over the reach line.
In the special notification means, in a situation where the first reach pattern combination and the second reach pattern combination are stopped and displayed on the plurality of reach lines, the reach-corresponding pattern of the reach line formed by the first pattern is the first. One of feature C8 to feature C10, wherein the reach-corresponding pattern of the reach line formed by the second pattern is set to stop in the second area when stopped in one area. The game machine described in.

According to the above configuration, in the plurality of line reach, when the first symbol stops in the first region, the second symbol stops in the second region. Therefore, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for a pattern that forms any reach line in a plurality of line reach. In particular, as described in feature C8, stopping in the second area raises the expectation of the next and subsequent game times rather than stopping in the first area. Therefore, as described above, the first pattern stops in the first area and the first pattern is stopped. When the second pattern is stopped in the second area, it is expected that the reach variation display by the second pattern is performed in the game times after the next time, rather than the reach variation display by the first pattern. The degree becomes high. In this way, by associating the variation display of the game times this time with the reach-compatible pattern of the reach variation display that may occur after the next time, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention for the variation display of the game times after the next time. Become.

Feature C12. The special notification means is
This game is determined by the stop mode determining means when the specific result by the prior identification means becomes a predetermined specific result during the variable display from the start of the game round to the stop display. The first determination means for determining whether or not the mode of the stop display of the times corresponds to the reach variation display, and
When it is determined by the first determination means that the reach variation display is supported, the determination means for determining whether or not it is possible to change the mode of the stop display of a specific pattern sequence other than the pattern strings forming the reach line. When,
When it is determined by the determination means that the mode of the stop display can be changed, the mode of the stop display of the specific pattern row being displayed in a variable manner according to the predetermined specific result is changed to the predetermined display mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features C8 to C11, characterized in that it has a changing means for changing to a corresponding one.

As shown in feature C8, when the effect corresponding to the prior specific result is performed by the reach variation display, if the specific pattern sequence can be changed at the timing, the pattern string can be changed. It is possible to reflect the specific result by the prior identification means in the stop display mode in the previous game round. As a result, it is possible to suppress restrictions on the special notification using the prior identification means and preferably increase the chances of the special notification being executed.

Even in the case of rewriting the effect as described above, it is sufficient to rewrite the mode of the stop display of the specific pattern sequence, so that the increase in the control load due to the rewriting can be suitably suppressed.

Feature C13. The variation display mode of the pattern sequence includes a high discrimination variation mode and a low discrimination variation mode in which the distinctiveness of the pattern is relatively high and low, and the high discrimination variation mode and the low discrimination variation mode are each. It is possible to switch for each pattern row,
The determination means is described in feature C12, which determines that the stop display mode of the specific pattern sequence can be changed when the variation display mode of the specific pattern sequence is the low identification variation mode. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the variation display is performed in the low discrimination variation mode in which the discriminativeness of the pattern is low, the mode of the stop display is changed, so that the discomfort given to the player by the change can be reduced. Can be done.

Further, if the special notification is provided by such a change, it is not necessary to adjust the execution period of the game times indiscriminately, and it is possible to more preferably suppress the increase in the control load due to the rewriting.

<Feature D group>
In addition, the invention described in the following feature D group states that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a game board having a game area formed on the front surface mounted on a frame. By winning a prize in the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball launched based on the operation is selected by a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Benefits such as payout of pachinko and pachinko balls are given to the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-190511). By providing a symbol display device that displays and various gaming devices related to game production such as movable accessories that suggest the result of the lottery by operating according to the variable display of the symbol, the degree of attention to the gaming machine is increased. Some of them have been improved. With such a configuration, the movement of the game ball toward the ball entry section, the enjoyment of the benefits based on the prize, and the process (directing) leading to the enjoyment of the benefits are integrated. In addition, the above-mentioned degree of attention has been improved by arranging game parts such as decorative members for the purpose of improving the appearance of the game machine in the game area. In recent years, there are some machines that have become larger in size and have a stronger impact, and the attention of the players has been improved. ”However, regarding the background and technology,“ However, the above-mentioned type In the gaming machine, the configuration that allows the movement of the gaming ball to be visually tracked is itself a means for improving the original interest of the gaming machine. Therefore, when the above-mentioned gaming equipment and game parts are increased in size, etc. It can be assumed that the flow area of the game ball is secured. When the game area (flow area of the game ball) and the game device are to coexist, for example, expanding the game board itself can be an effective solution. However, in reality, it is difficult to deal with such a situation because the width of the gaming machine is limited due to the relationship with the island equipment of the gaming hall. In other words, for example, the gaming area and the gaming equipment, etc. There is still room for improvement in the structure of the gaming machine in order to preferably improve the degree of attention to the game by coexisting with the above. "

Feature D1. A game board (game board 100) in which a game area (game area 103) through which a game ball flows down is formed on the front surface.
It is provided with a display means (design display device 161) that is arranged behind the game board and executes a predetermined display effect on the display screen (display screen G).
The game board is formed so that at least a portion facing the display screen has transparency and the display screen can be visually recognized through the facing portion.
Movable accessories (movable accessories 170 to 173, 310, 320) that are arranged between the game board and the display means and can be switched between a first state (for example, a shielded state) and a second state (for example, a non-shielded state). , 330, 340).

According to the feature D1, the display screen can be visually recognized through the portion of the game board facing the display screen. In order to ensure the visibility of the display screen, it is not necessary to form an opening for the display screen in the game board, so that it is possible to prevent the game area in which the game ball flows down from being compressed due to the guarantee of visibility. ..

Here, as for the movable accessory, since the movable accessory is arranged behind the game board, there is no possibility that the game ball flowing down the game area and the movable accessory collide with each other, and there are restrictions on the operation mode of the movable accessory. Can be reduced. Further, since the movable accessory is arranged in front of the display means, the association between the movement of the movable accessory and the display effect by the display means is strengthened, and a dynamic effect in which both are integrated becomes possible.

As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to integrally produce the game by using the movable accessory and the display means while avoiding the obsolete game of enjoying the flow of the game ball by securing a wide game area. It can contribute to improving the interest of the machine.

It should be noted that "the movable accessory overlaps the display screen of the display means in the front-rear direction in the first state, and the overlap with the display screen is smaller in the second state than in the first state, or with the display screen. By making the configuration "avoids overlap of", it is possible to associate the change in the range in which the movable accessory and the display means overlap with the display effect.

Feature D2. The movable accessory has a movable body displaceable on the back side of the facing portion, and the movable body is placed in a second position (for example, as the second state is switched to the first state). By shifting from the non-shielded position) to the first position (for example, the shielded position), the mode of overlapping of the movable body with respect to the display screen changes.
The game according to feature D1, wherein a guide portion (for example, a guide groove or a rail) for guiding the movable body from the first position to the second position is provided on the back surface portion of the facing portion. Machine.

According to the feature D2, it is possible to stabilize the movement of the movable body (movable accessory) by adding the function of guiding the movable body to the facing portion of the game board.

For example, when the movable body is enlarged or the operating range of the movable body is set wide, the effect using the movable accessory can be made to have an impact, and the degree of attention to the game machine is improved. It is advantageous to do. However, on the other hand, it is assumed that the movement of the movable body tends to be unstable. As described above, the unstable movement of the movable body causes malfunction and deterioration of appearance, and may be an obstacle in exerting the above effect. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience, and it is possible to preferably exert the effect function by the movable accessory.

For example, when the support position (holding position) of the movable accessory is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the display screen (specifically, the display area), the movable body can be moved in front of the display screen. , The position variation of the movable body tends to be large in the part far from the support position. In this respect, if the game board has a facing portion and a guide portion is provided on the facing portion, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. In other words, the technical idea shown in this feature should be applied to a movable accessory that is usually set to have a small overlap with the display screen and is provided with a movable body that is displaced so that the overlap becomes large depending on the situation. This can contribute to the realization of a preferable configuration in which the effect function of the movable accessory can be stably exhibited.

Feature D3. A predetermined pattern that can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine is provided on the facing portion of the game board.
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the guide portion is formed so as to overlap the predetermined pattern from behind the predetermined pattern.

If the guide unit is conspicuous when viewing the display screen through the game board, the appearance of the game machine may deteriorate. Therefore, by arranging the guide portion behind the pattern formed on the game board (opposing portion), the guide portion can be made inconspicuous and the above-mentioned deterioration in appearance can be suppressed.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the predetermined pattern is provided on a front surface portion of the facing portion.

According to the feature D4, it is possible to prevent the presence of the guide portion from becoming a factor that makes it difficult to give the predetermined pattern, and to allow the predetermined pattern and the guide portion to coexist suitably in the facing portions of the game board. It becomes.

Feature D5. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the grant determination means (execution of the process of step S501 in the main control device 81) for determining whether or not the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player is supported. Function to do) and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result, the privilege grant means (function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player Prepare,
The display means has a plurality of variable display areas (each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3) set on the display screen, and the symbols are variablely displayed in each variable display area according to the result of the grant determination. It is configured to stop and display the combination of patterns on the effective line.
The gaming machine according to feature D3 or feature D4, wherein the predetermined pattern is formed along the effective line and teaches the effective line.

According to the feature D5, the guide portion is camouflaged by the pattern that teaches the effective line, and the predetermined pattern and the guide portion can be suitably coexisted.

Feature D6. The movable body is rotatably supported, and any one of feature D2 to feature D5, characterized in that an engaging portion that engages with the guide portion is formed at the rotating tip portion thereof. The game machine described in one.

When the movable body is configured to be rotatable, the swing width (for example, misalignment) at the rotating tip portion tends to be large during the operation of the movable body. Therefore, if the guide target by the guide portion is the rotating tip portion (engagement portion) of the movable body as shown in this feature, the above-mentioned blurring can be suppressed and the movement of the movable body can be suitably stabilized.

Feature D7. The guide portion is any one of the feature D2 to the feature D6, which is configured to function as a support portion for supporting the movable body at least in a state where the movable body is arranged at the first position. The game machine described in one.

According to the feature D7, by imparting a support function to the guide portion, it is possible to stabilize the posture at the first position.

In particular, in combination with the feature D6, the support load on the rotation base end side can be reduced by supporting the rotation tip of the movable body. In addition, the configuration is also advantageous in suppressing the misalignment of the rotating tip portion.

The facing portions and the guide portions shown in the features D2 to D7 are inseparably related to the existence of a movable body operating behind the facing portions in order to exert the above-mentioned various effects.

Feature D8. By overlapping the display screen, the movable accessory is provided with a shielding function that reduces the visibility of the overlapped portion.
A switching means (effect control device 82) for switching the movable accessory to the first state or the second state, and
When the game ball reaches a region that overlaps the movable accessory in the front and rear in the situation where the movable accessory is in the first state on the game board, the detection means (detection sensor 136a, With 136b)
By driving and controlling the switching means based on the detection result of the detecting means, the switching control means for switching the movable accessory to the first state or the second state (execution of variable processing by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D1 to the feature D7, which is characterized by having the function (function).

According to the above configuration, the state of the movable accessory can be changed based on the detection result of the detecting means, that is, based on the presence or absence of the game ball passing in front of the movable accessory. In this way, by switching the state of the movable accessory according to the movement of the game ball, it is possible to impart a relationship between the movement of the game ball, the movement of the movable accessory, and the display content of the display screen, for example.

Feature D9. In the first state, the movable accessory overlaps the display screen of the display means in the front-rear direction, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen is smaller than that in the first state, or the overlap with the display screen is small. It is configured to be avoided
The switching control means is characterized by having means for displacing the movable accessory from the first state to the second state based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. The gaming machine described in D8.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball is detected by the detecting means, the movable accessory changes from the first state to the second state, and the area where the movable accessory and the display means overlap is narrowed. For example, by preventing the detected game ball from overlapping the movable accessory in the front-rear direction, the game ball flows down so as to cross the display means (display screen). By allowing the movement of the game ball in front of the display screen in this way, for example, it is possible to associate the movement of the game ball with the display effect by the display means.

Feature D10. In the first state, the movable accessory overlaps the display screen of the display means in the front-rear direction, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen is smaller than that in the first state, or the overlap with the display screen is small. It is configured to be avoided
The switching control means has a means for switching the movable accessory from the second state to the first state based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to feature D9.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball is detected by the detecting means, the movable accessory is switched from the second state to the first state, and the area where the movable accessory and the display means overlap is widened. When the movable accessory is arranged in the first state, the visibility of the display means existing behind the movable accessory is reduced, and the game ball flows down in a range overlapping the portion of the display means whose visibility is reduced in the front-rear direction. As a result, the movement of the flowing game ball is emphasized, and it becomes easier to visually follow the movement of the game ball as compared with the case of flowing down with the display screen as the background.

Feature D11. A ball entry port provided in the game area where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a place where the game ball entering the ball entry port is provided in the game area. It is equipped with a ball passage (front side ball passage 134, back side ball passage 143) that connects the outlets that lead out to different locations.
The ball passage is formed at a position where the movable accessory is overlapped with the movable accessory in the front-rear direction when the movable accessory is in the first state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D8 to D10, wherein the detecting means detects a game ball passing through the ball passage.

According to the above configuration, the target detected by the detecting means is limited to the game ball passing through the ball passage. In order to exert the effect shown in the feature D8 and the like, it is sufficient to set the movement of the movable accessory and the display content of the display screen in the positional relationship with the ball passage, and it is necessary to assume various flow-down modes of the game ball. Absent. This makes it possible to simplify the production design. Further, since the presence or absence of the ball entering the ball entry port is reflected in the movement of the movable accessory, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to grasp the relationship between the movable accessory and the movement of the game ball.

Feature D12. A ball entry portion (operating port 115) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With a grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S501 by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion. ,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (game by the main control device 81). Function to execute state transition processing) and
A guide portion provided in the game area, the game ball derived from the ball passage has a rollable rolling region, and the game ball on the roll region is guided to the entry portion is formed. The gaming machine according to feature D11, which comprises a stage portion (stage 144).

According to the above configuration, by flowing the game ball into the ball passage, the game ball is easily guided to the ball passage → the rolling region → the guide portion → the ball entry portion. The entry into the entry section is related to the grant determination. By applying the configuration shown in the above feature D5 to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to see the above-mentioned effect from the relationship between the movable accessory and the display means and the movement of the game ball. Can be prevented from not being exhibited well.

Feature D13. In the first state, the movable accessory overlaps the display screen of the display means in the front-rear direction, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen is smaller than that in the first state, or the overlap with the display screen is small. It is configured to be avoided
The detection means is characterized in that the movable accessory is arranged in a portion upstream of the region overlapping in the front-rear direction in the situation where the movable accessory is arranged in the first state in the ball passage. The gaming machine according to D12.

According to the above configuration, since the detection means is provided on the upstream side of the area where the movable accessory overlaps with the movable accessory in the ball passage, the game ball entering the ball passage overlaps the movable accessory in the front-rear direction in the game machine. The existence of the game ball can be grasped before. As a result, the movable accessory can be operated before the game balls overlap, and a preferable configuration for performing the effect is realized.

In particular, in combination with the feature D9, it becomes easy to let the game ball flow down in front of the exposed portion with the display screen exposed. Further, in combination with the feature D10, it becomes easy for the game ball to flow down in front of the movable accessory while the display means is shielded by the movable accessory.

Feature D14. The switching control means is characterized in that the state of the movable accessory is switched based on the detection of a predetermined number of game balls defined as a plurality of numbers by the detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of D13.

According to the above configuration, it is an operating condition of the movable accessory that a predetermined number of game balls are detected by the detection means. Therefore, as a player who wants to see the effect using the movable accessory, the detection means detects as much as possible. The game ball will flow down as it is done. As a result, it is possible to encourage active participation in the game and contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D15. The display means is configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of types of patterns on the display screen.
The plurality of types of symbols include a first symbol (specific symbol) and a second symbol (non-specific symbol) whose related profit is less than that of the first symbol as a symbol related to the interest of the player. And
In the first state, the movable accessory overlaps the display screen of the display means in the front-rear direction, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen is smaller than that in the first state, or the overlap with the display screen is small. It is configured to be avoided
The movable accessory is configured to overlap at least one of the first pattern and the second pattern when the movable accessory is in the first state.
With respect to the first pattern and the second pattern that overlap with the movable accessory, the profit set for the non-overlapping pattern is played by avoiding the overlap with the movable accessory. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D1 to the feature D14, which is provided with a means (a function of executing a hold notice control process by the effect control device 82) given to a person.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first pattern and the second pattern related to the player's profit are displayed on the display screen, the second pattern is set so that the related profit is smaller than that of the first pattern. Therefore, it is considered that the player wants the first pattern to be displayed rather than the second pattern. Since the movable accessory is configured to overlap the first and second patterns, when the first and second patterns are displayed on the display means, the player displays any of the patterns. Show interest in (becomes visible). With such a configuration, it is possible to produce an effect in which the benefits related to the first pattern and the second pattern, the pattern overlapping the movable accessory in the front-rear direction, and the positional displacement of the movable accessory are associated with each other. Is possible. This can contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D16. The display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of patterns on the display screen, and is set to notify the player of information related to profit according to the type of the displayed pattern.
In the first state, the movable accessory overlaps the display screen of the display means in the front-rear direction, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen is smaller than that in the first state, or the overlap with the display screen is small. It is configured to be avoided
The game machine is equipped with a plurality of the movable accessories.
The plurality of movable accessories overlap each other with a predetermined pattern displayed on the display means in the first state, and the overlap with the predetermined pattern is avoided in the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D1 to the feature D15, which is characterized by being configured in.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined pattern overlaps with a plurality of movable accessories in the first state, and the weights are avoided when the movable accessories are in the second state. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect in which a predetermined pattern is associated with the state of each movable accessory. By applying the technical idea shown in this feature to the configuration in which the player is notified of the information related to the profit by the type of the pattern displayed on the display means, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

<Feature E group>
In addition, the invention described in the following feature E group states that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a game board having a game area formed on the front surface mounted on a frame. By winning a prize in the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball launched based on the operation is selected by a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Benefits such as payout of pachinko and pachinko balls are given to the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-190511). By adopting various game devices related to game production such as movable accessories that suggest the result of the lottery by operating according to the display device and the variable display of the symbol, the degree of attention to the game machine can be improved. There is something that is planned. With such a configuration, the movement of the game ball toward the ball entry section, the enjoyment of the benefits based on the prize, and the process (directing) leading to the enjoyment of the benefits are integrated, and the game is played. The interest of the machine has been improved. In addition, there are some machines in which the above-mentioned degree of attention has been improved by arranging game parts such as decorative members for the purpose of improving the appearance of the game machine in the game area. Then, regarding the background and technology that the above-mentioned game equipment and the like have been made larger to enable more impactful production and the degree of attention of the player has been improved, "However, the above-mentioned type of game In the machine, the structure that allows the movement of the game ball to be visually tracked is itself a means for improving the original interest of the game machine. Therefore, when the above-mentioned game equipment and game parts are increased in size, the game is played. It can be assumed that the flow area of the ball is secured. When the game area (flow area of the game ball) and the game equipment are to coexist, for example, expanding the game board itself can be an effective solution. In the actual situation, it is difficult to deal with such a situation because the width of the gaming machine is limited due to the relationship with the island equipment of the gaming hall. In other words, the coexistence of the gaming area and the gaming equipment, etc. There is still room for improvement in the structure of the gaming machine in order to achieve such a problem. ”The invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature E1. It is equipped with a pair of movable accessories (movable accessories 310, 320, etc.) that can be opened and closed.
Each of the movable accessories has a fan surface portion (fan surface portion 312, etc.) formed so as to expand toward the front side of the game machine when the movable accessory is opened.
The fan surface portion is configured so that one end and the other end in the opening / closing direction are displaced in the front-rear direction in the open state, and are folded so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction in the closed state.
Each of the movable accessories is arranged so as to have the same position in the front-rear direction, and when the movable accessory is in the open state, the movable accessory and the first specific region including the front end portion of the fan surface portion of the movable accessory A gaming machine characterized in that a second specific area including a rear end portion of the fan surface portion of the other movable accessory is configured to overlap in the front-rear direction.

When the foldable movable accessory shown in the feature E1 is mounted, the difference between the open state and the closed state can be clarified, but the increase in the thickness tends to limit the arrangement space. It is assumed that such an inconvenience becomes remarkable by trying to cover a wide area with one movable accessory.

In this respect, as shown in this feature, the number of movable accessories is set to two, and the front-rear positions thereof are aligned with each other, and the first specific region (including the front end portion of the fan surface portion) in the fan surface portion of one movable accessory is included. The area) and the second specific area (the area including the rear end of the fan surface) on the fan surface of the other movable accessory overlap each other in the front-rear direction to widen the coverage range. While realizing this, it is possible to suppress an increase in the overall thickness caused by overlapping these specific regions. As a result, it is possible to secure an arrangement area and an operation area of the movable accessory in a limited space while aiming to widen the production range using the movable accessory.

Feature E2. A picture display means (design display device 161) provided behind the movable accessory and having a display screen (display screen G) for performing a predetermined display effect is provided.
The movable accessory is arranged so as to overlap the display screen in the front-rear direction when it is in the open state, and the light from the display screen is irradiated to the front side of the game machine through the fan surface portion. Ori
A bent portion (bent portion 312c, etc.) that serves as a starting point when folded as the fan surface portion is switched from the open state to the closed state is formed, and the opening / closing direction thereof sandwiches the bent portion. Flat portions (fixed portions 312a, etc.) having different orientations are formed on both sides of the above.
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein at least one of the two flat portions is non-parallel to the display screen when the movable accessory is in the open state.

According to the above configuration, since one of the display screen and the flat portion is non-parallel, the light from the display screen arranged behind is refracted at the flat portion, and the display screen can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine. The sex can be changed. By causing a change in the visibility of the display screen through the movable accessory in this way, it is possible to prevent the appearance from becoming obsolete when the display effect related to the movable accessory is executed.

Feature E3. The fan surface portion has a plurality of long base portions (for example, rib portions 314a and 314b) constituting the flat portion.
The base portions are arranged so that the planes face the front and back, and are connected so as to be rotatable with one end in the elongated direction as the base end portion.
The game according to feature E2, which is provided with an opening / closing means (a function of executing a variable processing process by the effect control device 82) for opening / closing the movable accessory by rotating each base portion. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the open state and the closed state, that is, the range in which the movable accessory spreads can be expanded, and the expansion of the occupied space in the closed state can be minimized.

Feature E4. The fan surface portion includes a seat member having the flat portion and a frame member constituting the skeleton of the movable accessory.
The gaming machine according to feature E3, wherein the frame member is attached to a portion of the seat member that constitutes the base portion.

According to the above configuration, of the flat portions continuous with the bent portion as a boundary, the portion not parallel to the display screen (that is, the portion parallel to the display screen) functions as the base portion of the fan surface portion. When the base portions are stacked so that their planes face the front and back, the thickness of the movable accessory in the front-rear direction can be reduced. However, on the other hand, in the non-parallel portion, light can be excessively transmitted from the display screen as compared with the non-parallel portion. In this respect, since the frame members overlap with each other in the parallel portions, it is possible to adjust the degree of light transmission by the frame members, and it is preferable that excessively direct light is emitted to the front of the game machine. Can be avoided.

It should be noted that the movable accessory may be configured so that the opening / closing direction is parallel to the display screen. If the technical idea shown in this feature is applied to such a configuration (a configuration in which the opening / closing direction is parallel to the display screen), the fan surface portion is visually displayed while suppressing unnecessary expansion of the arrangement area and the operation area of the movable accessory. It is possible to make various changes.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the frame member is attached to the seat member constituting the base portion so that the edge portion thereof follows the bent portion.

According to the above configuration, when the movable accessory is changed from the open state to the closed state, the deformation triggered by the bent portion of the fan surface portion is induced, and the other portions are deformed to the closed state. It is possible to preferably suppress the switching from being performed poorly and the appearance of the fan surface from being deteriorated.

In particular, in the configuration in which the movable accessory is automatically opened and closed by the opening / closing means shown in the feature E3 or the like, there is a concern that the opening / closing function may not be smoothly performed by bending at a position different from the preset bending location. To. In this regard, by applying the technical idea shown in this feature, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of such inconvenience even with an automatically opening / closing movable accessory, and to suppress deterioration of the opening / closing function due to repeated use or the like. Is possible.

Feature E6. The movable accessory has a transmission unit (gear 319) that transmits power from a drive unit (drive motor 313, etc.) to each of the base units, and when the movable accessory is in the closed state, the plurality of base units. Of these, any one of the feature E3 to the feature E5, which is configured to open and close by rotating the other base portion with one of the front portion and the back portion constituting the movable accessory as the base end. The gaming machine described in one.

For example, in a general folding fan, since a force is applied only to the rib portion when the folding fan is opened, the opening and closing operation may not be performed smoothly. In this respect, according to this feature, since power is transmitted to each base portion via the transmission portion, the opening / closing operation can be smoothly performed.

Feature E7. A game board (game board 100) provided in front of the pair of movable accessories and having a game area in which a game ball flows down on the front surface.
Features E1 to E6, which are provided behind the pair of movable accessories and include a display means (design display device 161) having a display screen (display screen G) for performing a predetermined display effect. The game machine described in any one of.

According to the above configuration, a game board is provided in front of the movable accessory, and a display screen is provided in the rear. Even in this case, the pair of movable accessories is installed so that the thickness of the installation area becomes thin as shown in the feature E1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the game board and the display screen from becoming extremely large, and to arrange the movable accessory while suppressing the deterioration of the visibility of the display screen.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein at least a portion of the game board facing the display screen is transparent, and the display screen can be visually recognized through the facing portion.

According to the above configuration, it is not necessary to form an opening in the game board to ensure the visibility of the display screen, and the game area can be set widely while ensuring the visibility of the display screen. In particular, as described in the feature E3 and the like, since the pair of movable accessories are installed so as to be thin, it is possible to suppress an increase in the distance between the game board and the display screen. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display screen from moving away from the player due to a large gap between the display screen and the game board.

Features F1. A pattern display means (design display device 161) that variablely displays a plurality of patterns on a display screen (display screen G), and
Information acquisition means (a function to execute a winning process for a working port in the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers, and
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute the process of step S501) and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result, the privilege grant means (function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player, and
Prior to the grant determination being made by the grant determination means, or based on the grant determination being made by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is made. The stop result corresponding to the determination result of is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the above-mentioned of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing the fluctuation start processing in the main control device 81, a function of executing the fluctuation display control processing in the effect control device 82) that controls the pattern display means so that the pattern variation display is performed. In the game machine equipped
The game time control means determines the stop mode of the pattern in the game time related to the special information subject to the grant determination based on the result of the grant determination for each game time (effect). It has a function of executing the variation start process in the control device 82), and when the variation display of the pattern is performed at each game time, the pattern is stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means to perform the game. It ends the variable display of times.
The information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination is before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. Destination identification means to be specified at the timing (function to execute confirmation processing for hold notice in the main control device 81) and
When the specific result by the prior identification means is a predetermined specific result, the game round is performed before the game round related to the special information that is the specific target of the prior specific means. A special notification means (holding notice in the effect control device 82) that performs a special notification (holding notice) corresponding to the specific result of the prior identification means by controlling the pattern display means so that the stopping mode becomes a predetermined special stopping mode. (A function to execute the effect setting process for
The stop mode determining means determines the mode information so that the stop mode of the pattern becomes the special stop mode based on the establishment of a predetermined condition regardless of the specific result of the prior identification means (the stop mode determining means). It has a function of executing an invalid notice effect such as step S1023 by the effect control device 82).
The special notification means executes processing such as steps S2101 to S2105 by the effect control device 82 after determining whether or not to execute the special notification based on the mode information determined by the prior determination means. A game machine characterized by having a function to perform.

According to the feature F1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not the target of the grant determination is the timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. May be executed in. As a result, for the player, not only the game for confirming the acquisition determination result of the acquired special information, but also the order of being the target of the assignment determination when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means. With regard to the later special information, a game of confirming or predicting the result when the grant determination is made according to the content of the special notification is added, and the game is diversified.

In this feature, in particular, the mode information is determined by the prior determination means so as to be a special stop mode based on the establishment of a predetermined condition regardless of the specific result by the prior specific means. Then, in this case, it is determined by the post-determining means whether or not to execute the special notification based on the aspect information. With such a configuration, in a configuration in which the stop mode is determined at the start of the variation display of the game times, when the variation display is specified by the prior identification means during the execution of the variation display, the game in which the variation display is being executed. The special notification can be executed without changing the stop mode at each time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the change in the variable display time and the local increase in the processing load due to the change in the stop mode, and to appropriately execute the special notification.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating game machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol row in the final stop, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A game machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type game machine using a ball: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol row in a final stop, the symbol variation is started and stopped due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. (Game, etc.) is generated, and further, a throwing device provided with a ball saucer and a throwing device for taking in a game ball from the ball saucer and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball saucer is provided. A game machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown in.

81 ... Main control device, 82 ... Production control device, 100 ... Game board, 103 ... Game area, 115 ... Operating port, 130 ... Center frame, 136a ... Detection sensor, 136b ... Detection sensor, 143 ... Back side ball passage, 153 ... back ball passage, 170 ... 1st movable accessory, 171 ... 2nd movable accessory, 172 ... 3rd movable accessory, 173 ... 4th movable accessory, 202 ... MPU, 212 ... display control device, 242 ... MPU, 243 ... ROM, 300 ... Movable accessory device, 310 ... Upper right movable accessory, 314a ... Anterior rib, 314b ... Posterior rib, 320 ... Movable accessory, 324a ... Anterior rib, 324b ... Posterior rib Part, 330 ... upper left movable accessory, 334a ... anterior rib, 334b ... posterior rib, 340 ... lower left movable, 344a ... anterior rib, 344b ... posterior rib.

Claims (1)

A pattern display means for variable display of a plurality of pattern columns on the display screen,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
Grant determination means for sequentially performing grant determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player.
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result, the privilege grant means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege grant means.
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is made. The stop result corresponding to the determination result of is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the above-mentioned of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means that controls the pattern display means so that a variable display of the pattern is performed, and
The information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination is before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. The destination identification means to be specified at the timing,
When the specific result by the prior identification means is a predetermined specific result, the prior identification is performed in the game rounds that are performed before the game rounds related to the special information that is the specific target of the prior specific means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a special notification means for performing special notification corresponding to a specific result of the means.

Images